Bizhub C250 Field Service

SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07 2005.07
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
FIELDSERVICE
i
FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-20
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub C250 Main Unit
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 9
Adjustment/Setting...................................................................................................... 141
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 313
Appendix..................................................................................................................... 427
Standard Controller
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 13
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 15
DF-601
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5
PC-103/PC-203
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
PC-403
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
ii
AD-503
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ......................................................................................................... 7
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 11
FS-501
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance................................................................................................................... 5
Adjustment/Setting ......................................................................................................... 9
FS-603
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance................................................................................................................... 5
Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 23
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-1
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand
them before doing service work.
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and
CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited
meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
IMPORTANT NOTICE
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,
WARNING AND CAUTION
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium
trouble, and property damage
:Precaution when servicing the
product.
General
precaution
Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when servicing the
product.
General
prohibition
Do not touch
with wet hand
Do not
disassemble
:Direction when servicing the
product.
General
instruction
Unplug Ground/Earth
S-2
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
SAFETY WARNINGS
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with
wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between
relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
Making any modification to the product unless instructed
by KMBT
Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-3
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-
minals of the plug according to the following order:
Black or Brown: L (line)
White or Light Blue: N (neutral)
Green/Yellow: PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
kw
S-4
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi-
neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet
securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
kw
S-5
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or
pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check
whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
S-6
2. Installation Requirements
Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such
as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
S-7
Ventilation
CAUTION
The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any
adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect
the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
S-8
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the external cover
detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-
tric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-
cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
fire.
S-9
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for
deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-
ing position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-
tion state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and
check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
fire.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
S-10
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (ace-
tone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before
any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
S-11
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
S-12
[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recom-
mand par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
S-13
[5] FUSE
[6] Laser Safety
This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
6.1 Internal Laser Radiation
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit
This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The
laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double ple / fusible sur le neutre.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW
Maximum average radiation power (*) 8.0 W
Wavelength 775-800 nm
4038P0C501DA
Laser Aperture of
the Print Head Unit
S-14
U.S.A., Canada
(CDRH Regulation)
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-
dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.
All Areas
Denmark
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undg udsttelse for strling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1
sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens hjeste styrke 10 mW
blgelngden 775-800 nm
S-15
Finland, Sweden
Norway
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-
taa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle laser-
steilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mW
aallonpituus 775-800 nm
VARNING!
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr
laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden 10 mW
vglngden 775-800 nm
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nkymttomlle laser-
steilylle. l katso steeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrining nr denna del r ppnad och sprren r urkopplad.
Betrakta ej strien.
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-
ing, kan brukeren utsettes fr unsynlig laserstrlning, som overskrider grensen
for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 10 mW
blgelengde 775-800 nm
S-16
6.2 Laser Safety Label
A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
6.3 Laser Caution Label
A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
4038P0E505DA
* Only for the U.S.A.
4038P0C503DA
S-17
6.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT
When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC Drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the users premises.
The Print Head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field. Replace the Unit or
Assembly including the Control Board. Therefore, remove the Laser Diode, and do not
perform Control Board trimmer adjustment.
S-18
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
4038P0C506DA
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is
turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here
when the power is turned ON to
avoid getting an electric shock.
S-19
CAUTION:
4038P0C504DA
WARNING
Do not position the used Waste
Toner Box so that it is standing
on end or tilted, otherwise toner
may spill.
WARNING
Do not burn used Toner Cartridges.
Toner expelled from the fire is dan-
gerous.
WARNING
Do not burn used Imaging
Units.
Toner expelled from the
fire is dangerous.
CAUTION
The area around the Fusing Unit is extremely hot.
Touching any part other than those indicated may
result in burns.
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to
touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our Service
Office.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-20
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-
tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-
fied by every distributor.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN
ACCIDENT
C-1
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-
tomers premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
<Field Service section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,
product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit,
operating system, and control system
GENERAL: Explanation of system configuration, and product
specifications
MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-
vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
adjustment etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
their countermeasures etc.
APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-2
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
(1) PWB-MFP: MFP Control Board
(2) bizhub C250: Main Unit
(3) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OSs mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
Main Unit
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
To indicate clearly a section revised, show to the left of the revised section.
A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made.
To indicate clearly a section revised, show in the lower outside section of the correspond-
ing page.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2005/07 1.0 Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
i
CONTENTS
bizhub C250 Main Unit
General
1. System configuration............................................................................................... 1
2. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 3
2.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Functions .............................................................................................................. 4
2.3 Types of Paper ...................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Machine Specifications......................................................................................... 6
2.6 Operating Environment ......................................................................................... 6
2.7 Print Functions...................................................................................................... 6
2.8 Scan Functions..................................................................................................... 7
Maintenance
3. Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Service schedule .................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Maintenance items................................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ............................................................ 9
3.2.2 Maintenance call (per 60,000-print) ............................................................ 10
3.2.3 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)..................................... 10
3.3 Maintenance parts.............................................................................................. 12
3.3.1 Replacement parts...................................................................................... 12
3.3.2 Cleaning parts............................................................................................. 13
3.4 Concept of parts life............................................................................................ 14
3.5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ............................................... 16
3.5.1 Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller ................................................................ 16
3.5.2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy.............................................. 16
3.5.3 Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed Roller ...................................................... 17
3.5.4 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy .................................... 19
3.5.5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller....................................................... 20
3.5.6 Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller ................................................................ 22
3.5.7 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller ............................................................ 25
3.5.8 Cleaning of the Registration Roller ............................................................. 27
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
ii
3.5.9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box.................................................................. 27
3.5.10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port ................... 28
3.5.11 Replacing the Ozone Filter ......................................................................... 28
3.5.12 Replacing the Deodorant Filter ................................................................... 29
3.5.13 Replacing the Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance........................................... 29
3.5.14 Replacing the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan ........................................................ 29
3.6 Replacing the unit............................................................................................... 30
3.6.1 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit ............................................ 30
3.6.2 Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit ...................................................... 31
3.6.3 Replacing the Toner Cartridge (C, M, Y, K)................................................. 33
3.6.4 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode................................................................. 34
3.6.5 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, K) ..................................................... 35
3.6.6 Replacing the Fusing Unit........................................................................... 38
4. Service tool ........................................................................................................... 40
4.1 CE Tool list ......................................................................................................... 40
4.2 Copy materials ................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU) .................................................................... 41
4.2.2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C) ............................................................. 41
4.2.3 Waste Toner Box......................................................................................... 41
4.2.4 Maintenance Kit .......................................................................................... 41
5. Firmware upgrade................................................................................................. 42
5.1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting ................................................................... 42
5.1.1 Service environment ................................................................................... 42
5.1.2 Application to be used ................................................................................ 42
5.1.3 Installing the Cygwin................................................................................... 42
5.1.4 Writing into the Compact flash.................................................................... 45
5.2 Firmware rewriting.............................................................................................. 48
5.2.1 Updating method ........................................................................................ 48
5.2.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails................................................................. 50
6. Other ..................................................................................................................... 51
6.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items.......................................................... 51
6.2 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) ............................................ 52
6.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list ................................................................ 52
6.2.2 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 53
6.3 Disassembly/Assembly procedure ..................................................................... 54
6.3.1 IR Upper Right Cover/IR Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover ...................... 54
6.3.2 Left Cover/Upper Front Cover/IR Left Cover/IR Upper Front Cover............ 55
6.3.3 Original Glass/IR Front Cover ..................................................................... 56
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
iii
6.3.4 Exit Tray/Upper Rear Cover/Lower Rear Cover/Rear Left Cover ................ 57
6.3.5 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover/Multi Bypass
Tray Upper Cover ........................................................................................ 58
6.3.6 Front Door ................................................................................................... 59
6.3.7 Rear Right Cover ........................................................................................ 59
6.3.8 Control Panel (UN201)................................................................................ 60
6.3.9 Tray 1 .......................................................................................................... 61
6.3.10 Tray 2 .......................................................................................................... 62
6.3.11 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Left Cover ......................................... 63
6.3.12 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover.............................................................................. 64
6.3.13 Front Cover ................................................................................................. 64
6.3.14 Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) ........................................................... 66
6.3.15 DC Power Supply (PU1).............................................................................. 69
6.3.16 Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) ........................................................ 71
6.3.17 CCD Unit ..................................................................................................... 71
6.3.18 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) ............................................................. 73
6.3.19 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) ................................................................ 75
6.3.20 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) ................................................................. 76
6.3.21 DIMM0 (Work0), DIMM1 (Work1) ............................................................... 78
6.3.22 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)................................................................................ 78
6.3.23 High Voltage Unit (HV1) .............................................................................. 80
6.3.24 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I)................................................................ 81
6.3.25 Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC) .............................................................. 81
6.3.26 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC) ......................................................... 83
6.3.27 Inverter Board (PU201) ............................................................................... 85
6.3.28 PH Interface Board (PWB-D) ...................................................................... 85
6.3.29 Multi Bypass Unit ........................................................................................ 87
6.3.30 PH Unit........................................................................................................ 89
6.3.31 Transport Drive Assy................................................................................... 93
6.3.32 Hopper Drive Assy ...................................................................................... 95
6.3.33 Right Door Assy .......................................................................................... 96
6.3.34 Scanner Motor (M201) .............................................................................. 100
6.3.35 Scanner Assy............................................................................................ 103
6.3.36 Scanner Drive Cables ............................................................................... 104
6.3.37 PWB Box................................................................................................... 112
6.3.38 Color Developing Motor (M3) .................................................................... 115
6.3.39 Color PC Drum Motor (M2) ....................................................................... 116
6.3.40 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) ................................................................... 116
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
iv
6.3.41 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)................................................................... 116
6.3.42 Main Motor (M1) ....................................................................................... 117
6.3.43 Fusing Drive Motor (M4) ........................................................................... 119
6.3.44 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC).................................................................... 121
6.3.45 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)............................................................ 121
6.3.46 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) .................................................. 123
6.3.47 IDC/Registration Sensor/1, IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE1/SE2) .......... 124
6.4 Cleaning procedure.......................................................................................... 126
6.4.1 PH Window............................................................................................... 126
6.4.2 Image Transfer Belt Unit ........................................................................... 127
6.4.3 Tray 1 Feed Roller..................................................................................... 127
6.4.4 Tray 1 Separation Roller ........................................................................... 127
6.4.5 Bypass Tray Feed Roller ........................................................................... 128
6.4.6 Bypass Tray Separation Roller.................................................................. 128
6.4.7 Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-up Roller................................................... 129
6.4.8 Tray 2 Separation Roller ........................................................................... 131
6.4.9 Tray 2 Transport Roller.............................................................................. 132
6.4.10 Scanner Rail ............................................................................................. 132
6.4.11 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ................................................................................. 133
6.4.12 Lens.......................................................................................................... 134
6.4.13 Original Glass ........................................................................................... 134
6.4.14 CCD Sensor.............................................................................................. 135
6.5 Mount the original size detecting sensor/2 (PC204)......................................... 136
6.6 Option counter.................................................................................................. 138
6.6.1 Installation method for the Key Counter.................................................... 138
Adjustment/Setting
7. How to use the adjustment section..................................................................... 141
8. Utility Mode ......................................................................................................... 142
8.1 Touch Panel Adjustment ................................................................................... 142
8.2 Utility Mode function tree.................................................................................. 143
8.3 Utility Mode function setting procedure ............................................................ 157
8.3.1 Procedure ................................................................................................. 157
8.3.2 Exiting....................................................................................................... 157
8.3.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions ................................ 157
8.4 One-Touch Registration.................................................................................... 158
8.4.1 Scan.......................................................................................................... 158
8.4.2 Fax............................................................................................................ 159
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
v
8.4.3 User Box ................................................................................................... 160
8.5 User Setting...................................................................................................... 161
8.5.1 System Setting.......................................................................................... 161
8.5.2 Display Setting .......................................................................................... 163
8.5.3 Initial Setting ............................................................................................. 166
8.5.4 Copier Setting ........................................................................................... 166
8.5.5 Scanner Setting ........................................................................................ 168
8.5.6 Printer Setting ........................................................................................... 169
8.6 Administrator Setting ........................................................................................ 173
8.6.1 System Setting.......................................................................................... 173
8.6.2 Administrator/Machine Setting.................................................................. 191
8.6.3 One-Touch Registration ............................................................................ 191
8.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track ........................................................... 195
8.6.5 Network Setting......................................................................................... 198
8.6.6 Copier Setting ........................................................................................... 213
8.6.7 Printer Setting ........................................................................................... 214
8.6.8 Fax Setting................................................................................................ 215
8.6.9 System Connection................................................................................... 222
8.6.10 Security Setting......................................................................................... 223
9. Adjustment item list ............................................................................................. 226
10. Service Mode ...................................................................................................... 228
10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure ......................................................... 228
10.2 Service Mode function tree............................................................................... 229
10.3 Date/Time Input mode ...................................................................................... 232
10.3.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen............................................................ 232
10.4 Machine ............................................................................................................ 233
10.4.1 Fusing Temperature .................................................................................. 233
10.4.2 Fusing Transport Speed............................................................................ 234
10.4.3 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. ............................................................... 234
10.4.4 Printer Area............................................................................................... 235
10.4.5 Scan Area ................................................................................................. 238
10.4.6 Printer Resist Loop ................................................................................... 241
10.4.7 Color Registration Adjustment .................................................................. 242
10.4.8 Fusing Loop Size ...................................................................................... 243
10.4.9 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment ............................................................... 243
10.4.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment ................................................................... 243
10.5 Firmware Version.............................................................................................. 243
10.6 Imaging Process Adjustment ............................................................................ 244
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
vi
10.6.1 Gradation Adjust ....................................................................................... 244
10.6.2 D Max Density .......................................................................................... 245
10.6.3 Background Voltage Margin...................................................................... 246
10.6.4 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment .............................................................. 246
10.6.5 Stabilizer ................................................................................................... 247
10.6.6 Thick Paper Density Adjustment ............................................................... 248
10.6.7 TCR Toner Supply .................................................................................... 248
10.6.8 Monochrome Density Adjustment............................................................. 249
10.6.9 Dev. Bias Choice....................................................................................... 249
10.7 CS Remote Care.............................................................................................. 250
10.7.1 Outlines..................................................................................................... 250
10.7.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care............................................................... 250
10.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care................................................ 252
10.7.4 Setup confirmation.................................................................................... 257
10.7.5 Calling the Maintenance ........................................................................... 257
10.7.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator................................................. 258
10.7.7 Checking the transmission log.................................................................. 258
10.7.8 Detail on settings ...................................................................................... 258
10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code .................................................... 261
10.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care....................................................... 264
10.8 System 1 .......................................................................................................... 265
10.8.1 Marketing Area ......................................................................................... 265
10.8.2 Tel/Fax Number......................................................................................... 265
10.8.3 Serial Number........................................................................................... 265
10.8.4 No Sleep................................................................................................... 266
10.8.5 Original Size Detection ............................................................................. 266
10.8.6 Foolscap Size Setting ............................................................................... 266
10.8.7 Initialization............................................................................................... 267
10.8.8 Install Date................................................................................................ 267
10.9 System 2 .......................................................................................................... 267
10.9.1 HDD.......................................................................................................... 267
10.9.2 Image Controller Setting........................................................................... 268
10.9.3 Option Board Status ................................................................................. 268
10.9.4 Consumable Life Reminder ...................................................................... 268
10.9.5 Unit Change.............................................................................................. 269
10.9.6 Software Switch Setting............................................................................ 269
10.9.7 Scan Caribration....................................................................................... 269
10.9.8 LCT Paper Size Setting ............................................................................ 269
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
vii
10.9.9 Line Mag Setting....................................................................................... 270
10.9.10 Data Capture............................................................................................. 271
10.10 Counter ............................................................................................................. 274
10.10.1 Procedure ................................................................................................. 274
10.10.2 Life ............................................................................................................ 274
10.10.3 Jam........................................................................................................... 275
10.10.4 Service Call Counter ................................................................................. 275
10.10.5 Warning..................................................................................................... 275
10.10.6 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 275
10.10.7 Service Total ............................................................................................. 276
10.10.8 Counter of Each Mode.............................................................................. 276
10.10.9 Service Call History (Data) ....................................................................... 276
10.10.10 ADF Paper Pages ..................................................................................... 276
10.10.11 Paper Jam History..................................................................................... 276
10.10.12 Fax Connection Error ................................................................................ 276
10.11 List Output ........................................................................................................ 277
10.11.1 Machine Management List ....................................................................... 277
10.11.2 Adjustment List ......................................................................................... 277
10.11.3 Parameter List ........................................................................................... 277
10.11.4 Service Parameter .................................................................................... 277
10.11.5 Protocol Trace ........................................................................................... 277
10.11.6 Fax Setting List ......................................................................................... 277
10.12 State Confirmation............................................................................................ 278
10.12.1 Sensor Check............................................................................................ 278
10.12.2 Table Number............................................................................................ 286
10.12.3 Level History1 ........................................................................................... 287
10.12.4 Level History2 ........................................................................................... 287
10.12.5 Temp. & Humidity...................................................................................... 287
10.12.6 CCD Check ............................................................................................... 287
10.12.7 Memory/HDD Adj. ..................................................................................... 288
10.12.8 Memory/HDD State................................................................................... 290
10.12.9 Color Regist .............................................................................................. 290
10.12.10 IU Lot No. .................................................................................................. 290
10.12.11 Adjustment Data List ................................................................................. 290
10.13 Test Mode ......................................................................................................... 291
10.13.1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output ............................................................ 291
10.13.2 Gradation Pattern...................................................................................... 291
10.13.3 Halftone Pattern........................................................................................ 292
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
viii
10.13.4 Lattice Pattern........................................................................................... 292
10.13.5 Solid Pattern ............................................................................................. 293
10.13.6 Color Sample............................................................................................ 293
10.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern................................................................................. 294
10.13.8 Running Mode .......................................................................................... 294
10.13.9 Fax Test .................................................................................................... 294
10.14 ADF .................................................................................................................. 294
10.15 FAX................................................................................................................... 294
10.16 Finisher............................................................................................................. 295
11. Enhanced Security.............................................................................................. 296
11.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure............................................... 296
11.1.1 Procedure ................................................................................................. 296
11.1.2 Exiting....................................................................................................... 296
11.2 Enhanced Security Function Tree .................................................................... 296
11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security ................................................................... 297
11.3.1 CE Password ............................................................................................ 297
11.3.2 Administrator Password ............................................................................ 297
11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level ...................................................................... 298
11.3.4 CE Authentication..................................................................................... 298
11.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting................................................................................... 298
12. Billing Setting ...................................................................................................... 299
12.1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure....................................................... 299
12.1.1 Procedure ................................................................................................. 299
12.1.2 Exiting....................................................................................................... 299
12.2 Billing Setting Function Tree............................................................................. 299
12.3 Settings in the Billing Setting............................................................................ 300
12.3.1 Counter Setting......................................................................................... 300
12.3.2 Management Function Choice.................................................................. 301
12.3.3 Coverage Rate Clear ................................................................................ 301
13. Procedure for Resetting ...................................................................................... 302
13.1 Trouble resetting............................................................................................... 302
13.2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function......................................................... 302
14. Mechanical adjustment ....................................................................................... 303
14.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section ................................................ 303
14.1.1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt ...................................................... 303
14.1.2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit................................... 305
14.2 Scanner Position Adjustment ........................................................................... 306
14.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section........................................... 307
14.3.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit ............................................... 307
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
ix
14.4 PH Unit Mechanical Adjustment ....................................................................... 309
14.4.1 Skew Adjustment ...................................................................................... 309
Troubleshooting
15. Jam Display......................................................................................................... 313
15.1 Misfeed Display................................................................................................. 313
15.1.1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure....................................................... 314
15.2 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 315
15.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 317
15.3.1 Initial Check Items..................................................................................... 317
15.3.2 Misfeed at Tray 1 feed section................................................................... 318
15.3.3 Misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section ..................................................... 319
15.3.4 Misfeed at Tray 2 feed, Tray 2 vertical transport section ........................... 320
15.3.5 Misfeed at Manual Bypass feed section.................................................... 321
15.3.6 Misfeed at LCT feed and LCT vertical transport section (PC-403) ........... 322
15.3.7 Misfeed at Tray 3 Feed and Tray 3 vertical transport section
(PC-103/PC203) ....................................................................................... 323
15.3.8 Misfeed at Tray 4 Feed and Tray 4 vertical transport section (PC203)...... 324
15.3.9 Misfeed at Duplex transport section (AD-503) .......................................... 325
15.3.10 Misfeed at Duplex Unit pre-registration section (AD-503) ......................... 326
15.3.11 Misfeed at Fusing/Exit section .................................................................. 327
16. Malfunction code................................................................................................. 328
16.1 Alert code ......................................................................................................... 328
16.1.1 Alert list ..................................................................................................... 329
16.2 Solution............................................................................................................. 330
16.2.1 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure................................................... 330
16.2.2 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure.................................................................. 330
16.2.3 P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure................................................................. 330
16.2.4 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure .................................................................. 331
16.2.5 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure............................................................. 331
16.2.6 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure................................................................. 331
16.2.7 P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure.................................................................. 331
16.2.8 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure......................................................... 331
16.2.9 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure.................................................................. 331
16.2.10 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure........................................... 332
16.2.11 P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure...................................................... 332
16.2.12 P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure........................................... 332
16.2.13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction ................................................ 332
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
x
16.2.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction................................................ 333
16.3 Trouble code..................................................................................................... 334
16.3.1 Trouble code list ........................................................................................ 334
16.4 How to reset ..................................................................................................... 355
16.5 Solution ............................................................................................................ 356
16.5.1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure................................................................... 356
16.5.2 C0211: Manual Tray Rise Descent Error .................................................. 356
16.5.3 C0301: Suction Fan Motors failure to turn................................................ 357
16.5.4 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation.......................................... 357
16.5.5 C2152: Transfer Belt Separation............................................................... 358
16.5.6 C2253: Color PC Drum Motors failure to turn .......................................... 358
16.5.7 C2254: Color PC Drum Motors turning at abnormal timing ..................... 358
16.5.8 C2255: Color Developing Motors failure to turn ....................................... 359
16.5.9 C2256: Color Developing Motors turning at abnormal timing .................. 359
16.5.10 C2451: Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article Release.................................. 359
16.5.11 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor .......... 360
16.5.12 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor..... 360
16.5.13 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor......... 360
16.5.14 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor......... 360
16.5.15 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor ... 360
16.5.16 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor ....... 360
16.5.17 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor .......... 361
16.5.18 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor ........ 361
16.5.19 C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure........................................... 362
16.5.20 C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure..................................... 362
16.5.21 C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure......................................... 362
16.5.22 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure.......................................... 362
16.5.23 C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error .................................. 363
16.5.24 C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error............................. 363
16.5.25 C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error................................. 363
16.5.26 C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error .................................. 363
16.5.27 C2A01: Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error ............................. 363
16.5.28 C2A02: Yellow Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error ........................... 363
16.5.29 C2A03: Magenta Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error........................ 363
16.5.30 C2A04: Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error............................. 363
16.5.31 C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1s failure to turn................................ 364
16.5.32 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2s failure to turn................................ 364
16.5.33 C3451: Heat. Heater Trouble.................................................................... 365
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xi
16.5.34 C3452: Press. Heater Trouble................................................................... 365
16.5.35 C3751: Abnormal High Temp. (Heater)..................................................... 365
16.5.36 C3752: Abnormal High Temp. (Press) ...................................................... 365
16.5.37 C3851: Abnormal Low Temp. (Heater)...................................................... 365
16.5.38 C3852: Abnormal Low Temp. (Press) ....................................................... 365
16.5.39 C3461: Fusing Unit New Article Release.................................................. 365
16.5.40 C3A01: Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater Roller ............................................. 366
16.5.41 C3A02: Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure Roller.......................................... 366
16.5.42 C4151: Polygon Motor/C failure to turn..................................................... 366
16.5.43 C4152: Polygon Motor/M failure to turn .................................................... 366
16.5.44 C4153: Polygon Motor/Y failure to turn..................................................... 366
16.5.45 C4154: Polygon Motor/K failure to turn..................................................... 366
16.5.46 C4551: Laser malfunction (Cyan) ............................................................. 367
16.5.47 C4552: Laser malfunction (Magenta)........................................................ 367
16.5.48 C4553: Laser malfunction (Yellow)............................................................ 367
16.5.49 C4554: Laser malfunction (Black) ............................................................. 367
16.5.50 C4705: Image Output Time Out ................................................................ 367
16.5.51 C4761: Compression hardware timeout.................................................... 368
16.5.52 C4765: Extraction hardware timeout......................................................... 368
16.5.53 C4770: JBIG0 Error .................................................................................. 368
16.5.54 C4771: JBIG1 Error .................................................................................. 368
16.5.55 C4772: JBIG2 Error .................................................................................. 368
16.5.56 C4773: JBIG3 Error .................................................................................. 368
16.5.57 C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure.................................. 368
16.5.61 C5102: Main Motor's failure to turn........................................................... 368
16.5.62 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing........................................ 369
16.5.63 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1s failure to turn...................... 369
16.5.64 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2s failure to turn............................................. 369
16.5.65 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motors failure to turn................................ 370
16.5.66 C5357: Cooling Fan Motor/1s failure to turn............................................. 370
16.5.67 C5358: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2s failure to turn...................... 370
16.5.68 C6102: Drive Home Sensor malfunction................................................... 371
16.5.69 C6103: Slider Over Run............................................................................ 371
16.5.70 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motors failure to turn ................................. 371
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xii
16.5.71 C6704: Image Input Time Out .................................................................. 372
16.5.72 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure.............................................. 372
16.5.73 C9401: Exposure Lamps failure to turn ON............................................. 373
16.5.74 C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing........................... 373
16.5.75 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure ..................................... 373
16.5.76 CA052:Controller hardware error.............................................................. 373
16.5.77 CA053: Controller start failure .................................................................. 373
16.5.78 CC001: Vendor connection failure ............................................................ 374
16.5.79 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)..................................... 374
16.5.80 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) ............................... 374
16.5.81 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) ..................................... 374
16.5.82 CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (PH)........................................ 374
16.5.83 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)........................................................... 374
16.5.84 CD002: JOB RAM save error.................................................................... 375
16.5.85 CD004: Hard disk access error................................................................. 375
16.5.86 CD005: Hard Disk Error 1......................................................................... 375
16.5.91 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6 ........................................................................ 375
16.5.92 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7 ........................................................................ 375
16.5.93 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8 ........................................................................ 375
16.5.94 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9 ........................................................................ 375
16.5.95 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A........................................................................ 375
16.5.96 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error........................................................ 375
16.5.97 CD010: Hard disk unformat ...................................................................... 376
16.5.98 CD011: Hard disk specifications error ...................................................... 376
16.5.99 CD012: Encryption ASIC setting error ...................................................... 376
16.5.100 CD013: Encryption ASIC mounting error.................................................. 376
16.5.101 CE001: Abnormal message queue........................................................... 377
16.5.102 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure ...................................... 377
16.5.103 CE003: Task error..................................................................................... 377
16.5.104 CE004: Event error ................................................................................... 377
16.5.105 CE005: Memory access error ................................................................... 377
16.5.106 CE006: Header access error .................................................................... 377
16.5.107 CE007: DIMM initialize error ..................................................................... 377
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xiii
16.5.108 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring ........................................ 377
16.5.109 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction...................................... 377
16.5.110 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction........................................ 378
17. Power supply trouble........................................................................................... 379
17.1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check) .................................. 379
17.2 Control panel indicators do not light. ................................................................ 379
17.3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate ........................................................................ 380
17.4 Power is not Supplied to Option........................................................................ 380
17.4.1 Power is not Supplied to ADF ................................................................... 380
17.4.2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet.................................................................... 380
17.4.3 Power is not Supplied to Automatic Duplex Unit ....................................... 381
17.4.4 Finisher ..................................................................................................... 381
18. Image quality problem......................................................................................... 382
18.1 How to read Element date ................................................................................ 382
18.1.1 Table Number............................................................................................ 382
18.1.2 Level History 1 .......................................................................................... 383
18.1.3 Level History 2 .......................................................................................... 384
18.2 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 385
18.2.1 Initial Check Items..................................................................................... 385
18.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 387
18.3.1 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub Scan
Direction, colored lines in Sub Scan Direction, and colored bands in Sub
Scan Direction........................................................................................... 387
18.3.2 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main
Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, and colored bands in
Main Scan Direction.................................................................................. 388
18.3.3 Scanner System: color spots .................................................................... 389
18.3.4 Scanner System: fog................................................................................. 390
18.3.5 Scanner System: blurred image, blotchy image........................................ 391
18.3.6 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration, sync shift
(lines in main scan direction) .................................................................... 392
18.3.7 Scanner System: moire............................................................................. 393
18.3.8 Scanner System: skewed image............................................................... 394
18.3.9 Scanner System: distorted image............................................................. 395
18.3.10 Scanner System: low image density, rough image ................................... 396
18.3.11 Scanner System: defective ACS............................................................... 397
18.3.12 Scanner System: blank copy, black copy .................................................. 398
18.3.13 Scanner System: abnormal image............................................................ 399
18.3.14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub
Scan Direction, colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction ......... 400
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xiv
18.3.15 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main
Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, colored bands in Main
Scan Direction .......................................................................................... 401
18.3.16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction ......................... 402
18.3.17 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction ....................... 403
18.3.18 Printer Monocolor: low image density....................................................... 404
18.3.19 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure..................................... 406
18.3.20 Printer Monocolor: foggy background....................................................... 407
18.3.21 Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots............................................... 409
18.3.22 Printer Monocolor: colored spots.............................................................. 410
18.3.23 Printer Monocolor: blurred image ............................................................. 411
18.3.24 Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy................................................ 412
18.3.25 Printer Monocolor: uneven image............................................................. 413
18.3.26 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan
direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan
direction .................................................................................................... 414
18.3.27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan
direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main
scan direction............................................................................................ 415
18.3.28 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction .............................. 416
18.3.29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction ............................ 417
18.3.30 Printer 4-Color: low image density............................................................ 418
18.3.31 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction ................................................... 419
18.3.32 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration.................................... 420
18.3.33 Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots.................................................... 421
18.3.34 Printer 4-Color: colored spots................................................................... 422
18.3.35 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset....................................... 423
18.3.36 Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image.............................................. 424
18.3.37 Printer 4-Color: back marking................................................................... 425
18.3.38 Printer 4-Color: uneven image.................................................................. 426
Appendix
19. Parts layout drawing............................................................................................ 427
19.1 Main unit ........................................................................................................... 427
19.1.1 IR section.................................................................................................. 427
19.1.2 Engine section .......................................................................................... 428
19.1.3 Tray 1 ........................................................................................................ 432
19.1.4 Tray 2/Multiple bypass tray........................................................................ 433
19.2 DF-601 (Option) ............................................................................................... 434
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xv
19.3 PC103/PC203 (Option)..................................................................................... 435
19.4 PC-403 (Option)................................................................................................ 436
19.5 AD-503 (Option)................................................................................................ 437
19.6 FS-501 (Option) ................................................................................................ 438
19.7 JS-601 (Option) ................................................................................................ 440
19.8 FS-603 (Option) ................................................................................................ 441
19.9 PK-501 (Option)................................................................................................ 443
19.10 Horizontal Transport Unit .................................................................................. 444
20. Connector layout drawing.................................................................................... 445
21. Timing chart ........................................................................................................ 448
21.1 Main unit ........................................................................................................... 448
21.2 Automatic Document Feeder ............................................................................ 449
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
xvi
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. System configuration
1
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
1. System configuration
1/2 System Front View
NOTE
Use the Desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in
order to keep the function and quality of the unit.
[1] Machine [8] Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403
[2]
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder
DF-601
[9] Desk DK-502
[3] Original cover OC-501 [10] Finisher FS-501
[4] Working Table WT-501 [11] Job Separator JS-601
[5] Auto Duplex Unit AD-503 [12] Finisher FS-603
[6] Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103 [13] Punch Kit (for FS-603) PK-501
[7] Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203
4038T1E101AA
[1]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[13]
[12]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
1. System configuration Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
2
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2/2 System Rear View
[1] Machine [5] Mount Kit MK-704
[2] Vender Kit VK-501
* Only for Europe, North America, and Latin
America (only 120V area)
[6] Local Interface Kit EK-702
[3] Mount Kit MK-706 [7] Fax Kit FK-502
* Only for Europe, North America, Latin
America and Australia
[4] Dehumidifier Heater HT-501 [8] Key Counter Kit KIT-1
PC-103
PC-203
PC-403
DK-502
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[3]
4038T1E102AA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Product specifications
3
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2. Product specifications
2.1 Type
Type Desktop-type printer integrated with scanner
Copying System Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Printing Process Tandem-type indirect electrostatic recording system
PC Drum Type OPC (organic photo conductor)
Scanning Density Equivalent to 600 dpi
Exposure Lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
Print Density Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction 600 dpi in sub scanning
direction
Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
Original Scanning Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD
(one-shot reading system)
Registration Rear left edge
Paper Feeding System
(Standard)
Three-way system
Multiple Bypass: 100 sheets
Tray1: 250 sheets
Tray2: 500 sheets
Exposure System Four-multi array PH unit system
Two-beam LD + polygon mirror exposure system for Y, M, C, and K
(8 beams in total)
Exposure Density Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction 600 dpi in sub scanning
direction
Developing System HMT developing system
Charging System DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function
(manual)
*Electrode cleaning function is mounted only on the K imaging unit.
Image Transfer System Intermediate transfer belt system
Paper Separating System Selection either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding +
lower-pressure paper separate claws
Fusing System Roller fusing
2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
4
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2.2 Functions
Types of Original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects
Max. Original Size A3 or 11 17 (Ledger)
Max. Original Weight Max. 2 kg
Multiple Copies 1 to 999
Warm-up Time
110 sec. or less
(at ambient temperature of 23 C/73.4 F and rated source voltage)
Image Loss
Leading edge: 4.2 mm, Trailing edge (copier, printer): 4.2 mm,
Trailing edge (FAX): 3 mm , Rear edge: 3 mm, Front edge: 3 mm
First Copy Time (Tray1, A4, full size)
Monochrome print 8.4 sec. or less
Color print 11.7 sec. or less
System Speed Plain Paper
Monochrome/Full color
111 mm/sec
Thick Paper (90 to 256
g/m
2
), OHP, Post card,
Envelope, Label sheet
55.5 mm/sec
Copying Speed for Multi-
copy Cycle
(A4, 8-1/2 11 crosswise
feeding)
Monochrome print 1-sided: 25 copies/min.; 2-sided: 23 copies/min.
Color print
(Text Mode, Text/Photo
Mode, Special Quality
Mode)
1-sided: 25 copies/min.; 2-sided: 23 copies/min.
Fixed Zoom Ratios Full size 1.000
Reduction
Metric Area: 0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866
Inch Area: 0.500, 0.647, 0.733, 0.785
Enlargement
Metric Area: 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000
Inch Area: 1.214, 1.294, 1.545, 2.000
Zoom ratios memory 3 memories
Variable Zoom Ratios 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 increments
Copy Paper Size
Tray1, Bypass
Metric Area:
A3 to A5, B6R, A3 Wide
(12.2518), A6R, Thick Paper
Inch Area:
1117 to 5.58.5, A3 Wide
(12.2518), 46R, Thick Paper
Tray2
Metric Area: A3 to B5, A5R
Inch Area: 1117 to 8.511, 8.511R
Copy Exit Tray Capacity Plain Paper 350 sheets
Thick Paper 20 sheets
OHP transparencies 1 sheet
5
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2.3 Types of Paper
*1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used.
Optional Paper Feed Cabinet : Only the Plain paper (weighing 64 to 90 g/m
2
) is reliably fed.
Automatic Duplex Unit : Only the Plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m
2
or Thick paper
weighing 91 to 256 g/m
2
are reliably fed.
2.4 Maintenance
Type
Paper Source
Tray1 Tray2 Multiple Bypass
Copy paper type
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m
2
)

Translucent paper
OHP transparencies
(crosswise
feeding only)
(20 sheets or less)
(10 sheets or less)

Thick paper 1
(91 to 150 g/m
2
)
Thick paper 2
(151 to 209 g/m
2
)
Thick paper 3
(210 to 256 g/m
2
) *1
Postcards
Envelopes
Labels
Copy paper
dimensions
Width 90 to 311.1 mm 139.7 to 297 mm 90 to 311.1 mm
Length 139.7 to 457.2 mm 182 to 431.8 mm 139.7 to 457.2 mm
Machine Durability 600,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier
No. of pages printed per
month (Average)
Color print 1,200 prints
Monochrome print 4,800 prints
Standard copy mode
Color print 3 pages/job
Monochrome print 3 pages/job
Standard Original
Density
Color print C, M, Y, K 5%
Monochrome print K 5%
6
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2.5 Machine Specifications
*2: width when the bypass tray is closed
*3: height up to where the original is placed
*4: Space Requirements are the values when the Finisher is slid to the maximum, the
bypass tray is opened to the maximum, and the front door is open.
2.6 Operating Environment
2.7 Print Functions
Power Requirements Voltage: AC 110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V
Frequency: 50/60 Hz 3.0 Hz
Max Power Consumption Less than 1500 W (120 V, 12 A / 220 - 240 V, 8 A)
Dimensions
653 *2 (W) 755 (D) 771 *3 (H) mm
25.7 *2 (W) 29.8 (D) 30.4 (H) inch
Space Requirements
1857 (W) 1102 (D) mm *4
73 (W) 43.4 (D) inch *4
Mass
Machine Approx. 94 kg / lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC 8.9 kg
Temperature 10 to 30 C / 50 to 86 F (with a fluctuation of 10 C / 18 F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 20%/h)
Levelness
Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or
under.
Type Built-in printer controller
CPU PPC750 FX 466 MHz
RAM 512 MB (Shared with the C250.)
HDD 40 GB (Shared with the C250.)
Interface
Standard: Ethernet (10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX)
Option: USB 1.1, USB 2.0, or IEEE 1284
Supported Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
Print Speed (A4, 8.511)
Monochrome print 1-sided: 25 pages/min; 2-sided: 23 pages/min
Color print 1-sided: 25 pages/min; 2-sided: 23 pages/min
Printer Language
PCL5e/c Emulation
PCL6 (XL Ver. 2.1) Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3011)
Print Resolution 600 dpi 600 dpi
Printer Fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 136 Fonts
Supported Operating
Systems
Server
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows Server
2003
Client
Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows Me, Windows
2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a)
Mac OS 9.2 or later or Mac OS X 10.2 or 10.3
7
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2.8 Scan Functions
NOTE
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Driver KONICA MINOLTA Scanner Driver
Compatible Operating
Systems
Windows 98/98SE/Me, Windows NT 4.0 (SP6 or later), Windows 2000,
Windows XP
Scan Speed 25 pages/min. for both monochrome and full color (600 dpi, A4)
Scannable Range Same as the copier (Max. A3)
Functions Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan to BOX
Resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi
8
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Periodical check
9
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
3. Periodical check
3.1 Service schedule
Guarantee period (5-year or 600,000 prints)
3.2 Maintenance items
3.2.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU)
*1: Also replace the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan packed in the Waste Toner Box at the same
time when the Waste Toner Box is replaced.
*2: Also replace the Deodorant Filter packed in the Toner Cartridge K at the same time
when 20 K is reached.
*3: The parts can be replaced either by User or Customer Engineer.
For details of setting, see Unit Change on Page 269 Adjustment/Setting.
*4: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.
Per cycle
print number
10,000-print
Number
of times
6 12 18 20 24 30 36 40 42 48 54
Main Unit
Upon each call
(60,000)
9
120,000 4
200,000 2
300,000 1
DF-601
60,000 9
200,000 2
PC-103
PC-203
PC-403
300,000 1
AD-503 60,000 9
FS-501
FS-603
300,000 1
No. Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions
1
Processing
sections
Imaging Unit C/M/Y 45 K *3
2 Imaging Unit K 70 K *3
3 Dust filter/Cooling Fan 30 K *1
4 Comb electrode When TC K is replaced
5
Toner cartridge: TC
(TC Y/TC M/TC C)
12 K *3
6
Toner cartridge: TC
(TC K)
20 K *2, 3
7 Fusing section Deodorant filter 20 K *2
8
Image Trans-
fer section
Waste Toner Box (30 K) *1, 3, 4
3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
10
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.2.2 Maintenance call (per 60,000-print)
3.2.3 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)
*1: Replace those four parts at the same time.
No. Class Parts to be replaced
Number of
personnel
Check Clean Replace
Lubrica-
tion
Descrip-
tions
1
Overall
Paper feed and image
conditions

2 Appearance
3
Conveyance
section
Registration Roller
4
Image Trans-
fer section
Around waste toner port
5
DF-601
Pick-up Roller
6 Paper Take-up Roller
7 Separation Roller
8
Transport Belt, Roller
and Roll

9 AD-503 DUP Roller and Roll
Number of
personnel
Check Clean Replace
Lubrica-
tion
Descrip-
tions
1
Overall
conditions

2 Appearance
3
Conveyance
section
2nd Image Transfer
Roller Unit5
1
*1
4
Dust Filter/Vertical
Conveyance
1
5
Image Trans-
fer section
Image Transfer Belt Unit 1
6
Processing
section
Ozone Filter 1
7
Fusing
section
Fusing Unit 1
11
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Number of
personnel
Check Clean Replace
Lubrica-
tion
Descrip-
tions
1
Overall
conditions

2 Appearance
3
Tray 1
Bypass
Feed Roller 1
4 Separation Roller Assy 1
5
DF-601
Pick-up Roller 2
6 Feed Roller 1
7 Separation Roller 1
Number of
personnel
Check Clean Replace
Lubri-
cation
Descriptions
1
Overall
conditions

2 Appearance
3
Tray 2
Pick-up Roller 1
4 Feed Roller 1
6
PC-103
PC-203
PC-403
Pick-up Roller 1 Replace
those three
parts at the
same time.
7 Feed Roller 1
9
FS-501
FS-603
Paper Feed Roller,
Roll

10 Transport route, Guide
11 Sensor
12
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.3 Maintenance parts
To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is rec-
ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as
instructed.
Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter.
Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8.5 11, Standard mode and
Low Power Mode OFF.
3.3.1 Replacement parts
A. Main unit
*1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value.
*2: Also replace the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit, Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance and
Ozone Filter packed in the Image Transfer Belt Unit at the same time when 120 K is
reached.
(Part No. of the Transfer Kit: 4038 0777 00)
*3: Also replace the Deodorant Filter packed in the Toner Cartridge K at the same time
when 20 K is reached.
*4: Also replace the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan packed in the Waste Toner Box at the same
time when the Waste Toner Box is replaced.
*5: 220-240 V areas only.
*6: 110 V to 120 V areas only.
No. Classification Parts name
Qua
ntity
Actual
durable
cycle *1
Parts No.
Descrip-
tions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
1
Tray 1
Feed Roller 1 200 K 4034 3012 xx 16
2 Separation Roller Assy 1 200 K 4034 0151 xx 16
3
Bypass
Feed Roller 1 200 K 4131 3001 xx 17
5
Tray 2
Feed Roller 1 300 K 4030 3005 xx 22
7 Pick-up Roller 1 300 K 4030 3005 xx 25
8
Conveyance
section
2nd Image Transfer
Roller Unit
1 120 K 4038 0776 00 *2 30
9
Dust Filter/
Vertical Conveyance
1 120 K *2 29
10
Fusing section
Fusing Unit 1 120 K
4038 0755 00 *5
4038 0754 00 *6
38
11 Deodorant Filter 1 20 K *3 29
12
Processing
section
Imaging Unit Y/M/C 1 45 K 35
13 Imaging Unit K 1 70 K 35
14 Ozone Filter 1 120 K *2 28
15 Toner Cartridge Y/M/C 1 12 K 33
16 Toner Cartridge K 1 20 K *3 33
17 Dust Filter/Cooling Fan 1 30 K *4 29
18
Image transfer
section
Image Transfer Belt Unit 1 120 K 4038 0777 00 *2 31
19 Waste Toner Box 1 (30 K) 4065 611 *4, 7 41
13
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
B. Option
*1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value.
*2: See each Option Service Manual.
3.3.2 Cleaning parts
*1: See AD-503 Service Manual.
No. Classification Parts name
Qua
ntity
Actual
durable
cycle *1
Parts No.
Descrip-
tions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
1
DF-601
Pick-up Roller 2 200 K 4582 3022 xx Replace
those three
parts at the
same time.
*2
2 Feed Roller 1 200 K 4582 3014 xx
3 Separation Roller 1 200 K 4582 3047 xx
4
PC-103
PC-203
PC-403
Pick-up Roller 1 300 K 4030 3005 xx Replace
those three
parts at the
same time.
5 Feed Roller 1 300 K 4030 3005 xx
6 Separation Roller Assy 1 300 K 4030 0151 xx
No. Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1
Descrip-
tions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
1
Processing
section
Comb Electrode When TC/K is replaced (20 K) 34
2
Conveyance
section
Registration Roller Upon each call (60 K) 27
3
Image transfer
section
Area around the Waste
Toner Collecting Port
Upon each call 28
4 AD-503 Conveyance Roller Upon each call (60 K) *1
14
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.4 Concept of parts life
*2: Once the Toner-Full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new Waste Toner Box in
order to reset.
*3: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed
pages is reached.
*4: The mark M is indicated the value of the number of distance through which the PC
drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value.
Description
Life value
(Specification
value)
Max. number of
printed pages
Waste Toner
Bottle
A waste toner full condition is detected when about
2,500 printed pages have been produced after a
waste toner near full condition has been detected.
30,000 *1,2
Fusing unit
The number of copies made is counted.
(The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan
direction exceeds 216 mm.)
The number of copies made is compared with the
value of the number of hours through which the
Fusing Drive Motor has turned translated to a cor-
responding value of the number of copies made
and the value, whichever reaches the life specifica-
tion value, is detected.
When the maximum number of printed pages is
reached, the print is inhibited.
120,000 150,000 *3
Transfer Belt
Unit
The number of copies made is counted.
(The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan
direction exceeds 216 mm.)
The number of copies made is compared with the
value of the number of hours through which the belt
has turned translated to a corresponding value of
the number of copies made and the value, which-
ever reaches the life specifications value, is
detected. (However the maximum number of copies
is detected by counting hours through which the
belt has turned.)
When the maximum number of printed pages is
reached, the print is inhibited.
120,000 151,037 *3
Imaging Unit
C/M/Y
The hours which the PC drum has turned is com-
pared with the value of the number of hours through
which the Imaging roller has turned translated to a
corresponding value of hours and the value, which-
ever reaches the life specification value, is
detected.
* The hours which the PC drum has turned is the
value of the number of distance through which the
PC drum has run translated to a corresponding
value of the number of hours and the value.
6,366 M *4 6,649 M *4
Imaging Unit
/K
6,637 M *4 6,827 M *4
15
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A. Conditions for Life Specifications Values
The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent
to it when given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. They can be more or
less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
B. Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event
occurs in another part
Item Description
Job Type
Monochrome: Making 3 copies per job
Color: Making 3 copies per job
Paper Size A4
Color Ratio Black to Color = 4:1
CV/M Black: 2,400 / Color: 600
Original Density B/W = 5 % for each color, 5 % for Monochrome
No. of Operating Days
per Month
20 days (Main Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)
Purpose
In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for
any of the following parts, make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value
is reached, and replace those parts at the same time.
Target parts
Fusing unit, Image Transfer Belt Unit, Imaging Unit /C, Imaging Unit /M, Imaging Unit /Y,
Imaging Unit /K
16
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE
The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
3.5.1 Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller
1. Slide out the Tray 1.
2. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate [1] into
position.
3. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the Tray 1
Feed Roller Assy [3].
4. Remove the shaft for the Tray 1 Feed
Roller Assy [3] from the front Bush-
ing.
5. Snap off the C-clip [4], one collar [5]
and remove the Tray 1 Feed Roller
[6].
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
7. Select [Service Mode] [Counter]
[Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
NOTE
Replace the Tray 1 Feed Roller and
Tray 1 Separation Roller at the
same time.
3.5.2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy
2. Remove two Screws [1] and the Tray
1 Separation Roller mounting
bracket Assy [2].
[1]
[3]
[2]
4038F2C001DA
4037F2C003DB
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C002DB
17
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Take off the rubber stopper [3], shaft
[4], spring [5], and guide plate [6] to
remove the Paper Separation Roller
fixing bracket Assy [7].
4. Snap off the E-ring [8] and the Tray 1
Paper Separation Roller Assy [9].
removal.
[Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
NOTE
Replace the Tray 1 Feed Roller and
Tray 1 Separation Roller at the
same time.
3.5.3 Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed Roller
1. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
87
2. Snap off the E-ring [1], and remove
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch [2].
[3]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
4038F2C003DB
4037F2C509DA
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C004DA
18
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove the Gear [3].
4. Snap off the E-ring [4] and remove
the Bearing [5].
5. Snap off two C-ring [6], and remove
the Bearing [7].
[3]
4038F2C005DA
[4]
[5]
4038F2C006DB
[6]
[7]
4038F2C007DB
19
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Remove the Bypass Tray Feed Roller
[8].
removal.
[Life] and clear the count of
[Manual Tray].
NOTE
Replace the Bypass Tray Feed
Roller and the Bypass Separation
Roller Assy at the same time.
3.5.4 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy
87
2. Remove the Screw [1], and remove
the Ground terminal [2].
the Bypass Paper Separation Roller
Assy [4].
[8]
4038F2C008DB
[1]
[2]
4038F2C009DA
[3]
[4]
4038F2C010DA
20
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Snap off the C-clip [5], and remove
the spring [6] and the guide plate [7].
Remove the Bypass Paper Separa-
tion Roller Assy [8].
removal.
[Life] and clear the count of
[Manual Tray].
NOTE
Replace the Bypass Tray Feed
Roller and the Bypass Separation
Roller Assy at the same time.
3.5.5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller
2. Open the Vertical transport door.
3. Remove two Claws [1], and remove
the Vertical transport door [2].
4. Remove two Screws [3], and remove
the Jam processing cover [4].
NOTE
Make sure the position of the Mylar
when installing the Jam processing
cover.
4038F2C502DA
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C011DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C012DB
OK NG
21
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2 Separation Roller installation plate
Assy [6].
6. Remove two C-rings [7] and the
Shaft [8], and remove the Separation
Roller fixing plate Assy [9].
NOTE
Use care not to miss the Spring
[10].
7. Remove the C-ring [11] and Guide
[12], and remove the Tray 2 Separa-
tion Roller Assy [13].
[5]
[6]
4038F2C013DA
4038F2C508DA
[7]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[10]
4038F2C559DA
[11]
[12]
[13]
22
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.5.6 Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller
1. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller
installation plate Assy.
See the procedures 1 to 5 in page 20
Tray 2 Separation Roller.
2. Remove the Tray 2 Right Rear
Cover.
64
3. Disconnect the Connector [1].
4. Remove the Screws [2] and remove
the Reinforcement plate [3].
5. Remove four Screws [4] and remove
the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [5].
[1]
4038F2C014DA
[2]
[3]
4038F2C015DA
[4]
[4]
[5]
4038F2C016DA
23
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Remove two Screws [6] and the
Installation flame [7] of the Tray 2
Separation Roller installation plate
Assy.
7. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2
Feed Roller cover [9].
8. Remove the C-ring [10] and Bushing
[11].
[6]
[6]
[7]
4037F2C005DB
[8]
[9]
4037F2C006DB
[11]
[10]
4038F2C510DA
24
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove the C-ring [13] and Gear
[14] while sliding out the Shaft Assy
[12] in the direction indicated in left
figure.
10. Remove the C-ring [15] and Bushing
[16], and remove the Shaft Assy [17].
11. Remove two E-rings [18] and Bush-
ing [19], and remove the Tray 2 Pick-
up Roller fixing plate Assy [20].
[12]
4038F2C511DA
[13]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[17]
4038F2C512DA
4038F2C513DA
[18]
[18]
[19]
[20]
25
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
12. Remove the C-ring [21] and Tray 2
Feed Roller [22].
[Life] and clear the count of [2nd.].
3.5.7 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller
installation plate Assy.
Tray 2 Separation Roller.
2. Remove the Tray 2 Right Rear
Cover.
64
4. Remove the Screws [2] and remove
5. Remove four Screws [4] and remove
the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [5].
4036fs2596c0
[21]
[22]
[1]
4038F2C014DA
[2]
[3]
4038F2C015DA
[4]
[4]
[5]
4038F2C016DA
26
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Tray 2 Separation Roller installa-
tion plate Assy [7] together with
Frame.
7. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2
Feed Roller cover [9].
8. Remove two C-rings [10] and two
Bushings [11], and remove the Tray
2 Pick-up Roller Assy [12].
9. Snap off the C-ring [13], and remove
the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [14].
[6]
[6]
[7]
4037F2C005DB
[8]
[9]
4037F2C006DB
4038F2C514DA
[10]
[11]
[11]
[12]
4036fs2598c0
[13]
[14]
27
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.5.8 Cleaning of the Registration Roller
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Registration Roll-
ers [1] clean of dirt.
3.5.9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Press the Waste Toner Box release
lever [1].
3. Remove the Waste Toner Box [2].
NOTE
Raise the Waste Toner Box gently
before removing it.
If scattered toner has accumulated
in the vicinity of the toner collecting
port, do not tilt the Waste Toner Box
when removing it.
Do not leave the Waste Toner Box in
a tilted condition after removing it.
[1]
4038F2C017DA
4038F2C541DA
[1]
4038F2C542DA
[2]
28
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Clean the surface around the waste
toner collecting port.
28
5. Remove the Waste Toner Box from
its box, and remove the packing
material.
6. Set the Waste Toner Box [3] in place.
7. Close the Front Door.
NOTE
Replace the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan
supplied with the Waste Toner Box
at the same time.
3.5.10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port
1. Remove the Waste Toner Box.
27
2. Wipe the areas around the Waste
Toner Collecting Port [1] clean of
spilled toner and dirt using a soft
cloth dampened with water or alco-
hol.
3.5.11 Replacing the Ozone Filter
1. Holding onto the hook, remove the
Ozone Filter [1].
NOTE
The Ozone Filter is supplied with
the Transfer Belt unit.
Replace it when replacing the
Transfer Belt Unit.
4038F2C543DA
[3]
4038F2C018DB
[1]
[1]
4038F2C019DA
29
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.5.12 Replacing the Deodorant Filter
1. Holding onto the hook, take out the
Deodorant Filter [1].
NOTE
The Deodorant Filter is supplied
with the Toner Cartridge (Black).
Replace it when replacing the Toner
Cartridge (Black).
3.5.13 Replacing the Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance
1. If the optional Automatic Duplex Unit
AD-503 is mounted, remove it.
See AD-503 Service Manual.
2. Remove the Dust Filter/Vertical Con-
veyance [1].
NOTE
The Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance
is supplied with the Transfer Belt
Unit.
Transfer Belt Unit.
3.5.14 Replacing the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan
1. If the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan is con-
taminated by dust or foreign matter,
clean it up.
2. Remove the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan
[1].
NOTE
The Dust Filter/Cooling Fan is sup-
plied with the Waste Toner Box.
Waste Toner Box.
4038F2C545DA
[1]
[1]
4038F2C020DB
4038F2C544DA
[1]
30
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.6 Replacing the unit
3.6.1 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit
A. Removal Procedure
1. Open the Front Door and turn OFF
the Main Power Switch.
3. Unlock the Lock levers [1] (at two
places).
4. Holding onto the Lock levers [1] (at
two places), remove the 2nd Image
Transfer Roller Unit [2].
B. Reinstallation Procedure
1. Holding onto the Lock levers [1] (at
two places), mount the 2nd Image
Transfer Roller Unit [2].
2. Lock the Lock levers [1](at two
places).
3. Close the Right Door.
NOTE
Make sure that the door is locked in
position both at front and rear.
4. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
NOTE
The 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit
is supplied with the Transfer Belt
Unit.
Transfer Belt Unit.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C021DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C022DA
31
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.6.2 Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit
1. Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
2. Remove the Waste toner Box
27
3. Slide out the Imaging Unit (C/M/Y/K).
NOTE
After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, be sure to place it in
the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth, and store it in a dark
place.
Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time, as it
may become damaged.
5. Remove two Screws [1] and release
the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt
Unit [2].
6. Hold the both sides and lift it to take
out the Image Transfer Belt Unit [3] a
little.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C023DA
[3]
4038F2C024DA
32
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
7. Hold the position [4] as shown in the
left and remove the Image Transfer
Belt Unit [5].
NOTE
Do not touch the surface of the
Image Transfer Belt Unit.
Cover the Image Transfer Belt Unit
with something such shade cloth to
protect its surface from dust or for-
eign matter.
1. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit [1].
NOTE
Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with
care not to allow its docking gear to
be damaged by hitting it against the
rail or associated part.
Do not touch the surface of the
Image Transfer Belt Unit.
Cover the Image Transfer Belt Unit
with something such shade cloth to
protect its surface from dust or for-
eign matter.
2. Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit
with two Screws [2].
NOTE
Replace the 2nd Image Transfer
Roller, the Ozone Filter and the
Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance,
which are supplied with the Image
Transfer Belt Unit, at the same time.
3. Close the Right Door.
4. Reinstall the Imaging Unit and the
Waste Toner Box.
7. Select [Service Mode] [Imaging
Process Adjustment] [Gradation
Adjust] and carry out Gradation
Adjust.
[5]
[4]
[4]
4038F2C025DA
[1]
4038F2C026DA
[2]
4038F2C027DA
33
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.6.3 Replacing the Toner Cartridge (C, M, Y, K)
2. Pressing the Toner Cartridge Lock
Claw [1], pull it toward.
3. Pull the Toner Cartridge [2] toward to
remove it.
1. Take out the new Toner Cartridge [1]
from the unitary packing box and
shake it well up and down 5 to 10
times.
4038F2C560DA
[1]
4038F2C538DA
[2]
4038F2C539DA
[1]
34
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2. Insert the Toner Cartridge [2] by fit-
ting it to the groove on the main unit.
NOTE
Make sure the colors are matched
between the Toner Cartridge and
label on the machine.
Make sure the Toner Cartridge is
inserted all the way.
When replacing the Toner Cartridge
(black), replace the Deodorant Filter
supplied with it at the same time.
3. Clear the Comb Electrode.
34
3.6.4 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode
2. Clean the Comb Electrode by mov-
ing the Comb Electrode Cleaning
Lever [1] In and Out several times.
(Only for the Imaging Unit/K)
NOTE
Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning
Lever slowly forward and backward
until it stops.
4038F2C540DA
[2]
4038F2C546DA
[1]
35
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.6.5 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, K)
1. Open the Front Door and turn OFF
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Press the unlocking knob [1] of
Imaging Unit.
4. Pull out the Imaging Unit [2], and
remove it from main body.
1. Remove the Imaging Unit from its
plastic bag.
2. Peel off the Tape [1] so that the
Mounting Bracket [2] can be
removed.
Then, remove the Mounting Bracket
[2].
NOTE
Since the Imaging Unit is highly
susceptible to light, keep it
shielded from light up to the time it
is installed.
Carefully unseal the plastic bag
(black).
If the Imaging Unit is packed in the
plastic bag (black) again, seal the
package using tape or another
means.
4038F2C531DA
[1]
4038F2C532DA
[2]
4038F2C533DA
[2]
[1]
36
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Tilt the Imaging Unit [3] to the left
and shake it a small stroke in the tilt
direction twice. Then, tilt it to the
right and shake it a small stroke in
the tilt direction twice.
4. Remove the Caps [4] on the end of
the Imaging Unit and the bottom
packing material.
5. Keeping the Imaging Unit [5] in a
level position, insert the Imaging Unit
[5] into the mounting position all the
way until it is stopped.
NOTE
Install them by fitting the blue label
position of Imaging Unit and one of
the machine.
Do not allow the Imaging Unit to
become tilted while installing them
into the Main Unit, as damage to the
PC Drum can result.
4038F2C534DA
[3]
4038F2C535DA
[4]
4038F2C536DA
[5]
37
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Pull out the PC Drum protective
sheet [6] while pressing the Imaging
Unit.
7. Insert the Imaging Unit all the way.
NOTE
Make sure that the Imaging Unit is
inserted all the way.
8. Plug in the power cord.
11. Select [Service Mode] [Imaging
Process Adjustment] [Gradation
Adjust] and carry out Gradation
Adjust.
NOTE
When removing / installing the
Imaging Unit, use care not to touch
the surface of the PC Drum [7].
4038F2C537DA
[6]
4038F2C567DA
[7]
38
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.6.6 Replacing the Fusing Unit
CAUTION
Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down.
2. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch
and unplug the power cord from the
power outlet, then wait for about 20
minutes.
3. Remove the Sub Tray.
57
the Exit Tray Connector protective
cover [2].
the Connector protective cover [5].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C028DA
[3]
4038F2C029DA
[4]
[5]
4038F2C030DA
39
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
7. Disconnect two Connectors [6].
8. Open the Right Cover.
9. Open the Fusing Unit Cover.
the Fusing unit [8].
[6]
4038F2C031DA
[7]
[8]
4038F2C032DA
4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
40
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Service tool
4.1 CE Tool list
Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No. Remarks
Scanner Drive Cable
Holding Jig
2 4581 7901 xx
PH Window Cleaning Jig 1 4038 2083 xx
PH Window Cleaning Jig
Pad
1 4038 2084 xx
Color chart 1
4036fs2001c0
4038F2C557DA
4038F2C558DA
4036fs2577c0
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Service tool
41
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4.2 Copy materials
4.2.1 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU)
Also replace the Dust filter packed in the Imaging Unit Black at the same time.
For the predetermined conditions, see page 15.
4.2.2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C)
Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T/C Black at the same time.
*1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product
variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration,
when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color
4.2.3 Waste Toner Box
Replace the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan supplied with the Waste Toner Box at the same time.
For the predetermined conditions, see page 15.
4.2.4 Maintenance Kit
There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit.
Parts name Replacing period
IU Black 70,000 copies
IU Yellow 45,000 copies
IU Magenta 45,000 copies
IU Cyan 45,000 copies
Parts name Replacing period *1
T/C Black 20,000 copies
T/C Yellow 12,000 copies
T/C Magenta 12,000 copies
T/C Cyan 12,000 copies
Parts name Replacing period
Waste Toner Box 30,000 copies *1
5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
42
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Firmware upgrade
5.1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting
5.1.1 Service environment
OS: Windows 2000
Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash
Compact flash (with 128MB or more)
5.1.2 Application to be used
Cygwin (Free software)
5.1.3 Installing the Cygwin
The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC.
1. Double click the [setup.exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored.
2. Click [Next (N)].
3. Select Install from Local Directory, and click [Next (N)].
4037F2C501DA
4037F2E545DA
4037F2E546DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Firmware upgrade
43
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Specify the folder for installation.
Check to make sure that Root Directory is in default setting, [C:\cygwin].
NOTE
Make sure to check that Root Directory is in default setting, [C:\cygwin].
Do not change the setting value except Root Directory.
6. Specify the place of the data to be installed.
For installing from CD-ROM, select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive.
(Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive.)
4037F2E547DA
4037F2E548DA
44
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Click [Complete] to start installing.
10. After installing, open the Property of My Computer, and click the Environmental Vari-
able of Advanced tab.
11. Click the New in System Variable Setting.
4037F2E549DA
4037F2E550DA
4036fs2620e0
45
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
12. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable.
5.1.4 Writing into the Compact flash
1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\C250 in the below figure)
NOTE
The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release
Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.
Variable name Variable value
CYGWIN ntsec
HOME /home/username
4036fs2621e0
4038F2E562DA
46
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2. Double-click the Firmware data, and specify the directory to be uncompressed, and
then uncompress it.
NOTE
When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed,
delete it before uncompressing.
3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized
in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure)
4038F2E563DA
4036fs2623e0
47
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Click [Start] [Program] [Accessories] [Command Prompt] to open the Com-
mand Prompt.
5. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory.
6. Specify the Drive of Compact flash, which was recognized through the procedure 3,
and execute the mksf.bat. (Input the C: \C250\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in
the below figure, and push the Enter.)
7. Once the mkcf.bat is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started.
8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely
matched, VERIFY OK appears.
9. Remove the Compact flash from PC.
NOTE
When removing the Compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal
and then remove it according to the precise removing method.
4038F2E564DA
4038F2E565DA
48
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5.2 Firmware rewriting
The F/W is updated using the Compact flash.
5.2.1 Updating method
NOTE
NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned
ON.
1. Open the Front Door, and turn OFF
2. Remove the screw [1] and the Metal
Blanking Plate [2].
3. Insert the Compact Flash card [3]
into the slot.
4038F2C528DA
[2]
[1]
4038F2C529DA
[3]
49
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Turn ON the Main Power Switch and the Sub Power Switch.
5. Control Panel shows up to four types of F/W to be updated.
6. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)
*1: The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure.
7. Press the [START]. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
8. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been
rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check also the Check Sum value
([Check Sum XXXX]) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.)
9. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
10. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot.
11. Turn ON the Main Power Switch, and close the Front Door.
12. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
13. Select [Firmware Version].
14. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
F/W to be updated Appropriate board
MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
SCANNER Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
PRINTER Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax Board *1
4038F2C530DA
50
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5.2.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails
If NG appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in
which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps.
1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.
2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the Compact flash for a new one and
try another rewriting sequence.
3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused NG
and carry out data rewriting procedure.
*1: The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure.
SCANNER Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
PRINTER Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax Board *1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Other
51
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Other
6.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Paint-locked Screws
NOTE
Paint-locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted
or set at the factory and should not be adjusted, set, or removed in the field.
B. Red Painted Screws
NOTE
When the screws are removed, the red paint is coated on the points where read-
justment is required.
Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened, you should make adjustment.
Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary
adjustment. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions,
only one representative screw may be marked with red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
NOTE
Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to Handling of
PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
6. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
52
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.2 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
6.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1
Exterior parts
IR Upper Right Cover 54
2 IR Right Cover 54
3 IR Upper Rear Cover 54
4 Left Cover 55
5 Upper Front Cover 55
6 IR Left Cover 55
7 IR Upper Front Cover 55
8 Original Glass 56
9 IR Front Cover 56
10 Exit Tray 57
11 Upper Rear Cover 57
12 Lower Rear Cover 57
13 Rear Left Cover 57
14 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover 58
15 Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover 58
16 Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover 58
17 Front Door 59
18 Rear Right Cover 59
19 Control Panel 60
20 Tray 1 61
21 Tray 2 62
22 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 63
23 Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 63
24 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 64
25 Front Cover 64
26
Board and etc.
Mechanical Control Board 66
27 DC Power Supply 69
28 Scanner Motor Drive Board 71
29 CCD Unit 71
30 Image Processing Board 73
31 Slide Interface Board 75
32 MFP Control Board 76
33 DIMM0, DIMM1 78
34 Hard Disk Drive 78
35 High Voltage Unit 80
36 Tray 1 Paper Size Board 81
37 Tray 2 Control Board 81
38 Tray 2 Paper Size Board 83
39 Inverter Board 85
53
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.2.2 Cleaning parts list
40 Board and etc. PH Interface Board 85
41
Unit
Multi Bypass Unit 87
42 PH Unit 89
43 Transport Drive Assy 93
44 Hopper Drive Assy 95
45 Right Door Assy
46
IR
Scanner Motor 100
47 Scanner Assy 103
48 Scanner Drive Cables 104
49
Others
PWB Box 112
50 Color Developing Motor 115
51 Color PC Drum Motor 116
52 Toner Supply Motor C/K 116
53 Toner Supply Motor Y/M 116
54 Main Motor 117
55 Fusing Drive Motor 119
56 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor 121
57 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor 121
58 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor 123
59 IDC/Registration Sensor/1, IDC/Registration Sensor/2 124
1 PH PH Window 126
2 Processing section Image Transfer Belt Unit 127
3
Tray 1
Feed Roller 127
5
Bypass
Feed Roller 128
7
Tray 2
Feed Roller 129
8 Pick-up Roller 129
10 Transport Roller 132
11
IR
Scanner Rail 132
12 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) 133
13 Lens 134
14 Original Glass 134
15 CCD Sensor 135
54
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3 Disassembly/Assembly procedure
6.3.1 IR Upper Right Cover/IR Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover
1. Remove three Screws [1], and remove the IR Upper Right Cover [2].
2. Open the Fusing Unit Cover.
3. Remove the four Screws [3], and remove the IR Right Cover [4].
4. Remove each Screw [5], and remove two Hinge Covers [6].
5. Remove four Shoulder Screws [7] and the Screw [8], and remove the IR Upper Rear
Cover [9].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[7] [8]
[9]
4037F2C033DA
55
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.2 Left Cover/Upper Front Cover/IR Left Cover/IR Upper Front Cover
1. Open the Front Door [1].
2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Left Tray [3].
3. Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Upper Front Cover [5].
4. Remove four Screws [6], and remove the IR Left Cover [7].
5. Remove two Shoulder Screws [8] and the Screw [9], and remove the IR Upper Front
Cover [10].
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6] [7] [8]
[9]
[10]
4037F2C034DA
56
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.3 Original Glass/IR Front Cover
1. Remove the IR Upper Right Cover.
54
2. Remove each Screw [1], and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket (near side/
inmost side) [2].
3. Remove the Original Glass [3].
4. Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover.
54, 55
5. Remove the IR Left Cover.
55
6. Remove five Screws [4], and remove the IR Front Cover [5].
[1]
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[4]
4037F2C035DA
57
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.4 Exit Tray/Upper Rear Cover/Lower Rear Cover/Rear Left Cover
1. Remove the Left Cover.
55
2. Remove the Sub Tray [1].
3. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Exit Tray [3].
4. Remove the Dust Filter/Cooling Fan [4].
5. Remove four Screws [5], and remove the Upper Rear Cover [6].
6. Remove seven Screws [7], and remove the Lower Rear Cover [8].
7. Remove three Screws [9], and remove the Rear Left Cover [10].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[8]
[9] [10]
4037F2C036DA
58
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.5 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover/Multi Bypass
Tray Upper Cover
1. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover [2].
2. Remove the Screws [3], and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover [4].
3. Remove the Tray Extension [5].
4. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover [7].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
4037F2C037DA
59
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.6 Front Door
2. Remove the Screw [1] each to
remove the Right and Left Stoppers
[2].
3. Pull out the Right and Left Pins [3] to
remove the Front Door [4].
6.3.7 Rear Right Cover
1. Disconnect the IR Connector [1].
3. Remove three Screws [2], and
remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C038DB
[3]
[4]
[4]
4038F2C039DA
4038F2C501DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
60
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.8 Control Panel (UN201)
1. Remove four caps [1] at both ends of
Control Panel.
2. Remove four Screws [2].
[1]
[1]
4038F2C040DB
[2]
[2] 4038F2C041DB
61
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove the Flat Cable [3].
4. Remove the Control Panel [4].
6.3.9 Tray 1
1. Slide out the Tray 1 [1].
2. Slide out the Tray 1 [3] while press-
ing the Slide Locks [2] at both ends.
[3]
[4]
4038F2C042DA
[1]
4038F2C043DB
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
4037F2C044DA
62
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.10 Tray 2
1. Slide out the Tray 2 [1].
the Stopper [3].
3. Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing
the Slide Locks [4].
[1]
4038F2C045DB
[3]
[4]
[2]
4038F2C046DB
63
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.11 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Left Cover
1. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the
Wiring cover [2].
2. Remove four Screws [3], and remove
the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [4].
remove the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover
[6].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4038F2C047DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C048DA
[6]
[5]
[5]
4038F2C049DA
64
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.12 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover
the Tray 2 Right Rear Cover [2].
6.3.13 Front Cover
1. Remove the Front Door.
59
2. Remove the Left Cover, Upper Front Cover and Exit Tray.
55, 57
3. Remove the Toner Cartridges (C, M, Y, K).
33
4. Remove the Waste Toner Box.
27
5. Remove the imaging Units (C, M, Y, K).
35
NOTE
After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light
shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit
exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged.
the Connector protective cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C050DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C051DA
65
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove four Screws [5].
[3]
4038F2C052DA
[4]
4038F2C053DA
[5]
[5]
4038F2C054DA
66
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
10. Unhook six tabs [6], and remove the
Front Cover [7].
6.3.14 Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
NOTE
If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to
remove the Mechanical Control Board.
When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with
your hand to prevent if from dropping.
1. Remove the Exit Tray.
57
2. Remove the Rear Left Cover.
57
3. Remove twelve Screws [1] to remove
the protective sheet of DC Power
Supply [2].
4. Remove the Harness [4] from three
Wire saddles [3].
NOTE
When installing the Mechanical
Control Board, make sure to fix the
Harness at the original position
with the wire saddle.
[6]
[6]
[7]
4038F2C055DA
[1] [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1]
4038F2C056DB
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C057DA
67
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Mechanical Control Board.
6. Remove six Screws [5], and remove
the Mechanical Control Board [6].
4037F2C058DB
[5]
[5]
[6]
4038F2C059DA
68
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
NOTE
When Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) is replaced, relocate the Parameter Chip
(IC6).
Mount the Parameter Chip (IC6) of old Mechanical Control Board onto the new
Mechanical Control Board.
NOTE
When the Parameter Chip (IC6) is
mounted, precisely fit the direc-
tions of each A.
NOTE
When the Control Board is to be
replaced, rewriting the Firmware to
the latest one.
4037F2C061DB
4037F2C534DA
A
A
69
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.15 DC Power Supply (PU1)
NOTE
If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to
remove the DC Power Supply.
When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with
your hand to prevent if from dropping.
57
2. Remove the Rear Left Cover.
57
3. Remove twelve Screws [1] to remove
the protective sheet of DC Power
Supply [2].
4. Remove five Wire saddles [3] and
the Edge cover [4].
5. Disconnect the Connector [5], and
remove the Harness from three Wire
saddles [6].
[1] [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1]
4038F2C056DB
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C062DA
[5]
[6]
[6]
4038F2C063DA
70
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
remove the Harness [9] from the
Wire saddles [8].
7. Remove two Screws [10], and
remove the Power Supply Cooling
Fan Motor/1 [11].
8. Remove all the Connectors on the DC Power Supply.
[7]
[8]
[9]
4038F2C064DA
[10]
[11]
4038F2C065DA
4037F2C066DB
71
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove four Screws [12], and
remove the DC Power Supply [13].
6.3.16 Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
1. Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover.
54
2. Disconnect three Connectors [1] and
four Board Supports [2].
3. Remove the Scanner Motor Drive
Board [3].
6.3.17 CCD Unit
1. Remove the Original Glass.
56
2. Remove seven Screws [1], and
remove the CCD Unit Cover [2].
[12]
[12]
[13]
4038F2C067DB
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C068DA
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C069DA
72
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove four Screws [3] and Flat
Cable [4], and remove the CCD Unit
[5].
1. Align the CCD Unit with the center of
the graduations as illustrated on the
left and then tighten the four screws.
2. Reinstall the Original Glass.
5. Carry out the [Cross Direction Adjustment]. If the specifications are not met, loosen the
CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the sub scan direction as neces-
sary.
240
NOTE
Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar
tool to tap to move it, as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens
results.
When CCD unit is replaced, [Scan Calibration] and [Line Mag Setting] under [Sys-
tem 2] available in Service Mode should be OFF.
[4]
[3]
[5]
[3]
4038F2C070DA
4038F2C071DA
73
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.18 Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover and
IR Right Cover.
57, 54
2. Remove the CCD Unit Cover.
Refer to the step1 to 2 on page 135.
the IR Frame Protective Cover [2].
remove the Original Size Detecting
Sensor Assy [4].
the Board cover [6].
[1]
[2]
4037F2C034DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
4037F2C035DA
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
4037F2C036DB
74
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
7. Remove all the Connectors and the
Flat Cables on the Image Processing
Board [8].
8. Remove six Screws [9] and two Bolts
[10], and remove the Image Process-
ing Board [11].
NOTE
When the Image Processing Board
is to be replaced, rewriting the
Firmware to the latest one.
[7]
[7]
4037F2C037DA
4038F2C072DB
[8]
[9]
[11]
[10]
4038F2C073DB
75
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.19 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF)
1. Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
57
Flat Cable on the Slide Interface
Board.
3. Remove five Screws [1].
4. Disconnect the Connector [2] con-
necting to the MFP Control Board
and remove the Slide Interface
Board [3].
4038F2C074DA
[1]
4038F2C075DA
[2]
[3]
4038F2C076DA
76
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.20 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover,
Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right
Cover.
57, 59
2. Remove the Slide Interface Board.
75
3. Remove thirteen Screws, and
remove the Shield cover [1].
4. Remove the NVRAM [2] on the MFP
Control Board.
5. Remove the DIMM0 and DIMM1 [3]
on the MFP Control Board.
4038F2C507DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C077DA
4038F2C078DC
[3]
[3]
77
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Disconnect the Connector [4] and
Flat Cable [5].
7. Remove four Bolts [6] and six
Screws [7], and remove the Interface
cover [8].
8. Remove thirteen Screws [9], and
remove the MFP Control Board [10].
NOTE
When the MFP Control Board is
replaced, mount the removed
NVRAM to the new MFP Control
Board.
When the MFP Control Board is
replaced, make sure to update the
firmware.
[4]
[5]
4038F2C079DA
[7]
[7]
[8]
[6]
4038F2C080DA
[9]
[9] [10]
4038F2C081DA
78
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.21 DIMM0 (Work0), DIMM1 (Work1)
Cover.
57, 59
3. Remove the DIMM0 [2] and DIMM1
[2].
6.3.22 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Cover.
57, 59
4038F2C507DA
[1]
4038F2C082DB
[2]
[2]
4038F2C507DA
[1]
79
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove the four Screws [3], and
remove the Hard Disk Drive Assy [4].
5. Remove four screws [5] and the Flat
cable [6], and remove the Hard Disk
Drive [7].
NOTE
When the Hard Disk is replaced,
select [State Confirmation]
[Memory/HDD Adj.] [HDD For-
mat] in Service Mode for Logical
format.
[2]
4038F2C083DA
[4]
[3]
4038F2C084DA
4038F2C515DA
[5] [7]
[5] [6]
80
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.23 High Voltage Unit (HV1)
1. Remove the PWB Box.
112
2. Disconnect four Connectors [1].
3. Remove five Screws [2] and the tab
[3], and remove the High Voltage
Unit [4].
NOTE
When installing the High Voltage
Unit, make sure that the terminal
end surely contacts.
NOTE
When installing the High Voltage
Unit, make sure that the claw [5]
shown in the left illustration is
surely set up.
[1]
4038F2C085DA
[2] [2]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C086DA
[5]
4038F2C087DA
81
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.24 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I)
112
3. Remove two Screws [1] and Connec-
tor [2], and remove the Tray 1 Paper
Size Board Assy [3].
4. Remove the Lever [4].
5. Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board
[5].
6.3.25 Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
1. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover
and Tray 2 Rear Left Cover.
63
2. If the optional paper feed cabinet is
mounted, disconnect the Connector
[1].
[1]
[2] [3]
4038F2C088DA
[4]
[5]
4038F2C516DA
[1]
4038F2C089DA
82
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Metal blanking plate [3].
4. Remove the Harness [5] from the
Wire saddle [4].
5. Remove all the Connectors on the
Tray 2 Control Board.
[2]
[3]
4038F2C090DA
[4]
[5] 4038F2C091DA
4038F2C092DA
83
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Tray 2 Control Board [7].
6.3.26 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)
and Tray 2 Rear Left Cover.
63
mounted, disconnect the Connector
[1].
[6]
[7]
4038F2C093DA
[1]
4038F2C089DA
[2]
[3]
4038F2C090DA
84
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Remove the Harness [5] from the
Edge cover [4].
remove the Tray 2 Control Board
Assy [7].
7. Remove two Claws [8] and the Con-
nector [9], and remove the Tray 2
Paper Size Board Assy [10].
[4]
[5]
4038F2C094DB
[6]
[7]
4038F2C095DA
[8]
[9] [10]
4038F2C096DA
85
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
8. Remove the Lever [11], and remove
the Tray 2 Paper Size Board [12].
6.3.27 Inverter Board (PU201)
1. Remove the Scanner Assy.
103
2. Remove four Screws [1], Flat Cable
[2] and Connector [3], and remove
the Inverter Board [4].
6.3.28 PH Interface Board (PWB-D)
1. Remove the Front Cover.
64
2. Remove the Image Transfer Belt
Unit.
31
the Front Right Cover [2].
4038F2C517DA
[11]
[12]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
4038F2C518DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C097DA
86
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove seven Screws [3], and
remove the Right Door Switch Assy
[4].
5. Remove the Screw [5] each, and
remove the Imaging Unit contact
Assy [6] of each color.
6. Remove two Screws [7] each, and
remove the Imaging Unit Roll Assy
[8] of each color.
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C098DA
[5]
[6]
4038F2C099DA
[7]
[8]
4038F2C100DA
87
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Flat Cables on the PH Interface
Board.
8. Remove two Screws [9] and six tabs
[10], and remove the PH Interface
Board [11].
6.3.29 Multi Bypass Unit
1. Remove the Multi Bypass Tray Right
Cover and the Multi Bypass Tray Left
Cover.
58
2. Disconnect five Connectors [1].
4038F2C101DA
[9]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[10]
4038F2C102DB
[1]
[1]
4038F2C103DA
88
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Multi Bypass Unit [3].
NOTE
When installing the Multi Bypass
Unit, fit the position of dowel shown
in the left illustration.
[2]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C104DA
4038F2C105DA
89
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.30 PH Unit
64
2. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit.
31
3. Remove the Screw [1] and discon-
nect the Connector [2] respectively,
and remove three Imaging Unit
Guide rails [3].
4. Disconnect the Flat Cable [4] and the
Connector [5] of the PH Unit (Black).
5. Unhook the tab [6], and remove the
Gear [7] of the PH Unit (Black).
[1]
[2] [3]
4038F2C106DA
[4]
[5]
4038F2C107DA
[7]
[6]
4038F2C108DB
90
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Remove the Stopper [8] of the PH
Unit (Black).
NOTE
When removing the Stopper, use
care so that both ends of the Stop-
per will not open but stay parallel as
shown on the left.
Keep using the Stopper after once
stretched out may cause uneven
pitch or other image troubles.
7. Remove the PH Unit (Black).
Move the front side of the PH Unit to
left a little, and remove the boss [9]
from the locating hole [10].
Lift up the front side of the PH Unit a
little.
Remove the boss [11] at the rear side
of the PH Unit from the locating hole
[12].
NOTE
Since the back of the PH Unit is
pushed to the right with the two plate
springs [13], remove it by tilting the
backside of the PH Unit to the left as
shown in the left illustration.
[8]

4038F2C109DA
4038F2C110DA
[9]
[10]
4037F2C111DB
[11]
[12]
[13]
91
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Remove the PH Unit [14].
8. Follow the same procedures to
remove all PH Units.
B. Reinstall Procedure
1. Fit the back of the PH Unit [1] into
the plate spring [2] of installation
plate.
2. Push the PH Unit [3] along the right
side line of PH Unit installation plate
all the way and fit it into the plate
spring [4].
3. Make sure that the two bosses [5] at
front and rear side of the PH Unit fit
in the locating hole [6].
4037F2C112DB
[14]
4037F2C113DB
[1]
[2]
4037F2C114DA
[5]
[6]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
92
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Reinstall the Stopper [7].
NOTE
When reinstalling the Stopper, use
care so that both ends of the Stop-
per will not open but stay parallel as
shown on the left.
Keep using the Stopper after once
stretched out may cause uneven
pitch or other image troubles.
5. Reinstall the Gear [8].
NOTE
Make sure that the gear claw is fit
in.
6. Connect the Connector and the Flat
Cable.
NOTE
Make sure the Harness is installed
along with the Harness guide.
7. Follow the same procedures to
install all the PH Units.
8. Install the Imaging Unit Guide Rail
[9].
NOTE
Make sure that the two claws [10] at
rear end of the rail are fit in the
locating hole on the main unit.
9. Reinstall the Image Transfer Belt
Unit.
10. Reinstall the Front Cover.
11. Make skew adjustment of the PH
Unit.
309
NOTE
When replacing the PH Unit, make
sure to conduct PH Unit skew
adjustment.
[7]

4038F2C115DA
[8]
4038F2C116DA
[9]
[10]
[9]
4038F2C117DA
93
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.31 Transport Drive Assy
112
2. Remove the High Voltage Unit.
80
3. Remove the Color Developing Motor.
115
4. Remove the Color PC Drum Motor.
116
5. Remove the Main Motor.
117
remove the Reinforcement plate [2]
of the Right Door and spring [3].
7. Remove the Shoulder Screw [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C118DA
[4]
4038F2C119DA
[5]
[6]
4038F2C120DA
94
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove five Screws [7] and the
Connector [8], and remove the Rear
Handle Assy [9].
11. Remove the Harnesses [12] from
five Wire Saddles [11].
12. Remove eight Screws [13], and
remove the Transport Drive Assy
[14].
NOTE
The Screw is fixed at the position
with the triangle markers.
[7]
[7] [8]
[9]
[7]
4038F2C121DA
[10]
[11]
[11]
[12]
[12]
4038F2C122DA
[13]
[13] [14]
4038F2C123DA
95
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.32 Hopper Drive Assy
1. Remove the Transfer Drive Assy.
93
2. Disconnect seven Connectors [1].
3. Remove the Harness from four Wire
Saddles [2].
the Duct [4].
[1]
[1]
[1]
4038F2C124DB
[2]
4038F2C125DA
[3]
[4]
4038F2C126DA
96
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Remove four Screws [5] and two
Claws [6], and remove the Hopper
Drive Assy [7].
6.3.33 Right Door Assy
112
2. Remove the High Voltage Unit.
80
3. Remove the IR Right Cover.
54
4. Remove the Harness from the Edge
Cover [1].
5. Remove the Harness from the Wire
Saddle [2].
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[7]
4038F2C127DA
[1]
4038F2C153DA
[2]
4038F2C154DA
97
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Remove the Screw [3] fixing the IR
cable.
the Motor cover [5].
remove the Reinforcement plate [7]
of the right door and spring [8].
[3]
4038F2C155DA
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
4038F2C156DA
[6]
[7]
[8]
4038F2C159DA
98
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
10. Remove the Shoulder Screw [9].
remove the Metal blanking plate [11].
12. Remove five Screws [12] and the
Connector [13], and remove the
Rear Handle Assy [14].
[9]
4038F2C576DA
[10]
[11]
4038F2C577DA
[12]
[12] [13]
[14]
[12]
4038F2C578DA
99
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
13. Disconnect four Connectors [15].
14. Remove the Front Door.
59
remove the Front Right Cover [17].
the Shaft [19].
18. Remove the Right Door Assy [20].
[15] [15] [15]
[15]
4038F2C579DA
[17] [16]
[16]
4038F2C580DA
[18]
[20]
[19]
4038F2C581DA
100
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.34 Scanner Motor (M201)
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the IR Upper Rear Cover.
57, 54
2. Remove the Harness from two Wire
Saddles [1] and the Edge Cover [2].
remove the Harness from the Wire
Saddle [4].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C128DA
[3] [4]
4038F2C129DA
101
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove 16 screws [5], and remove the IR reinforcement frame [6].
5. Remove the Tension spring [7] for
the Scanner Motor belt.
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
4038F2C130DA
[7]
4038F2C131DA
[8]
4038F2C132DB
102
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
remove the Scanner Motor Assy
[10].
8. Remove two Screws [11], Set screw
[12], Damper [13], and remove the
Scanner Motor [14].
1. Temporarily secure the Scanner
Motor Assy [2] using three Screws
[1].
2. Hook the Tension spring [3].
3. With the Scanner drive gear set
screw located on the right-hand side
as shown on the left, slide the Scan-
ner Motor Assy to the left and check
that it is returned to the original posi-
tion by the tension of the spring. Per-
form this step three times.
4. Securely tighten the three Screws to
fix the Scanner Motor Assy [2] into
position.
5. Connect the Connector and fix the
Harness to the Wire Saddle.
[9]
[10]
4038F2C133DB
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
4037F2C134DB
4038F2C524DA
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[1] [1]
103
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.35 Scanner Assy
56
2. Move the Scanner Assy [1] to the
notch position shown in the left illus-
tration, and remove the mounting
screws [2] at front and rear.
NOTE
Do not remove the Scanner Posi-
tioning Screws (red-painted) [3].
3. Take out the Scanner Assy [4] by
turning it in the direction of the arrow
shown.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C135DB
4038F2C521DA
[3]
[4]
4038F2C522DA
104
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Holder [6].
5. Peel off the aluminum tape, and
remove the flat cable [7].
6. Remove the Scanner Assy [8].
6.3.36 Scanner Drive Cables
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
57
2. Remove the Control Panel [1].
60
3. Remove three Presser Bars [2] of
Flat Cable.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
4038F2C136DA
[1]
4038F2C566DA
[2]
4038F2C138DA
105
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove the IR Front Cover.
56
the Ground cable from the Wire Sad-
dle [4].
6. Remove four screws [5], and remove
the Control panel base [6].
56
8. Remove the Scanner Assy.
103
9. Unhook the Springs [7] of the Scan-
ner Drive Cables on the hook side,
one each at the front and in the rear.
10. Remove the Scanner Motor Assy.
100
11. Remove the Screw [8] and then slide
the Front pulley [9] toward the front.
12. Remove the Screw [10], and slide
the Wire Pulley [11] (Rear side) in
the direction of front side.
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
4038F2C139DA
4038F2C550DA
[7]
[7]
4038F2C551DA
[9]
[8]
4038F2C552DA
[11]
[10]
106
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Scanner drive gear [13].
14. Snap off the C-clip [14], and remove
the Bushing [15] (front).
15. Slide the Shaft [16] toward the rear
and lift it. Then, remove the front and
rear pulleys [17].
16. Remove the Scanner Drive Cables.
B. Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables
(1) Overall figure
4038F2C553DA
[13]
[12]
4038F2C554DA
[14]
[15]
4038F2C555DA
[16] [17]
4038F2C556DA
107
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
(2) Reinstallation Procedure
<Front>
1. Position the round bead [1] of the
Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [2]
as shown.
NOTE
Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
2. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable
around the pulley five turns clock-
wise, from the rear toward the front
side.
NOTE
Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
3. Wind the hook end of the cable
around the pulley five turns counter-
clockwise, from the front toward the
rear side.
NOTE
rides on the other.
4. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [3] onto
the pulley to secure the cable in posi-
tion.
<Rear>
5. Position the round bead [4] of the
Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [5]
as shown.
NOTE
Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
4036fs2554c0
[2]
[1]
4036fs2555c0
4036fs2556c0
4036fs2557c0
[3]
4036fs2558c0
[5]
[4]
108
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable
around the pulley five turns clock-
wise, from the front toward the rear
side.
NOTE
rides on the other.
7. Wind the hook end of the cable
around the pulley five turns counter-
clockwise, from the rear toward the
front side.
NOTE
rides on the other.
8. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [6] onto
the pulley to secure the cable in posi-
tion.
9. Install the front and rear pulleys [7]
and bushings [8] onto the shaft [9]
and fit the C-clip [10].
4036fs2559c0
4036fs2560c0
4036fs2561c0
[6]
4036fs2562c0
[7]
[9]
[8]
[10]
109
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
10. Mount the Scanner drive gear [11]
on the shaft [12] and secure it using
the screw [13].
NOTE
Allow a clearance of about 0.3 mm
between the Scanner drive gear and
bushing.
Apply the Screw lock on the Screw.
11. Secure the front and rear pulleys [14]
using the screw [15] each.
NOTE
Apply the Screw lock on the Screw.
NOTE
Mount the Screw [16] in the direc-
tion that is opposite against the
direction for which Scanner Drive
Gear [17] and Screw [18] are
screwed together as shown in the
left figure.
12. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy.
100
<Front>
13. Wind the bead end of the cable [19]
around pulley C [20] and pulley B
[21], then hook the bead [22] onto
the Adjustable Anchor [23].
4038F2C549DA
[11]
0.3 mm
[12]
[13]
4036fs2564c0
[14]
[15]
[15]
[14]
4036fs2584c0
[16]
[17]
[18]
4036fs2565c0
[19]
[21]
[20]
[22]
[23]
110
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
14. Wind the hook end of the cable [24]
around pulley A [25] and pulley B
[26].
15. Fit the hook end of the cable [27] to
the spring [28] and then hook the
spring to the catch A in the frame.
16. Measure the Spring length, and
check if its length is within the range
of 63.0 mm 1 mm.
<When out of the given range>
In case of 64.1 mm or more:
Retry to put the spring on the catch B.
In case of 61.9 mm or less:
Retry to put the spring on the catch C.
<Rear>
17. Wind the bead end of the cable [29]
around pulley F [30] and pulley E
[31], then hook the bead [32] onto
the Adjustable Anchor [33].
18. Wind the hook end of the cable [34]
around pulley D [35] and pulley E
[36].
4036fs2566c0
[24]
[25]
[26]
4036fs2567c0
[27]
[28]
A
B
C
4036fs2568c0
[29]
[30]
[33]
[31]
[32]
4036fs2569c0
[34]
[36]
[35]
111
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
19. Fit the hook end of the cable [37] to
the spring [38] and then hook the
spring to the catch A in the frame.
20. Measure the Spring length, and
check if its length is within the range
of 63.0 mm 1 mm.
<When out of the given range>
In case of 64.1 mm or more:
Retry to put the spring on the catch B.
In case of 61.9 mm or less:
Retry to put the spring on the catch C.
21. Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys.
22. Adjust the focus positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit.
305
23. Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.
306
NOTE
Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed, be sure to carry out the
[Feed Direction Adjustment] procedure.
238
4036fs2570c0
[38]
[37]
A
B
C
112
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.37 PWB Box
Cover.
57, 59
3. Disconnect the Flat Cable [2] on the
MFP Control Board, and remove two
Presser Bars [3] of Flat Cable.
4. Disconnect the Flat Cable [4] on the
Slide Interface Board, and remove
the Presser Bar [5] of Flat Cable.
4038F2C507DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C140DA
[4]
[5]
4038F2C141DA
113
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Disconnect three Connectors [6] on
the Slide Interface Board.
Saddle [8].
7. Remove two tabs [9], and remove
the Cooling Fan Motor/2 [10].
8. Remove the Harness [12] from two
Wire Saddles [11].
[6]
4038F2C142DA
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
4038F2C143DA
[11]
[12]
4038F2C144DA
114
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove the Harness [13] from two
Edge Covers [14].
Saddle [16].
11. Remove the Screw [17] of the
Ground terminal.
[13]
[14]
[14]
4038F2C145DB
[15]
[16]
4038F2C146DA
[17]
4038F2C147DA
115
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
12. Remove eight Screws [18], and
remove the PWB Box [19].
6.3.38 Color Developing Motor (M3)
112
2. Remove the Connector [1] and four
Screws [2], and remove the Color
Developing Motor [3].
[18]
[18]
[18]
[19]
[18]
4038F2C148DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C149DA
116
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.39 Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
112
Screws [2], and remove the Color PC
Drum Motor [3].
6.3.40 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
112
2. Remove the Connector [1] and two
Screws [2], and remove the Toner
Supply Motor C/K [3].
6.3.41 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
112
Screws [2], and remove the Toner
Supply Motor Y/M [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
4038F2C150DA
[1]
[3]
[2]
4038F2C151DA
[2]
[1]
[3]
4038F2C152DA
117
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.42 Main Motor (M1)
112
54
Cover [1].
Saddle [2].
cable.
[1]
4038F2C153DA
[2]
4038F2C154DA
[3]
4038F2C155DA
118
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Screws [7], and remove the Main
Motor [8].
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
4038F2C156DA
[6]
[7]
[8]
4038F2C157DA
119
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.43 Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
112
54
Cover [1].
Saddle [2].
cable.
[1]
4038F2C153DA
[2]
4038F2C154DA
[3]
4038F2C155DA
120
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Screws [7], and remove the Fusing
Drive Motor [8].
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
4038F2C156DA
[6]
[7]
[8]
4038F2C158DA
121
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.44 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
1. Pull out the Tray 2.
2. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right
Cover.
63
mounted, remove it.
6. Remove three Screws [4], remove
and the Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor [5].
6.3.45 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
and the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover.
63
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DA
[3]
[4]
[5]
4038F2C166DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DA
122
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove the Harness of the Motor
Assy [4] from five Wire Saddles [3].
the Motor Assy [7].
the Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor [9].
[3]
[4] [5]
4038F2C167DA
[6]
[7]
4038F2C168DA
[8]
[9]
4038F2C519DA
123
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.3.46 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
and the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover.
63
4. Remove the Harness of the Motor
Assy [4] from five Wire Saddles [3].
the Motor Assy [7].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C165DA
[3]
[4] [5]
4038F2C167DA
[6]
[7]
4038F2C168DA
124
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor
[9].
6.3.47 IDC/Registration Sensor/1, IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE1/SE2)
Unit.
31
87
the Plate spring [2].
4. Remove the Shoulder Screw [3] and
the Screw [4].
5. Remove the Vertical transport unit
[5] in manner of the left illustration.
NOTE
Since multiple Connectors are con-
nected to the backside of the Verti-
cal Transport Assy, do not pull it by
force.
[9]
[8]
4038F2C520DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C169DA
[5]
[3] [4]
4038F2C170DB
125
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Remove the Claws [6] of both sides,
and remove the Sensor cover [7].
NOTE
Use care not to miss the spring [8].
7. Remove two Screws [9] and Connec-
tor [10], and remove the IDC/Regis-
tration Sensor/1 [11].
8. Repeat the step 6 and 7, and remove
the IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (rear
side) [12].
[6]
[7]
[8]
4038F2C171DA
[9]
[10]
[11]
4038F2C172DA
[12]
4038F2C173DA
126
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.4 Cleaning procedure
NOTE
The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
6.4.1 PH Window
2. Remove the PH Window Cleaning
Jig [1].
3. Insert the PH Window Cleaning Jig
[2] to the cleaning port [3] and clean
it by putting the jig back and forth a
couple times.
NOTE
Clean every PH Window of CMYK.
4038F2C547DA
[1]
4038F2C548DA
[3] [2]
127
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.4.2 Image Transfer Belt Unit
Unit.
31
2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the
Image Transfer Belt [1].
NOTE
If it is difficult to clean with dried
soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with
a solvent.
Do not wipe out with water.
When solvent is used to dampen a
cloth, do not use the ones other
than shown below:
isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol,
PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7.
After cleaned with the solvent,
make copies more than 28-piece of
A3 white paper to eliminate the
image noise.
6.4.3 Tray 1 Feed Roller
alcohol, wipe the Tray 1 Feed Roller
[1] clean of dirt.
6.4.4 Tray 1 Separation Roller
the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller
mounting bracket Assy [2].
[1]
4038F2C174DA
[1]
4038F2C175DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C002DB
128
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
alcohol, wipe the Tray 1 Separation
Roller [3] clean of dirt.
6.4.5 Bypass Tray Feed Roller
87
alcohol, wipe the Bypass Tray Feed
Roller [1].
6.4.6 Bypass Tray Separation Roller
87
2. Remove the Screws [1], and remove
the Ground terminal [2].
[3]
4038F2C176DA
[1]
4038F2C177DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C009DA
129
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Bypass Tray Separation Roller
Assy [4].
4. Using the soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Bypass Paper Sep-
aration Roller [5].
6.4.7 Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-up Roller
[3]
[4]
4038F2C010DA
[5]
4038F2C178DA
[1]
[2]
4038F2C011DA
130
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
NOTE
cover.
Assy [6].
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Feed Roller
[7] and the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [8].
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C012DB
OK NG
[5]
[6]
4038F2C013DA
[8]
[7]
4038F2C179DB
131
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.4.8 Tray 2 Separation Roller
NOTE
cover.
Assy [6].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C011DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
4038F2C012DB
OK NG
[5]
[6]
4038F2C013DA
132
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Separation
Roller [7].
6.4.9 Tray 2 Transport Roller
1. Open the Vertical Transport Door.
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Transport
Roller [1].
6.4.10 Scanner Rail
1. Remove three Screws [1] and the IR
Upper Right Cover [2].
4038F2C523DA
[7]
[1]
4038F2C180DA
4038F2C503DA
[2]
[1]
[1]
133
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2. Remove two Screws [3] and two
Original Glass fixing brackets [4] (at
the front and rear).
3. Remove the Original Glass [5].
alcohol, wipe the Scanner Rails [6]
clean of dirt.
NOTE
Apply lubricant after cleaning.
6.4.11 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)
56
alcohol, wipe the Mirror 1 [1] and
Mirror 2/3 [2].
4038F2C504DA
[5]
[4]
[4]
[3]
4038F2C505DA
[6]
4038F2C506DA
[1]
[2]
134
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.4.12 Lens
56
2. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens
cover [2].
alcohol, wipe the Lens [3] clean of
dirt.
6.4.13 Original Glass
alcohol, wipe the Original Glass [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C181DA
[3]
4038F2C182DA
[1]
4038F2C183DA
135
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.4.14 CCD Sensor
56
2. Remove seven Screws [1] and CCD
Unit protective cover [2].
3. Remove two hooks [3] and the lens
cover [4].
4. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened
with alcohol, wipe the CCD Sensor
[5] clean of dirt.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
4038F2C069DA
[3]
[4]
4038F2C184DA
[5]
4038F2C137DA
136
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.5 Mount the original size detecting sensor/2 (PC204)
1. Remove the Original glass.
2. Using the screw [2], mount the Origi-
nal Size Detection Sensor/2 (PC204)
[1] and fix it.
<How to set the Harness>
[1]
[2]
4037F2C113DB
PC203 PC204
4037F2C114DB
137
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Select [Service Mode] [System 1]
[Original Size Detection], and set
the Original Glass to [Table2].
4. Select [Service Mode] [Machine]
[Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj].
234
5. Check to make sure that the [Org.
Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set]
is displayed on the Original Size
Detection Sensor Adjustment
screen.
4037F2E530DA
4037F2E531DA
138
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6.6 Option counter
6.6.1 Installation method for the Key Counter
1. cut out the Knockouts [1] of the
Upper Rear Cover.
2. Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
57
3. Pass the Key Counter Harness [2]
through the hole.
4. Mount the Connector [3].
5. Secure the Counter cable [4] and
cable holder [5] with one screw [6].
6. Reinstall the Upper Rear Cover.
4038F2C569DA
[1]
4038F2C570DA
[2]
[3]
4038F2C571DA
[4]
[5]
[6]
139
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
7. Using four screws [8], secure the
Counter Mounting Bracket [7].
NOTE
Secure the Counter Mounting
Bracket passing the connector into
the bracket.
Use the four long screws
(9646 0418 14: M4x18) in the Key
Counter Kit to secure the Counter
Mounting Bracket.
When installing the Key Counter to
the other products, use the short
screws (9646 0408 14: M4x8).
8. Connect the Key Counter Socket
connector [9].
9. Using two screws [11], secure the
counter socket [10].
10. Using two screws [13], secure the
Key Counter Cover [12].
4038F2C572DA
[7]
[8]
4038F2C572DA
[7]
[8]
4038F2C573DA
[11]
[10]
[9]
4038F2C574DA
[12]
[13]
140
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
11. Fix the harness [15] with the cable
clamp [14] as shown in the left figure.
12. Select Service Mode [Billing Set-
ting] [Management Function
Choice] [Key Counter]. Press
[Set], and set Color Mode and Mes-
sage.
For details on setting, see Adjust-
ment/Setting.
4038F2C575DA
[15]
[14]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. How to use the adjustment section
141
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
7. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-
dures for this machine.
Throughout this Adjustment/Setting, the default settings are indicated by .
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
The power supply is properly grounded.
The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
The density is properly selected.
The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
Correct paper is being used for printing.
The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
Toner is not running out.
CAUTION
To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce-
dures.
If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
142
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8. Utility Mode
8.1 Touch Panel Adjustment
Functions To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display
Use Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
Use during the setup procedure.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Press the Accessibility key.
2. Touch [Touch Panel Adj.].
3. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the four crosses (+) on the screen in
sequence.
These crosses may be touched in any order; but be sure to touch the center of each
cross.
Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.
4. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in green.
5. Press the Start key.
4037F3E512DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Utility Mode
143
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.2 Utility Mode function tree
* The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see 223 Administrator Security Level.
For displaying the keys with *** marks, see 298 Administrator Feature Level.
*1: It is displayed only when the optional Fax kit FK-502 is mounted.
*2: It is displayed when the certification is issued at PageScope Web Connection.
Utility/Counter
One-Touch
Registration
Scan
Address
Book
E-Mail
158 158
FTP
Group SMB
Program User Box
Subject/Text
(for E-mail)
Subject
Text
Fax *1
Address
Book *1
Abbr. Dial *1
159
Group *1 E-Mail *1
Program *1 User Box *1
Subject/Text
(for E-mail) *1
Subject *1
User Box
Public/Per-
sonal User Box
Text *1
160
Bulletin Board
User Box *1
User Setting
System
Setting
Language
Selection
161 161
Measurement
Unit Setting
Paper Tray
Setting
Auto Tray
Select Setting
144
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
User Setting
System
Setting
Paper Tray
Setting
Auto Tray
Switch ON/OFF
161 161
No Matching
Paper in Tray
Setting
Print Lists
Reset
Setting
System Auto
Reset
Auto Reset
Job Reset
When
Account is
changed
Auto Color
Level Adjust-
ment
When Origi-
nal is set on
ADF
Power Save
Setting*
Low Power
Mode Setting*
When NEXT
JOB is
selected
Staple
Setting
Sleep Mode
Setting*
Original Set/
Bind Direc-
tion
Output
Setting**
Print/Fax Out-
put Setting**
Print**
Reset Data
After Job
Exit Tray
Setting**
Fax**
Data & Time
Setting**
Daylight Sav-
ings Time
Setting**
AE Level
Adjustment**
Display
Setting
Sub Screen
Display ON/
OFF
163
Scan Basic
Screen Default
Seeing
Default Tab
145
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
User Setting
Display
Setting
Scan Basic
Screen Default
Program
Default
161 163
Address Book
Default Index
Address Type
Symbol Dis-
play
Fax Basic Screen
Default Setting
Default Tab
Default
Program
Address Book
Default Index
Address Type
Symbol Dis-
play
No. of Char-
acters for
Dest. Display
Copy Screen
Copy Operat-
ing Screen
Fax Active
Screen
TX Display
RX Display
Initial Setting
166
Copier
Setting
Auto Paper
Select for
Small Original
166
Auto Booklet
ON when
Fold & Staple
Auto Zoom
for Combine/
Booklet
Sort/Group
Auto Change
146
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
User Setting
Copier
Setting
Auto Magnifi-
cation Selec-
tion (Platen)*
161 166
Auto Magnifi-
cation Selec-
tion (ADF)*
Specify Default
Tray when APS
Off*
Select Tray for
Insert Sheet*
Print Jobs
During Copy
Operation**
Scanner
Setting
JPEG Com-
pression Level
168
Black Com-
pression Level
TWAIN Lock
Time
Printer
Setting
Basic Setting PDL Setting
169
Number of
Sets
Original
Direction
Spool Print
Jobs in HDD
before RIP
A4/A3
LTR/LGR
Auto Switch
Paper
Setting
Paper Tray
Default Paper
Size
2-Sided Print
Bind Direction
147
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
User Setting
Printer
Setting
Paper
Setting
Staple
161 169
Hole-Punch
PCL Setting Typeface
Symbol Set
Font Size
Line/Page
CR/LF
Mapping
PS Setting PS Error Print
Print Reports
Configuration
Page
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Administrator
Setting
System
Setting
Power Save
Low Power
Mode Setting
173 173
Sleep Mode
Setting
Power Save
Key
Entering
Power Save
Mode (Fax)
Output
Setting
Print/Fax Out-
put Settings
Printer
Date/Time
Setting
Exit Tray
Setting
Fax
Daylight Sav-
ings Time
Setting
148
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
System
Setting
Weekly
Timer Setting
Weekly Timer
ON/OFF Setting
173 173
Time Setting
Date Setting
Select Time for
Power Save
Password for
Non-Busi-
ness Hours
Restrict User
Access
Restrict Access to
Saved Program Jobs
Delete Saved
Program Jobs
Restrict Access to
Job Settings
Changing
Job Priority
Deleting
Other Users
Jobs
Registering
and Chang-
ing Addresses
Expert
Adjustment
AE Level
Adjustment
Changing
Zoom Ratio
Printer
Adjustment
Leading Edge
Adjustment
Centering
Centering
(Duplex 2nd
Side)
Media
Adjustment
Erase Lead-
ing Edge ***
Finisher
Adjustment
Center Sta-
ple Position
Half-Fold
Position
149
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
System
Setting
Expert
Adjustment
Density
Adjustment
Thick Paper
Image Den-
sityYellow
173 173
Thick Paper
Image Den-
sityMagenta
Thick Paper
Image Den-
sityCyan
Image
Stabilization
Thick Paper
Image Den-
sityBlack
Black Image
Density
Color Regis-
tration Adjust
Color Regis-
tration Adjust
(Yellow)
Color Regis-
tration Adjust
(Magenta)
Color Regis-
tration Adjust
(Cyan)
Gradation
Adjustment
Copy
Printer
(Gradation)
Printer
(Resolution)
Scanner
Adjustment ***
Leading Edge
Adjustment ***
Centering ***
Horizontal
Adjustment ***
Vertical
Adjustment ***
ADF Adjust-
ment ***
Centering***
150
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
System
Setting
Expert
Adjustment
ADF Adjust-
ment ***
Original Stop
Position***
173 173
Centering Auto
Adjustment***
Auto Adj. of
Stop Position***
List/Counter
Management
List
Job Settings
List
Paper Size/
Type Counter
Standard
Size
Setting***
Original Glass
Original Size
Detect***
Foolscap Size
Setting***
Administra-
tor/Machine
Setting
Administra-
tor Registra-
tion
191
Input Machine
Address
One-Touch
Registration
Scan Address Book E-Mail
191
FTP
Group SMB
Program User Box
Subject/Text
(for E-mail)
Subject
Text
Fax *1
Address Book
*1
Addr. Dial *1
Group *1 E-Mail *1
Program *1 User Box *1
Subject/Text
(for E-mail) *1
Subject *1
151
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
One-Touch
Registration
User Box
Public/Per-
sonal User Box
Text *1
173 191
Bulletin Board
User Box *1
One-Touch
Registration
List
Address Book
List
Group List
Program List
E-Mail Sub-
ject/Text List
User Authenti-
cation/Account
Track
General
Settings
195
User Authenti-
cation Setting
Administra-
tive Setting
User Name
List
User
Registration
Default
Function
Permission
User
Counter
Account
Track Setting
Account Track
Registration
Print without
Authentication
Account Track
Counter
Counter
List ***
Network
Setting
TCP/IP
Setting
198
NetWare
Setting
IPP Setting
FTP Setting
SMB Setting
152
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
Network
Setting
AppleTalk
Setting
173 198
LDAP
Setting
Enabling
LDAP
Setting Up
LDAP
E-Mail
Setting
E-Mail TX
(SMTP)
E-Mail RX
(POP)
Detail
Setting
Device
Setting
Time Adjust-
ment Setting
Status Notifi-
cation Setting
Notification
Address
Setting
PING Confir-
mation
Notification
Item Setting
PSWC
Setting
Notification
Time Setting
SLP Setting
LPD Setting
SNMP
Setting
Prefix/Suffix
Setting
ON/OFF
Setting
Copier
Setting
Auto Zoom
(Platen)
Prefix/Suffix
Setting
213
Auto Zoom
(ADF)
Copier
Setting
Select Tray
when APS
OFF
213
Select Tray for
Insert Sheet
153
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
Copier
Setting
Print Jobs
During Copy
Operation
173 213
Printer
Setting
Local I/F
Timeout
214
Parallel I/F
IEEE 1284/
USB
Fax Setting
*1
Header Infor-
mation *1
215
Header/Footer
Position *1
Header
Position *1
Footer
Position *1
Telephone Line
Settings *1
Dialing
Method *1
Receive
Mode *1
Number of RX
Call Rings *1
Number of
Redials *1
Redial
interval *1
Line Monitor
Sound *1
Line Monitor
Sound Volume *1
TX/RX
Setting *1
Duplex Print
(RX) *1
Inch Paper Pri-
ority Over A4 *1
Print Paper
Selection *1
Print Paper
Size *1
154
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
Fax Setting
*1
TX/RX
Setting *1
Incorrect User
Box No. Entry *1
173 215
Tray Selection
for RX Print *1
Min. Reduction
for RX Print *1
Print Separate
Fax Pages *1
File After Poll-
ing TX *1
Function
Setting *1
Function ON/
OFF Setting *1
F Code
TX *1
Memory
RX *1
Closed Net-
work RX *1
Forward TX
Setting *1
Confidential
RX Password
Check *1
PC-Fax RX
Setting *1
PBX CN
Set *1
TSI User Box
Setting *1
Report
Settings *1
Activity
Report *1
TX Report *1
Sequential TX
Report *1
Timer Reserva-
tion TX
Report *1
Report
Settings *1
Confidential
RX Report *1
Bulletin TX
Report *1
155
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Administrator
Setting
Fax Setting
*1
Report
Settings *1
Broadcast Result
Report *1
173 215
Paper Tray for
Reports *1
Job Settings
List *1
TX Result
Report Check *1
System
Connection
IS OpenAPI
Setting
Access
Setting
222
Security Set-
ting
Administra-
tor Password
Port No.
223
User Box
Admin. Setting
SSL *2
Administrator
Security Level
Authentication
Security
Details
Password
Rules
Manual Desti-
nation Input
Print Data
Capture
HDD Setting
Check HDD
Capacity
Delete Unused
User Box
Delete Secure
Print
Documents
Overwrite All
Data
HDD Lock
Password
Check
Consumable Life
Meter Count Details Print
Toner
Coverage
156
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Meter Count Details Copy
Print
Scan/Fax
Other
157
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.3 Utility Mode function setting procedure
8.3.1 Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility mode screen will appear.
8.3.2 Exiting
Touch the [Close] key.
8.3.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions
Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value.
Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value.
(To change the setting value, first press the Clear key before making an entry.)
4037F3E522DA
158
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.4 One-Touch Registration
8.4.1 Scan
A. Address Book
(1) E-Mail
(2) FTP
(3) SMB
(4) User Box
B. Group
C. Program
Functions
To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
A new address can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.
Functions
To register/change FTP address to send scanned data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the
hard disk in the main unit.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address.
Functions
To register/change a group to send scanned data simultaneously.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any displayed group to check, edit or delete them.
At least one address must be registered for registering a new group.
Functions
To register/change the Scan Program.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any program No. to check, edit, or delete the setting.
159
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. Subject/Text (for E-mail)
(1) Subject
(2) Text
8.4.2 Fax
Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted.
A. Address Book
(1) Abbr. Dial
(2) E-Mail
(3) User Box
Functions
To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any displayed address to detail check, edit or delete the setting.
The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen
and pressing [Set as Default].
Functions
To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting.
The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and
pressing [Set as Default].
Functions
To register/change the Fax numbers.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register/change the e-mail address when transmitting the Fax data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register/change the Box address when storing the Fax original in the box of the
hard disk in the machine.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
At least one user box should be registered in order to register the Box address.
160
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Group
C. Program
D. Subject/Text (for E-mail)
(1) Subject
(2) Text
8.4.3 User Box
A. Public/Personal User Box
B. Bulletin Board User Box
Functions
To register/change a group of addresses to send Fax data simultaneously.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
A new group can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed group to check, edit or delete the setting.
At least one address should be registered in order to register the group.
Functions
To register/change the Fax program.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any program No. to check, edit or delete the setting.
Functions
To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the Fax original.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
A new subject can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit or delete the setting.
Functions
To register the e-mail message when transmitting the Fax original.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
A new message can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting.
The subject can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and
Functions To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine.
Use Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use.
Setting/
Procedure
A new box can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed box to change or delete it.
Functions
To register/change the Bulletin Board User Box.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
A new box can be registered by touching [New].
Select any displayed box to change or delete it.
161
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.5 User Setting
8.5.1 System Setting
A. Language Selection
B. Measurement Unit Setting
C. Paper Tray Setting
(1) Auto Tray Select Setting
(2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF
(3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting
Functions To select the language on the LCD display.
Use To change the language on the control panel to another language.
Setting/
Procedure
The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area]
available from [System 1] under Service Mode.
Functions To select the unit displayed on the LCD display.
Use To change the unit displayed on the control panel.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting varies depending on the marketing area
mm (Numerical Value) inch (Numerical Value) inch (Fraction)
Functions To set the Tray for automatic selection when APS is being set.
To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set.
Use To specify the Tray to be used when APS is being set.
To establish the priority of the Tray when ATS is being set.
Setting/
Procedure
Select the Tray on the [Auto Tray Select] screen.
Set the priority on the [Tray Priority] screen.
Functions To set whether to automatically switch to another Tray with same size paper when the
Paper Feed Tray runs out of paper during printing.
Use To switch the Paper Feed Tray automatically.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Restrict.
Allow Restrict
Functions To set whether to switch to another Tray automatically when the specified Tray runs
out of paper during printing.
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) : It stops printing when the specified Tray runs out of
paper.
Switch Trays (Tray Priority): To switch to another Tray with the specified paper and
print when the Tray is out of paper
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Stop Printing (Tray Fixed).
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Switch Trays (Tray Priority)
162
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Print Lists
D. Reset Setting
(1) System Auto Reset
(2) Auto Reset
(3) Job Reset
<When Account is changed>
<When Original is set on ADF>
Functions
To set the Paper Feed Tray for output the list for the Meter count or the Unit check.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Tray 1.
Functions To set the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning.
Use To change the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning.
Setting/
Procedure
<Priority Mode>
To set the functions displayed during System Auto Reset from Copier, Scanner, and
the Fax.
The default setting is Copy.
Copy Scan Fax
<System Auto Reset Time>
The default setting is 1 min.
1 min. (1 to 9, OFF)
Functions To set the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning in Copier, Scanner,
and the Fax.
Use To change the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning.
Setting/
Procedure
1 min. (1 to 9, OFF)
Functions To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the
Key Counter is unplugged, a magnetic card is pulled out, User Authentication/Volume
Track is set.
Use To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed
through the use of a data management device.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Reset.
Reset Do Not Reset
Functions To set whether to set the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to
ADF.
Use To reset the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Do Not Reset.
Reset Do Not Reset
163
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<When NEXT JOB is selected: Staple Setting>
<When NEXT JOB is selected: Original Set / Bind Direction>
<When NEXT JOB is selected: Reset Data After Job>
E. Auto Color Level Adjustment
8.5.2 Display Setting
A. Sub Screen Display ON/OFF
Functions
To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the Staple setting job started and
the next job setting has become available.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is OFF.
ON OFF
Functions
To set whether to cancel the Original Set/Bind direction when the job (which original
set/bind direction is set) started and the next job setting has become available.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting Fax when the scan-
ning is finished or Fax is transmitted, making the next job setting available.
(The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected.)
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is ON.
ON OFF
Functions To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-and-
white original in the Auto Color mode
Use To change the criterion level for the partly colored image to be taken as a black-and-
white original
Setting/
Procedure
Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3.
Black Standard Full Color
1 2 3 4 5
Functions To set the Sub Screen Display on the control panel.
Use To change the Sub Screen Display.
Setting Value : An illustration of the selected key will be displayed
Job List : The list of job which are being executed will be displayed
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Setting Value.
Setting Value Job List
164
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing
(1) Default Tab
(2) Program Default
(3) Address Book Default Index
(4) Address Type Symbol Display
C. Fax Basic Screen Default Setting
(1) Default Tab
(2) Default Program
Functions To set the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode.
Use To change the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Program.
Program Group Address Book Direct Input
Functions To set the default display for the program screen during Scanner mode.
Use To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during
scanner mode
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is PAGE 1.
Temporary One-Touch/ PAGE1 to PAGE27
Functions To set the default display for the Address Book screen during Scanner mode.
Use To keep the default display instead of search string on the Address Book which fre-
quently changes during Scanner mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Main.
Main /ABC to WXYZ / etc
Functions To set whether to display the Address Type Symbol on each address key when
selecting the address to transmit scanned data.
Use To cancel displaying the Address Type Symbol on the address key.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the basic screen display during Fax mode.
Use To change the basic screen display during Fax mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Program.
Program Group Address Book Direct Input
Functions To set the default display for the program screen during Fax mode.
Use To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during
Fax mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is PAGE 1.
Temporary One-Touch / PAGE1 to PAGE27
165
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(3) Address Book Default Index
(4) Address Type Symbol Display
(5) No. of Characters for Dest. Display
D. Copy Screen
(1) Copy Operating Screen
E. Fax Active Screen
(1) TX Display
Functions To set the default display for abbreviation/address screen during Fax mode.
Use To keep the default display instead of abbreviations/address search string which fre-
quently changes during Fax mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Main.
Main / ABC to WXYZ / etc
Functions To set whether to display the Address Type symbol on each address key when
selecting the address to transmit Fax.
Use To cancel displaying the Address Type symbol on each address key.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the number of characters for the address displayed on the address key when
selecting the address to transmit Fax.
Use To display the whole address which consists of over fifteen characters.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 14 char.
14 char. 24 char.
Functions To set the display on the control panel screen during printing.
Use To display the screen to indicate printing when printing is being carried out.
ON : The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The job can be
reserved with [Program Next Job].
OFF: The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. The normal Copy
setting screen will be displayed. The copy reservation is available.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting Fax.
Use To display [Sending] on the screen when transmitting Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
166
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) RX Display
8.5.3 Initial Setting
8.5.4 Copier Setting
A. Auto Paper Select for Small Original
Functions To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving Fax.
Use To display [Receiving] on the screen when receiving the Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To register the default setting for the Copy mode function, the Scanner mode func-
tion, and the Fax mode function.
* The machine is initialized at the following timings:
The Main Power Switch is turned ON.
Panel is reset.
In an Interrupt mode.
Auto Reset
The password entry screen for account Track is changed.
Use To change the Initial mode setting to meet the user's need.
Setting/
Procedure
<Current Setting>
To register the Copy mode, scanner mode, or Fax mode set on the panel.
Carry out this setting after the necessary setting for each mode.
<Factory Default>
Mode set prior to the shipping.
The corresponding setting will be the one which has been set prior to the shipping by
carrying out this setting from each mode screen.
Functions To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small, or no original is
being set.
Use To copy the original such as business cards with which the Original detection is not
effective.
Copy on Small Size : Copies on A5 paper.
Copy on A4/Letter : Copies on A4 or Letter size paper.
Prohibit Copy : Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected.
Paper Feed Tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the
Start key.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Prohibit Copy.
Copy on Small Size Copy on A4/Letter Prohibit Copy
167
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple
C. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
D. Sort/Group Auto Change
E. Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)
F. Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)
G. Specify Default Tray when APS Off
Functions To set whether to set the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected.
Use To cancel setting the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto Select Booklet.
Auto Select Booklet OFF
Functions To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is
selected during Auto Paper Select.
Use To cancel selecting the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is
selected during Auto Paper Select.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio.
Auto Display Zoom Ratio OFF
Functions To set whether to automatically switch Sort/Group according to the number of origi-
nals and the copies.
Use To cancel the function to automatically sort two originals or more when they are set to
ADF.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with
document set on the Original Glass (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode.)
Use To function the Auto Magnification when the Tray is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with
document set on the ADF (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode.)
Use To function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
Use To set the Tray for the initial setting when APS is cancelled.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Tray (Tray 1) Before APS OFF.
Tray Before APS ON Default Tray
168
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
H. Select Tray for Insert Sheet
I. Print Jobs During Copy Operation
8.5.5 Scanner Setting
A. JPEG Compression Level
B. Black Compression Level
C. TWAIN Lock Time
Functions
To select the default setting of the Tray for Cover sheet paper.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set whether to accept the printing job for Print data or Fax data during copy opera-
tion.
Use To refuse Print data or Fax data during copy operation.
Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data to print.
Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is fin-
ished.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Accept.
Accept Receive Only
Functions To set the JPEG Compression method when scanning with JPEG while in Scanner
mode.
Use To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning.
High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while
scanning.
Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while
scanning.
High Compression: Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lower-
ing the data volume while scanning.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Standard.
High Quality Standard High Compression
Functions To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode
while in Scanner mode.
Use To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is MMR.
MH MMR
Functions
To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 120 sec.
120 sec. (30 to 300 sec.)
169
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.5.6 Printer Setting
A. Basic Setting
(1) PDL Setting
(2) Number of Sets
(3) Original Direction
(4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP
(5) A4/A3 LTR/LGR Auto Switch
Functions To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing.
Use To fix the PDL as necessary. It usually switches automatically.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto.
Auto PCL PS
Functions To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC
printing.
Use To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 1.
1 (1 to 999)
Functions
To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Portrait.
Portrait Landscape
Functions
To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during Rip
process of the current job.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter size paper, and A3 and Ledger size
paper in reading.
Use To output Letter size document to A4 size, and Ledger size document to A3 size.
To output A4 size document to Letter size, and A3 size document to Ledger size.
NOTE
When switching the size, the image will be printed in the same magnification.
The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
170
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Paper Setting
(1) Paper Tray
(2) Default Paper Size
(3) 2-Sided Print
(4) Bind Direction
(5) Staple
Functions To set the Paper Feed Tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC print-
ing.
Use To use when Paper Feed Tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing
from Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing.
Use To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing
Functions To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the
printer driver.
Use To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing
by Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer
driver during PC printing.
Use To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing
by Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Left Bind.
Top Bind Left Bind Right Bind
Functions To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC
printing.
Use To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows
DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
1 Position 2 Positions OFF
171
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(6) Hole-Punch
C. PCL Setting
(1) Typeface
(2) Symbol Set
(3) Font Size
(4) Line/Page
Functions To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver
during PC printing.
Use To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows
DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
Use To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows
DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Courier.
Functions To set the Font Symbol Set when not specified by the printer driver during PC print-
ing.
Use To use when the Font Symbol Set cannot be specified by the printer driver during
printing from Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Roman-8 or PC8, Code Page 437.
Functions To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
Use To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing
To set Scalable Font (: Point) and Bitmap Font (: Pitch) respectively.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is
Scalable Font : 12.00 points
Bitmap Font : 10.00 pitch
Functions To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
Use To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 60 or 64 lines.
60 or 64 lines (5 to 128)
172
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(5) CR/LF Mapping
D. PS Setting
(1) PS Error Print
E. Print Reports
Functions To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Use To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Mode 1 : Replacing CR with CR-LF
Mode 2 : Replacing LF with CR-LF
Mode 3 : Replacing with CR-LF
OFF : Does not replace
Setting/
Procedure
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 OFF
Functions To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS
rasterizing.
Use To print the information concerning the PostScript error.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To output the report or Demo Page concerning the print setting.
Use To check the setting concerning the printer.
The types of report available for output are as follows.
Configuration Page : The list of printer setting will be output.
Demo Page : The test page will be output.
PCL Font List : PCL Font List will be output.
PS Font List : PS Font List will be output.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [User Setting] [Printer Setting] [Print Reports].
2. Select the report to be output.
3. Select the Paper Feed Tray and press the Start key.
173
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.6 Administrator Setting
The Administrator setting will be available by entering the administrator password (8 dig-
its) set by the administrator setting or Service Mode.
(The administrator password is initially set to 12345678.)
8.6.1 System Setting
A. Power Save
(1) Low Power Mode Setting
(2) Sleep Mode Setting
(3) Power Save Key
(4) Entering Power Save Mode (Fax)
Functions To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
Low Power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
Use To change the time until Low Power starts.
Setting/
Procedure
Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.
15 min. (10 to 240)
Functions To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has
been completed.
Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for Control.
OFF will only be displayed when No Sleep in Service Mode is set.
Use To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts.
NOTE
The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF.
Setting/
Procedure
Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.
30 min. (15 to 240) / OFF
Functions To set the type of the Power Save Mode which starts by pressing the Power Save
Key.
Use To change the Power Save function which starts by pressing the Power Save key.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Low Power.
Low Power Sleep
Functions To set whether to immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of
receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode.
Use To immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the
Fax during Power Save Mode.
Normal : Switches to the Power Save Mode according to the normal Power
Save Mode after the printing.
Immediately : Switches to the Power Save Mode immediately after the printing.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Normal.
Normal Immediately
174
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Output Setting
(1) Print/Fax Output Settings
(2) Exit Tray Setting
C. Date/Time Setting
D. Daylight Saving Time Setting
E. Weekly Timer Setting
(1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
Functions To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or Fax received.
Use Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received
Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received
Setting/
Procedure
<Printer>
The default setting is Page Print.
<Fax>
The default setting is Batch Print.
Functions To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print
Reports).
* This setting is available only when FS-501 is mounted.
Use To change the output tray according to the application.
Setting/
Procedure
The default settings are as follows.
Copy : 2 (Exit tray 2)
Print : 2 (Exit tray 2)
Fax : 3 (Exit tray 3)
Reports : 3 (Exit tray 3)
Functions To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock.
Use To change settings concerning the date/time.
This setting should be carried out for set up.
Setting/
Procedure
For time zone, set the time difference with the world standard time.
Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes)
Functions To set whether to set the daylight saving time.
To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time.
Use To set the daylight saving time.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When setting to ON, set the time difference to move up.
60 min. (1 to 150)
Functions To set whether to use or not to use the Weekly Timer.
Use To set the Weekly Timer.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
175
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Time Setting
(3) Date Setting
(4) Select Time for Power Save
(5) Password for Non-Business Hours
F. Restrict User Access
(1) Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs
Functions
To set the time to turn ON/OFF the Weekly Timer for each day of the week.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the key of the day to be set.
2. Using the 10-Key Pad, input the ON time and the OFF time.
3. For cancelling the setting, press [Clear].
Functions
To select the date or the day of the week for the Weekly Timer to function.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-] keys.
2. For setting by the date, touch the appropriate key of the day.
3. For setting by the day of the week, touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily
Setting].
4. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted, and touch [OK].
Functions To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the Weekly Timer is set and the power is
ON.
Use To turn power OFF for a certain period of time when the Weekly Timer is set.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
<Set Time for Power Save>
Using the 10-Key Pad, input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.
Functions To set whether to input the password before using when the Weekly Timer is set.
Use To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the Weekly Timer is
set.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When setting to ON, enter the password (eight digits).
Functions To set the prohibition for modifying the registered Copy program.
Use To be used when prohibiting the user from changing the Copy program.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the key for the appropriate Copy program.
2. Touch [OK].
176
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Delete Saved Program Jobs
(3) Restrict Access to Job Settings
<Changing Job Priority>
<Deleting Other Users Jobs>
<Registering and Changing Addresses>
<Changing Zoom Ratio>
G. Expert Adjustment
(1) AE Level Adjustment
Functions To delete the registered Program Job.
Use To delete the registered Program Job.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the appropriate Program Job.
2. Touch [Delete].
3. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen to delete the Program Job.
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the Job.
Use To Restrict the change on the print priority for the Job.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Allow.
Allow Restrict
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict Job delete by other users when the user is authen-
ticated.
Use To allow other users to delete the Job when the user is authenticated.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address.
Use To prohibit the change on the registered address.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification.
Use To prohibit the change on registered magnification.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the
more emphasized the background will be.
Use To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value
To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value
Setting/
Procedure
2 (0 to 4)
177
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Printer Adjustment
<Leading Edge Adjustment>
Functions To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper
types in Tray 1.
Use The PH Unit has been replaced.
The paper type has been changed.
The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction.
A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
Adjustment
Specification
Width A on the test pattern produced should
fall within the following range.
Specifications: 4.2 0.5 mm
Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm
(in 0.2 mm increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the cur-
rent one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the cur-
rent one.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Leading
Edge Adjustment].
3. Select the [Normal].
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check
again.
10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11.Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.
4036fs3009c0
Width A
178
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Centering>
Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
A paper feed unit has been added.
The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction.
Adjustment
Specification
Adjustment
Instructions
rent one.
rent one.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Center-
ing].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
again.
11.Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)
4036fs3010c0
Width A
179
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)>
Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the
2-Sided mode.
Use To use when the optional Automatic Duplex Unit AD-503 is set up.
The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
Adjustment
Specification
For measurement, use the image produced
on the backside of the test pattern.
Adjustment
Instructions
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the
current one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the
current one.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Centering
(Duplex 2nd Side)].
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy.
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray.)
4036fs3010c0
Width A
Backside
180
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Media Adjustment>
<Erase Leading Edge>
(3) Finisher Adjustment
For details of adjustment method, see FS-603 Service Manual.
<Center Staple Position>
<Half-Fold Position>
Functions Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for
each paper type.
This function is provided to open [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment] [2nd Transfer
Adjust] of Service Mode up to Administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected in
the Service Mode setting.
Use To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment
Specification
0 (-5 to +5)
Adjustment
Instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image):
increase the setting value in + direction.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image):
increase the setting value in - direction.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Expert Adjustment] [Printer Adjustment] [Media
Adjustment].
3. Select the side of the image (Front side or Back side), on which the transfer failure at
the trailing edge occurs.
4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge.
5. Enter the new setting from the [+/-].
6. Touch [OK] to validate the adjustment value.
7. Check the copy image for any image problem.
Functions To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
Use To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 4 mm.
4 mm 5 mm 7 mm
Functions To adjust the positions of center staple for the Finisher.
Use Use when the center staple positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies
made using the Staple function.
Adjustment
Specification
Center staple position:
The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.0 mm (in 1-mm increments).
Functions To adjust the positions of folding for the Finisher.
Use Use when the center folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies
made using the Fold function.
Adjustment
Specification
Fold position:
181
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Density Adjustment
<Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black>
<Black Image Density>
(5) Image Stabilization
<Image Stabilization Only>
Functions To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans-
parencies.
Use To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP
transparencies
Adjustment
Range
Lighter (5 steps), Std, Darker (5 steps)
Adjustment
Instructions
Light color: Touch the Darker key.
Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.
Adjustment
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [Thick
Paper Image Density-Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black].
3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density.
Functions To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy
Use To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy
Adjustment
Range
Adjustment
Instructions
If the black is light, touch the Darker key.
If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Density Adjustment] [Black
Image Density].
3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density.
Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of
image stabilization control.
Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe-
cuted.
When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Image Stabilization] [Image
Stabilization Only].
3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.
The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence.
4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green.
182
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Initialize+Image Stabilization>
Functions To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili-
zation control has been initialized.
cuted.
Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Image Stabiliza-
tion has been executed.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Image Stabilization]
[Initialize+Image Stabilization].
183
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(6) Color Registration Adjust
<Color Registration Adjust (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)>
Functions To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain
or thick paper.
Use To correct any color shift
Adjustment
Range
0 (-6 to +6 dot)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting.
If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Color Registration Adjust].
3. Load Tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2x11 Normal paper.
5. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line
of each color at positions X and Y.
6. Select the color to be adjusted.
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the
line of the selected color moves.)
8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.
Check Procedure
4036fs3004c0
4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0
4036fs3007c0 4036fs3008c0
If the cross deviates in the direction of C,
increase the setting.
If the cross deviates in the direction of D,
decrease the setting.
Check point X, Y
Adjustment for X direction:
Check point X
Adjustment for Y direction:
Check point Y
Direction of C Direction of D
Direction of C
Direction of D
184
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(7) Gradation Adjustment
Functions To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced
and the readings taken by the Scanner
Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
The IU has been replaced.
The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced.
The Adj. Values of Max. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen repre-
sent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value
shows the difference from the ideal image density.
The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image.
Printer (Gradation) : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of
the image as it adjusts.
Printer (Resolution) : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance
of letters and lines as it adjusts.
Copy : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of
images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts.
Adjustment
Specification
Max: 0 100
Highlight: 0 60
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Gradation Adjustment].
3. Select the appropriate mode for the Gradation Adjustment.
5. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass.
6. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover.
7. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
8. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times).
9. Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color
(C, M, Y and K) for Max and Highlight.
10.Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value.
Max: 0 100 and Highlight: 0 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.
If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform
steps from 2 to 6.
If a fault is detected, 0 is displayed for all values. In this case, turn OFF and ON the
Main Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again.
If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max
Density.
If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the spec-
ified range, check the image.
If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
185
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(8) Scanner Adjustment
Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section.
If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
A: Centering
B: Leading Edge Adjustment
C: Horizontal Adjustment
D: Vertical Adjustment
<Leading Edge Adjustment>
COLOR CHART
Y M C
CM CY YM
Color is hue,
lightness is value,
saturation is chroma:
this is the world of color.
Hue
&!
/
&/N//
Z1/|0@74,
P2
P2
The quality of color which can be
described by words such as red,
yellow, blue etc.
@,#,__I,11E)
1!}|7,
Value
described by words such as light,
dark etc., relating the color to a gray
of a similar lightness.
Chroma
described by words such as vivid,
dull etc., describing the extent to
which a color differs from a gray
having the same value.
h (heu)
Q}|||7,n
__I,II!0
n7,
0_I|I]J||7
!0}MA7
7,
(a|ue)
|Q|\I])I,!\n
0}7j|}]MA7
7, C (Chroma)
P1
1.0
1.1
1.25 1.4 1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2 2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
Y M C
CM CY YM
1.0
1.1
1.25 1.4 1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2 2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^l
O\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO
\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\T^HT\OlT^lO\
COLOR CHART
Y
M
C
B
G
R
MODEL :
MACHINE S/N :
DATE : / / C %RH
COUNTER :
COPY DENSITY :
COLOR BALANCE Y :
M :
C :
BK :
OTHERS :
P1
10
B
K
CHART NO. : CTC-008-01
PART NO. : 4036-7940-01
Printed In Japan
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4038F3C517DA
Original Reference
A
B
C
D
Functions To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen-
sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start
position in the main scan direction.
Use When the Original Glass is replaced.
When the Original Width Scale is replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
B width on the color chart and one on the
copy sample are measured and adjusted so
that the difference of B width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
An adjustment must have been completed
correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the
Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
B: 0.5 mm
Setting Range
-5.0 to +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Leading
Edge Adjustment].
3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with
the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a copy.
5. Check point B on the image of the copy.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]
key.
7. Press the Start key to make another copy.
8. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
4036fs3020c0
B
186
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Centering>
Functions To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy
by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
Use When the CCD Unit is replaced.
When the Original Glass is replaced.
The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
A width on the color chart and one on the
that the difference of A width satisfies the
correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the
Printer Adjustment.
Specifications
A: 1.0 mm
Setting Range
Adjustment
Instructions
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Center-
ing].
the scale.
5. Check point A on the image of the copy.
key.
8. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.
4036fs3019c0
A
187
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Horizontal Adjustment>
Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use The CCD Unit has been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
Measure C width on the color chart and on
the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be
within the following specification.
Specifications
C: 1.0 mm
Setting Range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Horizon-
tal Adjustment].
the scale.
5. Check the C width on the image of the copy.
key.
4038F3C516DA
C
188
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Vertical Adjustment>
(9) ADF Adjustment
<Centering>
Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use The Scanner Assy has been replaced.
The Scanner Motor has been replaced.
The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
Measure D width on the color chart and on
Specifications
D: 1.5 mm
Setting Range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert Adjustment] [Scanner Adjustment] [Vertical
Adjustment].
the scale.
5. Check the D width on the image of the copy.
key.
4038F3C518DA
D
Functions To make a manual adjustment of the document centering position in each of the ADF
modes.
Use To use when the Centering Auto Adjustment cannot make adjustment completely.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Setting to the
screen.
2. Touch [System Setting] [Expert
Adjustment] [ADF Adjustment]
[Centering].
3. Enter the numeric value using the
[+] / [-] key.
Adjustment range: -3 mm to +3 mm
To read the image in direction A, use [-]
key.
To read the image in direction B, use [+]
key.
4. Press [OK].
4038F3C502DA
189
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Original Stop Position>
<Centering Auto Adjustment>
Functions To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in
each of the ADF modes.
Use To use when the Auto Adj. of Stop Position cannot make adjustment completely.
Setting/
Procedure
screen.
[Original Stop Position].
3. Select either Front side or Back side.
4. Enter the numeric value using the
[+] / [-] key.
Adjustment range: -7 mm to +7 mm
To read the image in direction C, use [-]
key.
To read the image in direction D, use [+]
key.
5. Press [OK].
4038F3C503DA
Functions Adjust the start position for image scanning
Use Upon setup of the ADF
Setting/
Procedure
screen.
[Centering Auto Adjustment].
3. Set the furnished Chart on the Original
Feed Tray (the side with arrow faces up)
and press the Start key.
4. Make sure that adjustment result is [OK]
and press [SET].
*If adjustment result is [NG],
Check the document position and cor-
rect it.
Make a manual adjustment on [Center-
ing].
4038F3C504DA
190
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Auto Adj. of Stop Position: Front>
<Auto Adj. of Stop Position: Back>
H. List/Counter
(1) Management List
Functions Adjust the document stop position for the first side.
Check for skew.
Setting/
Procedure
screen.
[Auto Adj. of Stop Position: Front].
Feed Tray (the side with arrow faces up)
and press the Start key.
and press [SET].
rect it.
Make a manual adjustment on [Original
Stop Position].
4038F3C504DA
Functions Adjust the document stop position for the second side.
Setting/
Procedure
screen.
[Auto Adj. of Stop Position: Back].
Feed Tray (blank side faces up) and
press the Start key.
and press [SET].
rect it.
Make a manual adjustment on [Original
Stop Position].
4038F3C504DA
Functions
To output the value set by the setting menu.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Job Settings List].
2. Select the Paper Feed tray and press the Start key.
191
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Paper Size/Type Counter
I. Standard Size Setting
(1) Original Glass Original Size Detect
(2) Foolscap Size Setting
8.6.2 Administrator/Machine Setting
A. Administrator Registration
B. Input Machine Address
8.6.3 One-Touch Registration
A. Scan
(1) Address Book
<E-Mail>
Functions
To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type, and to set
the count.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys.
2. Select the paper type.
3. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size.
Functions To change the document size detection table.
Use Use to change the setting for the document size detection table.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Table1.
Table1 Table2
Functions To set the size for Foolscap paper.
Use Upon setup.
To change the size for Foolscap paper.
Setting/
Procedure
Select the size from among the following five.
220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13
Functions
To register the information on Administrator and the From address for e-mail trans-
mission.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Name], [E-Mail Address] to input them.
2. Using the 10-Key Pad, enter the Extension No.
Functions To register the name of the Machine and E-mail address.
Use Machine Name : When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of
document registered in Box is generated automatically, it is added.
E-Mail : Not Used.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Machine Name] and input the name.
Functions
To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new address.
Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.
192
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<FTP>
<SMB>
<User Box>
(2) Group
(3) Program
(4) Subject/Text (for E-mail)
<Subject>
Functions
To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register or change the Box address for storing the scanned data to the Box in the
hard disk of the Machine.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
At least one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address.
Functions
To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simulta-
neously.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new group.
elect any displayed group to check, edit, or delete the setting.
At least one address must be registered in order to register the group.
Functions
To register or change the Scan Program.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any program No. to check, edit or delete the setting.
Functions
To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new subject.
Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting.
193
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Text>
B. Fax
(1) Address Book
<Addr. Dial>
<E-Mail>
<User Box>
(2) Group
(3) Program
Functions
To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new message.
Functions
To register or change the Fax number for transmitting the Fax.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register or change the e-mail address for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions
To register or change the Box address in the hard disk of the machine when storing
the Fax data in the Box.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
At least one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address.
Functions
To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit the Fax data
simultaneously.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any displayed group to check, edit, or delete the setting.
At least one address of the group must be registered in order to register the group.
Functions
To register or change the Fax Program.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Select any Program No, to check, edit, or delete the setting.
194
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Subject/Text (for E-mail)
<Subject>
<Text>
C. User Box
(1) Public/Personal User Box
(2) Bulletin Board User Box
D. One-Touch Registration List
(1) Address Book List
(2) Group List
Functions
To register the e-mail Subject for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new subject.
Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting.
Functions
To register the e-mail message for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new message.
Functions To register or change the Box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine.
Use To register the shared or personal box for any purpose.
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new box.
Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
Functions
To register or change the Bulletin Board User Box.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [New] to register the new box.
Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.
Functions To output the Address Book List.
Use To print the list of abbreviated addresses which are registered.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the Destination Type to be output.
2. Specify the Registration No. range to be output.
3. Touch [Print], and select the Paper Feed Tray.
4. Press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.
Functions To output the Group List.
Use To print out the list of addresses of the group which are registered.
Setting/
Procedure
3. Press the Start key to output the list of the addresses of the group.
195
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(3) Program List
(4) E-Mail Subject/Text List
8.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track
A. General Settings
(1) User Authentication
(2) Public User Access
(3) Account Track
Functions To output the Program List.
Use To print out the list of the Program addresses which are registered.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the Destination Type to be output.
4. Press the Start key, and output the list of Program.
Functions To output the Subject or the Text list.
Use To print out the E-mail Subject/Text List which are registered.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the Paper Feed Tray.
2. Press the Start key to output the Subject/Text List.
Functions To set the User Authentication method.
Use To select whether to authenticate the user by the External Server or MFP.
Setting/
Procedure
OFF ON (External Server) ON (MFP)
Functions
To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when
User authentication has been set.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Restrict Allow
NOTE
This setting is not available without User Authentication.
Functions To set whether to enable the Account Track function or not.
Use To enable the Account Track function.
Setting/
Procedure
OFF ON
196
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Account Track Input Method
(5) When # of Jobs Reach Maximum
(6) Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
(7) # of Counters Assigned for Users
Functions To set the Authentication method for the Account Track.
Use To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Account Name & Password.
Account Name & Password Password Only
NOTE
This setting is not available without the Account Track.
Password Only setting is not available with the User Authentication.
Functions To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job, or to stop the
machine, when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the
User Authentication and the Account Track.
Use To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by
the User authentication and the Account Track.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Skip Job.
Skip Job Stop Job
Functions To set whether to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track.
Use To be used when not to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Synchronize.
Synchronize Do not synchronize
NOTE
The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication and
Account Track.
Functions To set the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account reg-
istration.
Use To change the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account
registration.
Setting/
Procedure
The total number to be registered for the User Authentication and Account Track is
1000. The number for the User registration will be set.
When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50, the number available for
Account Track will be 950.
NOTE
The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication and
Account Track.
197
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. User Authentication Setting
The settings are available only when carrying out the User Authentication.
(1) Administrative Setting
<User Name List>
<Default Function Permission>
(2) User Registration
(3) User Counter
Functions To set whether to display or not the list key for User names on User Authentication
screen.
Use To display the list key for User names on User Authentication screen
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the default value for the Function Permission in User Authentication by the
External Server.
Use To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the
user by the External Server.
Items available for setting: Copy operation, Scan operation, Fax operation, and print-
ing, and User Box operation
Setting/
Procedure
The default settings are Allow.
Allow Restrict
Functions To register or change the user.
Use To register, change or delete the user for authentication.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the user.
2. Input the [User Name], [User Password], and [E-Mail address].
NOTE
The setting is not available when carrying out the external server authentica-
tion.
3. Set the [Output Permission], [Max Allowance Set], and [Function Permission], and
touch [OK].
Functions To display the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each user.
Use To check the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each user.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the user.
2. Select the key to check to see the status of use.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
198
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. Account Track Setting
The settings are available only when carrying out the Account Track.
(1) Account Track Registration
(2) Account Track Counter
D. Print without Authentication
E. Counter List
8.6.5 Network Setting
A. TCP/IP Setting
(1) TCP/IP Setting
Functions To register and change the Account.
Use To register, change or delete the account for Account Track.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the proper Account.
2. Input the [Account Name] and the [Password].
3. Set the [Output Permission], and [Max. Allowance Set], and touch [OK].
Functions To display the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each account.
Use To check the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each account.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the account.
2. Select the key for the item to be checked.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified.
Use To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To print out the User counter and the account counter.
Use To output the user counter and account counter to be checked.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Counter List].
2. Select the Paper Feed Tray.
NOTE
The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication or
Account Track.
Functions To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP setting.
Use To disable TCP/IP setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on
again more than 10 seconds after.
199
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) IP Address
(3) Subnet Mask
(4) Default Gateway
(5) DHCP Setting
(6) Priority DNS Server
(7) Substitute 1/2 DNS Server
Functions To set the IP address of the device used in the network.
Use To enter the IP address of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Functions To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network.
Use To enter the subnet mask of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Functions To set the gateway address of the device used in the network.
Use To enter the gateway address of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Functions To set DHCP for the network.
Use To use DHCP.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Priority DNS Server.
Use To enter Priority DNS Server.
Setting/
Procedure
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Functions To set the Substitute DNS Server.
Use To enter the Substitute DNS Server.
Setting/
Procedure
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
200
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(8) IP Filtering
(9) RAW Port No.
(10) DNS Host Name
(11) DNS Domain Name
B. NetWare Setting
(1) NetWare Setting
Functions To set the IP Filtering.
Use To set whether to receive IP address within the specified range of the value.
Setting/
Procedure
<Permit Access>
1. Select Enable or Disable on [Permit Access].
2. Select range Set 1 to Set 5, and input address using the 10-Key Pad.
3. Touch [OK].
<Deny Access>
1. Touch [Deny Access].
2. Select Enable or Disable on [Deny Access].
3. Select range Set 1 to Set 5, and enter address using the 10-Key Pad.
4. Touch [OK].
Functions To set the RAW port No.
Use To set the RAW port number for the printer.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the necessary port number.
2. Select to use or not to use.
3. When using the selected port, press the Clear key to clear the value, and enter the
RAW port number using the 10-Key Pad.
4. Touch [OK].
Functions To set the DNS Host name.
Use To enter the DNS Host name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [DNS Host Name].
2. Enter the DNS Host name on the screen key board, and touch [OK].
Functions To set the DNS Domain name.
Use To enter the DNS Domain name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [DNS Domain Name].
2. Enter the DNS Domain name using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [OK].
Functions To enable or disable the NetWare setting.
Use To use NetWare setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
201
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Ethernet Frame Type
(3) Operating Mode
(4) Status
(5) Print Server Name/Print Server Password
(6) Polling Interval
(7) NDS/Bindery Setting
Functions To set the Ethernet Frame Type.
Use To specify the Frame type for transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto Detect.
Auto Detect 802.2 802.3 Ethernet II 802.2SNAP
Functions To set the Operation Mode.
Use To change the Operation Mode.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is PServer.
PServer Nprinter/Rprinter
Functions To display NetWare status.
Use To check NetWare status.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Status].
2. Touch UP/Down arrow keys to select the server to check.
3. Check the NetWare status.
Functions To set the Print server name and Print server password.
Use To enter the print server name or the print server password.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password].
2. Enter the Print server name or the Print server password (up to 63 characters) using
the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Functions To set the Polling interval.
Use To set the interval to search the print queue.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the Polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the Bindery setting when using NetWare4.X
model and after.
Use To enable the Bindery service.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is NDS.
NDS NDS&Bindery
202
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(8) File Server Name
(9) NDS Context Name
(10) NDS Tree Name
(11) Printer Name
(12) Printer Number
C. IPP Setting
(1) IPP Setting
Functions To set the File server name.
Use To set the Full server name for the print server to logon.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [File Server Name].
2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
Functions To set the NDS Context name.
Use To set the NDS Context name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Context name].
2. Enter the NDS Context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
Functions To set the NDS Tree name.
Use To set the NDS Tree name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Tree Name].
2. Enter the NDS Tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
Functions To set the Printer Name.
Use To set the Printer Name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the Printer Name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
Functions To set the Printer number.
Use To set the Printer number.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display.
3. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set whether to enable or disable IPP setting.
Use To disable IPP setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
203
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Accept IPP job
(3) Support Operation
(4) Printer Information
D. FTP Setting
(1) Proxy Server Address
(2) Proxy Port Number
(3) Port No.
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job.
Use To restrict the IPP job
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Operation support information.
Use For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Support Operation].
2. Set ON or OFF for each item.
Functions To set the Printer information.
Use To set the Printer information.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the Printer Name, Printer Location, and Printer Information on the on-screen
keyboard.
3. Touch [Print URI] to check the Printer URI information.
Functions To set the Proxy server address.
Use To enter the Proxy server address.
Setting/
Procedure
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [IP Address Input] to enter the IP Address.
3. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the Host name.
Functions To set the Proxy server port number.
Use To enter the Proxy server port number.
Setting/
Procedure
Press the Clear key.
Enter the Proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server.
Use To enter the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the Proxy Server Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad.
204
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Connection Timeout
(5) FTP Client
(6) FTP Server
E. SMB Setting
(1) Scan Setting
(2) Print Setting
(3) NetBIOS Name
Functions To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server.
Use To change the timeout period for connecting.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set whether to use Scan to FTP (FTP transmission) or not.
Use Not to use Scan to FTP (FTP transmission).
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to use FTP server or not.
Use Not to use FTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to use SMB or not in Scan mode (Scan to PC).
Use Not to use SMB in Scan mode (Scan to PC).
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to use SMB port or not in Printer mode.
Use Not to use SMB port in Printer mode.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set NetBIOS name.
Use To set NetBIOS name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [NetBIOS Name].
2. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
205
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Print Service Name
(5) Workgroup
F. AppleTalk Setting
(1) AppleTalk Setting
(2) Printer Name
(3) Zone Name
(4) Current Zone
Functions To set the Print service name.
Use To set the Print service name.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Print Service Name].
2. Enter the Print Service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
Functions To set the Workgroup.
Use To set the Workgroup.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Workgroup].
2. Enter the Workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting.
Use To use AppleTalk setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network.
Use To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the Printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
Functions To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network.
Use To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Zone Name].
2. Enter the Zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
Functions To display the current zone on AppleTalk network.
Use To check the current zone on the AppleTalk network.
206
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
G. LDAP Setting
(1) Enabling LDAP
<LDAP Function>
<Max. Search Results>
<Timeout>
<Initial Setting for Search Details>
(2) Setting Up LDAP
<Server Address>
<Search Base>
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function.
Use To use LDAP function.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Max. results of address for LDAP search.
Use To change the Max. results of address for LDAP search.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Max. Search Results].
3. Enter the Max. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the Max. timeout period for LDAP search.
Use To change the Max. timeout period for LDAP search.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Timeout].
3. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search.
Use To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details].
2. Touch the key about condition for each search item, and select the condition.
Functions To set the LDAP server address.
Use To enter LDAP server address.
Setting/
Procedure
IP Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Functions To set the Directory Path for LDAP server.
Use To enter the Directory Path for LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Search Base].
2. Enter the Search Base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
207
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Enable SSL>
<Port No.>
<General Settings>
<Login Name>
<Password>
Functions To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.
Use To use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the LDAP server port number.
Use To enter the LDAP server port number.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad.
Functions To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.
Use To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.
anonymous : User name and password are not necessary
Simple : Simple method which needs the user name and the password
Digest-MD5 : Method available with normal LDAP server. When failing to
authenticate with Digest-MD5, it automatically switches to
CRAM-MD5.
GSS-SPNEGO : Method available with Window's Active Directory (Kerberos
authentication).
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is anonymous.
anonymous Simple Digest-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO
Functions To set the Logon name to connect to LDAP server.
Use To set the logon name to connect to LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
NOTE
The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous.
Functions To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.
Use To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
Touch [Password].
Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
208
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Domain Name>
<Dynamic Authentication>
<Reset All Settings>
H. E-Mail Setting
(1) E-Mail TX (SMTP)
<E-Mail TX Setting>
<SMTP Server Address>
Functions To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server.
Use To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[OK].
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the Dynamic Authentication.
Use To enable the Dynamic Authentication.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Disable.
Enable Disable
NOTE
Functions
To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the
shipping.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Reset All Settings].
2. Check the message and touch [Yes].
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the E-mail transmission setting.
Use To disable the E-mail transmission setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the SMTP server address.
Use To enter the SMTP server address.
Setting/
Procedure
SMP Server Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter IP Address.
3. Select [Host Name Input], and enter the host name.
209
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Binary Division>
<Divided Mail Size>
<Connection Timeout>
<Server Capacity>
<Detail Setting: Port No.>
<Detail Setting: Authentication Setting>
Functions To set whether to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted
Use Not to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the dividing size when carrying out the Binary division for data to be transmit-
ted.
Use To change the dividing size of the data.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 (in 100 increments) using the
10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the Timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.
Use To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
Select the timeout period using [+] / [-] keys.
60 sec. (30 to 300, in 30 sec. increments)
Functions To set the Max. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.
Use To change the Max. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is No Limit.
No Limit (1 to 100)
Functions To set the Port number for transmission with SMTP server.
Use To enter the port number for transmission with SMTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server.
Use To change the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
OFF POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication
When selecting SMTP Authentication, enter the User ID, the password, and the
Domain name.
210
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
<Detail Setting: POP Before SMTP Time>
(2) E-Mail RX (POP)
<E-Mail RX Setting>
<POP Server Address>
<Detail Setting: APOP Authentication>
<Detail Setting: Port No.>
<Detail Setting: Connection Timeout>
Functions To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication.
Use To change the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
3. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting.
Use To disable the e-mail reception setting.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the POP Server Address.
Use To enter the POP Server Address.
Setting/
Procedure
SMTP Server Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address.
3. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the host name, and touch [OK].
4. Enter the Login Name (Up to 63 characters).
5. Enter the password (Up to 15 characters).
Functions To set whether to use APOP Authentication
Use To use APOP Authentication
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Port No. for transmitting with POP server.
Use To enter the Port No. for transmitting with POP server.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Enter the Port No. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.
Use To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.
Setting/
Procedure
Select the timeout period of connection using +30/-30 keys.
30 sec. (30 to 300, in 30 sec. increments)
211
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
I. Detail Setting
(1) Device Setting
<MAC Address>
<Network Speed>
(2) Time Adjustment Setting
<NTP Setting>
<NTP Server Address>
<Port No.>
Functions To display the MAC address of the machine.
Use To check the MAC address of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
The address cannot be changed.
Functions To set the Network speed.
Use To set the specific network speed.
Setting/
Procedure
Auto 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex
100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex
NOTE
When Network speed setting is changed, turn off the Main Power Switch and
turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
Functions To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting.
Use To synchronize the time between the server and the client.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the NTP server address.
Use To enter the NTP server address.
Setting/
Procedure
IP Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address.
3. Select [Host name Input], and enter the Host name.
Functions To set the Port No. for transmitting with NTP server.
Use To enter the Port No. for transmitting with NTP server.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Enter the Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
212
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(3) Status Notification Setting
<Notification Address Setting>
<Notification Item Setting>
<Notification Time Setting>
(4) PING Confirmation
(5) PSWC Setting
(6) SLP Setting
Functions To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition.
Use To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [E-mail Address Edit].
2. Enter the E-mail Address (up to 320 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [OK].
Functions To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail.
Use To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select the item to be notified and touch [ON].
2. Touch [OK].
Functions To set the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail.
Use To change the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Enter the time for notifying between 1 and 10 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING.
Use To check the condition of TCP/IP network.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission.
2. Select [IP Address Input] to enter IP address.
3. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the host name.
4. Touch [Check Connection] key to check the connection.
Functions To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection.
Use Not to use the PageScope Web Connection.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Enable.
Enable Disable
Functions To set whether to use SLP or not.
Use Not to use SLP (Service Location Protocol).
Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP Enable.
Setting/
Procedure
Enable Disable
213
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(7) LPD Setting
(8) SNMP Setting
(9) Prefix/Suffix Setting
<ON/OFF Setting>
<Prefix/Suffix Setting>
8.6.6 Copier Setting
A. Auto Zoom (Platen)
Functions To set whether to use LPD during printing or not.
Use Not to use LPD during printing.
Setting/
Procedure
Enable Disable
Functions To set whether to use SNMP or not.
Use Not to use SNMP.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Read Community name: Enter the Read Community name.
Write Community Name: Enter the Write Community Name.
Functions To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an
address.
Use To add Prefix or Suffix to the address.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To register or change the Prefix or Suffix.
Eight types of Prefix and Suffix can be added.
Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (Header part)
Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (Footer part)
Use To register or change the address displayed for Prefix or Suffix.
Setting/
Procedure
Available number to be registered as Prefix is up to 20 characters.
Available number to be registered as Suffix is up to 64 characters.
Functions To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected with document
set on the Original Glass (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode.)
Use To function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
214
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Auto Zoom (ADF)
C. Select Tray when APS OFF
D. Select Tray for Insert Sheet
E. Print Jobs During Copy Operation
8.6.7 Printer Setting
A. Local I/F Timeout
B. Parallel I/F
Functions To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected with docu-
ment set on the ADF (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode.)
Use To function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
Use To set the Tray (Tray 1) for the default setting when cancelling APS.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Tray Before APS ON.
Tray Before APS ON Default Tray
Functions
To select the initial value for the Tray for the Cover sheet paper.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set whether to receive printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy opera-
tion.
Use To restrict receiving printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation.
Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data and print
Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is
finished
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Accept.
Accept Receive Only
Functions To set the time until Timeout of communication input / output.
Use To set longer time when Timeout occurs according to the network condition.
Setting/
Procedure
Settings have to be done separately for IEEE1284, USB, and Network.
Each default setting is 60 sec.
60 sec (10 to 1000)
Functions To set the two-way communication method for Parallel interface.
Use To change the two-way communication method for Parallel interface.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is ECP.
Compatible Nibble ECP
215
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. IEEE 1284/USB
8.6.8 Fax Setting
A. Header Information
B. Header/Footer Position
(1) Header Position
(2) Footer Position
C. Telephone Line Settings
(1) Dialing Method
Functions To set the interface to be used when mounting the Local I/F kit.
Use To be used when using the Parallel interface.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is USB.
IEEE1284 USB
Functions To register the name of the sender and Fax ID which will be printed when transmitting
Fax.
Use To register or change the name of the sender and Fax ID
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Sender Name] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the
on-screen keyboard.
Functions To set the position to print the header when transmitting Fax.
Use To change the position to print the Header.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Outside Body Text.
Inside Body Text Outside Body Text OFF
Functions To set whether to print the Footer when transmitting Fax.
Use To print the Footer when transmitting Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
Inside Body Text Outside Body Text OFF
Functions To set the Dialing method.
Use To change the dialing method.
The displays are different depending on the country.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is PB.
PB 10 pps
NOTE
216
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Receive Mode
(3) Number of RX Call Rings
(4) Number of Redials
(5) Redial Interval
(6) Line Monitor Sound
(7) Line Monitor Sound Volume
Functions To set the Fax reception mode.
Use To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function, etc. when
connected to the external telephone.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto RX.
Auto RX Manual RX
Functions To set the number of times to receive call rings.
Use To change the number of times of the fake RingBack tone after it starts calling until it
starts receiving.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 2 X.
2 X (0 to 15)
Functions To set the number of redials.
Use To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc.
The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.
Setting/
Procedure
NOTE
The default setting is different depending on the country.
Functions To set the interval for redialing.
Use To change the interval for redialing.
Setting/
Procedure
3 min (1 to 15)
Functions
To set whether to output the Line monitor sound from the speaker or not.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the volume of the speaker.
Use To change the volume of the speaker.
Setting/
Procedure
Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher].
217
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. TX/RX Setting
(1) Duplex Print (RX)
(2) Inch Paper Priority Over A4
(3) Print Paper Selection
(4) Print Paper Size
(5) Incorrect User Box No. Entry
Functions To set whether to carry out the Duplex print for the received original when receiving
Fax.
Use To carry out the Duplex print for the received original.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set weather to use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax.
Use To use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
The default setting is different depending on the country.
Functions To set the priority for Paper Feed Tray when receiving Fax.
Use To change the priority for Paper Feed Tray when receiving Fax.
Auto select : Selected automatically
Priority Size : Printed on size with priority. When the size is not set, it will be
printed on the closest Size.
Fixed Size : Printed only on the fixed size.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Auto Select.
Auto Select Fixed Size Priority Size
Functions To set the paper size to print the text when receiving Fax.
Use To change the paper size for printing the received text.
To make the setting of [Print Paper Size] enable, set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to
[Auto].
Setting/
Procedure
The initial setting is A4.
A3 B4 A4
NOTE
Functions To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered.
Use To change the operation when the unregistered box number is entered.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Print.
Print Show Error Message Auto Create User Box
218
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(6) Tray Selection for RX Print
(7) Min. Reduction for RX Print
(8) Print Separate Fax Pages
(9) File After Polling TX
E. Function Setting
(1) Function ON/OFF Setting
<F Code TX>
Functions To select the Paper Tray to be fixed when printing the received text.
Use To fix the Paper tray when printing the received text.
Setting/
Procedure
Items available for selection are different depending on the Paper feed option
mounted.
Auto Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
Functions To set the print magnification for received text.
Use To change the print magnification for received text.
Setting/
Procedure
96 (87 to 96, x1.0)
Functions To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard
size.
Use To divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to delete the original which Polling transmission has been completed.
Use For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Delete.
Delete Save
Functions To set whether to use the F Code transmission.
Use To cancel the F Code transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on
again more than 10 seconds after.
219
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(2) Memory RX
(3) Closed Network RX
(4) Forward TX Setting
(5) Confidential RX Password Check
(6) PC-Fax RX Setting
Functions To set whether to use the forced memory RX function.
Use To store the received text in the hard disk without printing, and print it out when
ordered.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to [ON].
Functions To set whether to use the closed network function.
Use To receive data only from the device which password matches.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When set to [ON], enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.
Functions To set whether to use the Forward Fax function.
Use To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified.
Forward & Print : Forward the received text, and print all out
Forward & Print (If TX Fails) : Forward the received text, and prints out only when
fails to be forwarded
Setting/
Procedure
OFF Forward & Print Forward & Print (If TX Fails)
When set to [ON], set the address to forward to.
Functions
To check the password set in the confidential box.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function.
Use To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When set to [ON], specify the address to store the file.
220
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(7) TSI User Box Setting
F. PBX CN Set
G. Report Settings
(1) Activity Report
(2) TX Report
(3) Sequential TX Report
(4) Timer Reservation TX Report
Functions To set whether to use TSI distribution or not.
Use To use TSI distribution.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When set to [ON], set the reception box to receive data
Functions To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not.
Use This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When set to [ON], enter the external number between 0 and 9999.
Functions To set whether to print out the Activity Report or not, and also the timing for printing.
Use To print out the Activity Report.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Every 100 Comm.
OFF Daily Every 100 Comm. 100/ Daily
Functions To set whether to print out the TX Report, and also the timing for printing.
Use To print out the TX Report.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is If TX Fails.
ON If TX Fails OFF
Functions To set whether to print out the Sequential TX Report or not.
Use To print out the Sequential TX Report.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not.
Use To print out the reservation TX.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
221
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(5) Confidential RX Report
(6) Bulletin TX Report
(7) Broadcast Result Report
(8) Paper Tray for Reports
(9) TX Result Report Check
H. Job Settings List
Functions To set whether to print out the Confidential RX Report.
Use To print out the Confidential RX Report.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to print out the Bulletin TX Report or not.
Use To print out the Bulletin TX Report.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set the format to output the Broadcast Result Report.
Use To print out the Broadcast Result Report
All Dest. : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses
1 Dest. at a time : Outputs a report after each transmission
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is All Dest.
All Dest. 1 Dest. at a time
Functions
To set the Paper Feed Tray to output reports.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Items available to be selected are different depending on Paper feed option mounted.
Bypass Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
Functions To set whether to display the TX Result Report screen.
Use To display the TX Result Report screen.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions
The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Setting] [Fax Setting] [Job Settings List].
2. Select the Paper Feed Tray and press the Start key.
222
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.6.9 System Connection
A. IS OpenAPI Setting
(1) Access Setting
(2) Port No.
(3) SSL
(4) Authentication
B. Admin. transmission
Functions To allow or restrict the access from other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page
Scope Data Administrator.
Use To restrict access from other systems with IS OpenAPI.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To set the access port for other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope
Data Administrator.
Use To change the access port number for other systems with IS OpenAPI.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select Port No. or Port Number (SSL), and touch [Input].
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad.
Functions To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page
Scope Data Administrator.
Use To encrypt access by SSL from other systems using IS OpenAPI.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
To use SSL, the certification needs to be issued at PageScope Web Connec-
tion before hand.
Functions To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when
using PageScope Data Administrator.
Use To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
When setting to [ON], enter the Login Name and the Password to be set.
Functions
To call the CS Remote Care Center from the Administrator, When the CS Remote
Care setup is complete.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
For details, see page 250 CS Remote Care.
223
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.6.10 Security Setting
A. Administrator Password
B. User Box Admin. Setting
C. Administrator Security Level
Functions To set/change the Administrator Password.
Use To change the Administrator Password.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter the Administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.
Current Password : Enter the current Administrator password
New Password : Enter the new Administrator password to be used
Re-Input Password : Reenter the new Administrator password
NOTE
When selecting Utility [Administrator Setting] [Security Setting] [Secu-
rity Details] leads to [Password Rules] being ON, the password with the same
letters, the password which is same as the previous one and the password of
less than eight digits cannot be changed.
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the Box Administrator to use the system.
Use To allow the Box Administrator to use the system.
The Box Administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse
contents in Common Box / Individual Box without the password.
NOTE
[Allow] cannot be set when the User Authentication or Account Track is not
carried out.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
* The password is input when setting it to Allow.
Functions To set the level for Administrator setting item open to the user.
Use To make part of the Administrator setting items open to the user.
Level 1 : [Power Save Setting], [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)], [Auto
Magnification Selection (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off],
and [Select Tray for Insert Sheet] are available to users.
Level 2 :[Power Save Setting], [Output Setting], [Date/Time Setting], [Daylight
Savings Time Setting], [AE Level Adjustment], [Auto Magnification
Selection (Platen)], [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)], [Specify
Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert Sheet], and [Print
Jobs During Copy Operation] are available to users.
Prohibit : Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Prohibit.
Level 1 Level 2 Prohibit
224
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. Security Details
(1) Password Rules
(2) Manual Destination Input
(3) Print Data Capture
E. HDD Setting
(1) Check HDD Capacity
(2) Delete Unused User Box
Functions To set whether to apply the Password rules.
Use To apply the password rule to enhance security.
Passwords to be covered: Password for CE, Administrator, Box user authentication,
Fax confidential print, Classified document, User authenti-
cation, and Box transmission
Details of the Password Rules:
Password except User password, Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of
one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive)
User password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensi-
tive)
Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
Password with only the same letter is prohibited.
Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited.
When the password rule is set to [ON], the password cannot be changed or registered
unless it follows the above conditions.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the
Destination Input screen.
Use To prohibit entering the destination address manually.
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the Print Job Data.
Use To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] [System 2] [Data capture].
Setting/
Procedure
Allow Restrict
Functions To display the used space capacity, total space capacity, and the remaining capacity
of the hard disk.
Use To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk
Functions
To delete the unnecessary box without data.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.
225
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(3) Delete Secure Documents
(4) Overwrite All Data
(5) HDD Lock Password
Functions
To delete the whole classified documents in the hard disk.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.
Functions To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting.
Use To be used when disposing the Hard disk.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Overwrite All Data].
2. Touch [Overwrite].
3. Touch the [Yes] key on the Check screen.
4. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after.
Functions To set the Lock Password for the hard disk.
Use To enter, change or delete the Lock Password for the hard disk.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [HDD Lock Password].
2. Enter the password (20 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
3. Re-enter the password to confirm.
4. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after.
9. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
226
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
9. Adjustment item list
Replacement Part/Service Job
Adjustment/Setting Items
No
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

P
a
p
e
r

F
e
e
d

R
o
l
l
e
r
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

P
a
p
e
r

S
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n

R
o
l
l
e
r

A
s
s
y
C
h
a
n
g
e

P
a
p
e
r

(
T
r
a
y

1
)

K
i
n
d
C
h
a
n
g
e

M
a
r
k
e
t
i
n
g

A
r
e
a
I
n
s
t
a
l
l

P
a
p
e
r

F
e
e
d

U
n
i
t
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

C
C
D

U
n
i
t
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

M
i
r
r
o
r

U
n
i
t
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

I
U
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

I
m
a
g
e

T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

B
e
l
t

U
n
i
t
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

M
o
d
e
Machine
Printer
Area
Print Positioning: Leading Edge 1
Print Positioning: Side Edge 2
Dup Print Positioning: Side 3
Scan
Area
Image position: Leading Edge 4
Image position: Side Edge 5 (4)
Cross Direction Adjustment 6 (3)
Feed Direction Adjustment 7 (3)
Org. Detecting Sensor Adj. 8
Touch Panel Adjust 9
State
Confir-
mation
Memory/
HDD Adjust
HDD R/W Check 10
HDD Format 11
Table Number 12
Firmware Version 13
System1,
2
Reentry of Setting Values 14
Serial Number 15
Scan Calibration 16 (1)
Line Mag Setting 17 (2)
Counter Life Counter Clear 18
Image Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust 19
Re-entry of Utility settings 20
Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings 21
Parallel adjustment of Scanner/Mirrors Carriage 22 (1)
Positioning Exposure Unit 23 (2)
Scanner Motor belt adjustment 24
PH skew adjustment 25
F/W upgrading 26
Installation of Original Size Sensor 27
Remounting of Parameter Chip (Control Board) 28
Remounting of NVRAM (MFP Control Board) 29
Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit 30
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Adjustment item list
227
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has
been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated
by the corresponding number in the parentheses.
No
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

S
i
z
e

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
n
g

S
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

P
H

U
n
i
t
W
i
n
d

S
c
a
n
n
e
r

D
r
i
v
e

C
a
b
l
e
s
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

S
c
a
n
n
e
r

M
o
t
o
r
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

S
c
a
n
n
e
r

A
s
s
y
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

S
c
a
n
n
e
r

H
o
m
e

S
e
n
s
o
r
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
o
a
r
d
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

M
F
P

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
o
a
r
d
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

I
m
a
g
e

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

B
o
a
r
d
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

G
l
a
s
s
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

I
D
C
/
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
/
1
,
2
R
e
p
l
a
c
e

H
a
r
d

D
i
s
k
A
d
d

K
e
y

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

/

D
-
1
0
3
E
x
e
c
u
t
e

M
e
m
o
r
y

C
l
e
a
r
E
x
e
c
u
t
e

A
d
d
.

O
p
t
i
o
n
E
x
e
c
u
t
e

F
/
W

u
p
d
a
t
e
A
d
d

F
A
X

B
o
a
r
d
1 (2)
2 (3)
3
4 (2)
5 (1)
6
7 (4) (2) (2)
8 (3)
9 (6)
10 (2)
11 (1)
12 (2) (2)
13
14 (4)
15 (3)
16
17
18
19
20 (1)
21 (5)
22 (2)
23 (3) (1)
24 (1) (1)
25 (1)
26 (2) (2)
27 (1)
28 (1)
29 (1)
30
10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
228
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10. Service Mode
10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure
NOTE
Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures. They
should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service
jobs.
A. Procedure
2. Touch [Details] on Meter Count display.
3. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop 0 0 Stop 0 1
NOTES
When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Ser-
vice Mode, authentication by CE password is necessary.
Enter the 8 digits CE password, and touch [END].
(The initial setting for CE password is 92729272.)
If a wrong CE password is entered, re-enter the right password. The machine will
not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly. To return to
the Basic screen, turn OFF the Sub Power Switch and turn it ON again.
The service code entered is displayed as .
4. The Service Mode menu will appear.
NOTE
Be sure to change the CE Password from its default value.
For the procedure to change the CE Password, see the Enhanced Security.
296
B. Exiting
Touch the [Exit] key.
C. Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions
Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value.
Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press
the Clear key before making an entry.)
4037F3E502DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 10. Service Mode
229
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.2 Service Mode function tree
The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
*1: Settings are available only when the Optional FAX Kit (FK-502) is mounted.
Service Mode
Machine Fusing Temperature
233
Fusing Transport Speed Print Positioning: Leading Edge
Org. Size Detecting
Sensor Adj.
Print Positioning: Side Edge
Printer Area Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge
Scan Area Image Position: Leading Edge
Image Position: Side Edge
Printer Resist Loop Cross Direction Adjustment
Feed Direction Adjustment
Color Registration
Adjustment
Cyan
Fusing Loop Size Magenta
Manual Bypass Tray
Adjustment
Yellow
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
Firmware Version
243
Imaging Process
Adjustment
Gradation Adjust
244
D Max Density
Background Voltage Margin
Transfer Output Fine
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Thick Paper Density
Adjustment
TCR Toner Supply
Monochrome Density
Adjustment
Dev. Bias Choice
CS Remote Care
250
230
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
System 1 Marketing Area
265
Tel/Fax Number
Serial Number
No Sleep
Foolscap Size Setting
Original Size Detection
Install Date
Initialization
System 2 HDD
267
Image Controller Setting
Option Board Status
Consumable Life Reminder
Unit Change
Software Switch Setting
Scan Calibration
LCT Paper Size Setting
Line Mag Setting
Data Capture
Counter Life
274
Jam
Service Call Counter
Warning
Maintenance
Service Total
Counter Of Each Mode
Service Call History (Data)
ADF Paper Pages
Paper Jam History
Fax Connection Error
Counter Reset
231
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
List Output
277
State Confirmation Sensor Check
278
Table Number
Level History1
Level History2
Temp. & Humidity
CCD Check
Memory/HDD Adj.
Memory/HDD State
Color Regist
IU Lot No.
Adjustment Data List
Test Mode Gradation Pattern
291
Halftone Pattern
Lattice Pattern
Solid Pattern
Color Sample
8 Color Solid Pattern
Running Mode
Fax Test
ADF Original Stop Position
294
Registration Loop Adj.
Auto Stop Position
Adjustment
Paper Passage
Sensor Check
Original Tray Width
Sensor Auto Adjust
FAX *1 Modem/ECU *1
294
NetWork *1
System *1
232
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.3 Date/Time Input mode
This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.
10.3.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen
A. Date & Time Setting mode setting procedure
Stop 1 1 4 4 Clear
3. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key Pad.
(Year 4 digits Month 2 digits Day 2 digits Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits)
NOTE
When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter 0 first if the data one digit.
4. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry].
5. Touch [END] to return to the Service Mode.
FAX *1 Fax File Format *1
294
Communication *1
List Output *1
Function Parameter *1
Initialization *1
Finisher
295
4038F3E510DA
233
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4 Machine
10.4.1 Fusing Temperature
Functions To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure
Roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under
changing environmental conditions.
Use When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of
paper is changed or environmental conditions change.
By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print or OHP transparencies can be
improved.
By setting the temperature lower (-), Exit Roller mark or uneven transparencies of
OHP can be reduced.
Adjustment
Range
Heating Roller : 0 C to +10 C (step: 5 C) ............ Thick 3
:-10 C to +10 C (step: 5 C) ............ others
Pressure Roller : 0 C to +10 C (step: 5 C) ............ Thick 3
:-10 C to +10 C (step: 5 C) ............ others
Adjustment
Instructions
If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.
If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.
If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Fusing Temperature].
3. Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type.
4. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] key.
5. The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change.
Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps.
NOTE
As a general rule, do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure appli-
cation side.
6. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
8. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.
234
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4.2 Fusing Transport Speed
10.4.3 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.
Functions To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with
transport speed.
Use Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con-
ditions or degraded durability.
Variable
Range
-2 % to +2 % (in 0.1 % increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.
If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Fusing Transport Speed].
3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred.
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
Transport speed Paper Setting
110 mm/s Plain paper: monochrome/color
55 mm/s
Thick paper, OHP film, Envelope, Postcard,
Labels: monochrome, color
Functions To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor.
To display if the Original Size Detecting Sensor/2 is mounted.
Use When the sensor is replaced with a new one.
When an optional sensor has been added.
When an erroneous original size detection is made.
When the marketing area setting is changed.
Adjustment
Instructions
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure.
If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional Original Size
Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Orig-
inal Cover.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.].
235
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4.4 Printer Area
A. Print Positioning: Leading Edge
Functions To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper
types in Tray 1.
The paper type has been changed.
The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction.
A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
Adjustment
Specification
Adjustment
Instructions
rent one.
rent one.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Print Positioning: Leading Edge].
3. Select the [Plain Paper].
again.
10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
11.Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1 to 3, OHP Film, and Enve.
4036fs3009c0
Width A
236
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Print Positioning: Side Edge
Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
A paper feed unit has been added.
The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction.
Adjustment
Specification
Adjustment
Instructions
rent one.
rent one.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Print Positioning: Side Edge].
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)
4036fs3010c0
Width A
237
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge
Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the
2-Sided mode.
Use The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.
Adjustment
Specification
For measurement, use the image produced
on the backside of the test pattern.
Adjustment
Instructions
If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the
current one.
If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the
current one.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [Machine] [Printer Area] [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge].
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy.
again.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray.)
4036fs3010c0
Width A
Backside
238
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4.5 Scan Area
Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section.
If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
A: Image Position: Side Edge
B: Image Position: Leading Edge
C: Cross Direction Adjustment
D: Feed Direction Adjustment
A. Image Position: Leading Edge
COLOR CHART
Y M C
CM CY YM
Color is hue,
lightness is value,
saturation is chroma:
this is the world of color.
Hue
&!
/
&/N//
Z1/|0@74,
P2
P2
described by words such as red,
yellow, blue etc.
@,#,__I,11E)
1!}|7,
Value
described by words such as light,
dark etc., relating the color to a gray
of a similar lightness.
Chroma
described by words such as vivid,
dull etc., describing the extent to
which a color differs from a gray
having the same value.
h (heu)
Q}|||7,n
__I,II!0
n7,
0_I|I]J||7
!0}MA7
7,
(a|ue)
|Q|\I])I,!\n
0}7j|}]MA7
7, C (Chroma)
P1
1.0
1.1
1.25 1.4 1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2 2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
Y M C
CM CY YM
1.0
1.1
1.25 1.4 1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2 2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
COLOR CHART
Y
M
C
B
G
R
MODEL :
MACHINE S/N :
DATE : / / C %RH
COUNTER :
COPY DENSITY :
COLOR BALANCE Y :
M :
C :
BK :
OTHERS :
P1
10
B
K
CHART NO. : CTC-008-01
PART NO. : 4036-7940-01
Printed In Japan
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4038F3C517DA
Original Reference
A
B
C
D
Functions To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen-
sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start
position in the main scan direction.
Use When the Original Glass is replaced.
When the Original Width Scale is replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
B width on the color chart and one on the
that the difference of B width satisfies the
correctly of [Print Positioning: Leading Edge]
of Printer Area.
Specifications
B: 0.5 mm
(10 0.5 mm if a scale is used)
Setting Range
Adjustment
Instructions
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Image Position: Leading
Edge].
the scale.
5. Check point B on the image of the copy.
6. If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the
[+] / [-] key.
4036fs3020c0
B
239
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Image Position: Side Edge
Functions To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy
by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
Use When the CCD Unit is replaced.
When the Original Glass is replaced.
The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
A width on the color chart and one on the
that the difference of A width satisfies the
correctly of [Print Positioning: Side Edge] of
Printer Area.
Specifications
A: 1.0 mm
Setting Range
Adjustment
Instructions
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Image Position: Side
Edge].
the scale.
5. Check point A on the image of the copy.
key.
8. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.
4036fs3019c0
A
240
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. Cross Direction Adjustment
Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use The CCD Unit has been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
Measure C width on the color chart and on
correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj. of
Printer Area.
Specifications
C: 1.0 mm
Setting Range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Cross Direction Adjust-
ment].
the scale.
5. Check the C width on the image of the copy.
key.
4038F3C516DA
C
241
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. Feed Direction Adjustment
10.4.6 Printer Resist Loop
Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use The Scanner Assy has been replaced.
The Scanner Motor has been replaced.
The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.
Adjustment
Specification
Measure D width on the color chart and on
correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj. of
Printer Area.
Specifications
D: 1.5 mm
Setting Range
0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting.
If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Scan Area] [Feed Direction Adjust-
ment].
the scale.
5. Check the D width on the image of the copy.
key.
4038F3C518DA
D
Functions To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of Tray 1
to Tray 4, Bypass, and Duplex.
To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Registration Rollers.
Use Paper Passage for paper passage check.
Use When a paper skew occurs.
When a paper misfeed occurs.
Adjustment
Range
Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds.
<Tray 1 to Tray 4, LCT, Bypass>
110 mm/s : -8 to +8
55 mm/s : -15 to +15
<Duplex>
110 mm/s : -8 to +8
55 mm/s : -8 to +8
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Printer Resist Loop].
3. Select the transport speed.
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
242
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4.7 Color Registration Adjustment
A. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
Functions To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain
or thick paper.
Use To correct any color shift
Adjustment
Range
0 (-6 to +6 dot)
Adjustment
Instructions
If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting.
If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Color Registration Adjustment].
3. Load Tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2x11 Plain paper.
5. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line
of each color at positions X and Y.
7. Using the [+] / [-] key, change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the
line of the selected color moves.)
8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.
Check Procedure
4036fs3004c0
4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0
4036fs3007c0 4036fs3008c0
Check point X, Y
Adjustment for X direction:
Check point X
Adjustment for Y direction:
Check point Y
Direction of C Direction of D
Direction of C
Direction of D
243
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.4.8 Fusing Loop Size
10.4.9 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment
10.4.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
10.5 Firmware Version
Functions To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at
Envelope printing.
Use To be used when paper wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at Envelope printing.
Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processing
Adjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing
Setting/
Procedure
0 (-2 to +2)
Functions To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Manual Bypass Paper Size
Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide
Use Use when the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide has been
changed.
Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual Bypass is used.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment].
3. Touch [Max. Width].
4. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm.
5. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
6. Touch [Min. Width.].
7. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm.
8. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
Make the adjustment again if the results are [NG].
Functions To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
Use To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is 4 mm.
4 mm 5 mm 7 mm
Functions To check the Firmware version.
Use Use when the firmware is upgraded.
When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch [Firmware Version].
3. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version.
244
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.6 Imaging Process Adjustment
10.6.1 Gradation Adjust
Functions To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced
and the readings taken by the Scanner
Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
The IU has been replaced.
The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced.
The Adj. Values of Max. and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen repre-
sent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value
shows the difference from the ideal image density.
The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image.
Gradation Mode : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of
the image as it adjusts.
Resolution Mode : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance
of letters and lines as it adjusts.
High Compression Mode : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of
images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts.
Adjustment
Specification
Max : 0 100
Highlight : 0 60
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Gradation Adjust].
2. Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment.
4. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass.
5. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover.
6. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
7. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times).
8. Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color
(C, M, Y and K) for Max and Highlight.
9. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value.
Max: 0 100 and Highlight: 0 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.
If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform
steps from 2 to 6.
If a fault is detected, 0 is displayed for all values. In that case, after turning off the
Main Power Switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and then make the
Gradation Adjustment again.
If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max
Density.
If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the spec-
ified range, check the image.
If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.
245
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.6.2 D Max Density
Functions To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying
the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjust-
ment of gamma of each color after Gradation Adjust.
Use An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run.
Adjustment
Range
0 (-10 to +10)
Adjustment
Instructions
To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.
To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [D Max Density].
3. Select [COPY] or [Printer].
5. Enter the new setting from the 10-key Pad.
6. Touch [END] to return to the [Process] menu screen.
7. Touch [Stabilizer].
8. Touch [Stabilizer Mode].
9. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
10.Check the copy image for any image problem.
NOTE
If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization
sequence to make valid the new value.
246
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.6.3 Background Voltage Margin
10.6.4 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment
A. 2nd Transfer Adjust
Functions To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an
auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of of each color after Gradation Adjust.
Use Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem
Adjustment
Range
0 (-5 to +5)
Adjustment
Instructions
To make the background level foggier, increase the setting value.
To make the background level less foggy, decrease the setting value.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Background Volt-
age Margin].
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key Pad.
5. Touch [END] to return to the [Image Adjust] menu screen.
6. Touch [Stabilizer].
7. Touch [Stabilization Only].
8. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
NOTE
If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization
sequence to make valid the new value.
Functions Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for
each paper type.
Use To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
Adjustment
Range
0 (-5 to +5)
Adjustment
Instructions
To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image),
decrease the setting value.
To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image),
increase the setting value.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Transfer Output
Fine Adjustment].
3. Select the side of the image (First side or Second side), on which the transfer failure
at the trailing edge occurs.
4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge.
5. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
247
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. 1st Transfer Adjust
10.6.5 Stabilizer
A. Stabilization Only
Functions Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage.
Use To use when white spots appeared.
Adjustment
Range
0 (-5 to +5)
Adjustment
Instructions
Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by;
Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease)
Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value
Setting/
Procedure
2. Select [Test Mode] [Halftone Pattern] to output the red or green test pattern.
292
3. When the test pattern image has white spots, adjust with the following procedure.
4. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Transfer Output
Fine Adjustment].
5. Select [1st transfer Adjust].
6. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] keys.
7. Touch [OK] key to set the adjustment value.
Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while
checking the test pattern.
NOTE
PC Drum memory (94mm pitch) may occur by taking measure to white spots
occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it.
Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting.
The value for the 1st image transfer adjustment will be reset when the new
transfer belt unit is detected. The value will be 0.
Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of
image stabilization control.
cuted.
When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Stabilization Only].
248
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Initialize+Image Stabilization
10.6.6 Thick Paper Density Adjustment
10.6.7 TCR Toner Supply
Functions To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili-
zation control has been initialized.
cuted.
Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode
has been executed.
Use when adjusting the PH skew.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Initialize+Image
Stabilization].
Functions To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans-
parencies.
Use To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP
transparencies
Adjustment
Range
Adjustment
Instructions
Light color: Touch the Darker key.
Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Thick Paper Den-
sity Adjustment].
3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density.
Functions To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID
occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of copies have been made of origi-
nals having a high image density.
Use When there is a drop in T/C.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [TCR Toner Sup-
ply].
3. Select the color, for which supply of toner is to be replenished.
4. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and; if the
density is lower than a reference value, a toner replenishing sequence and then a
developer agitation sequence are run.
5. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density
reaches the reference value. If the toner density is found to be higher than the refer-
ence value, only a developer agitation sequence is carried out.
249
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.6.8 Monochrome Density Adjustment
10.6.9 Dev. Bias Choice
Functions To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy
Use To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy
Adjustment
Range
Adjustment
Instructions
If the black is light, touch the Darker key.
If the black is dark, touch the Lighter key.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Monochrome Den-
sity Adjustment].
3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density.
Functions To change the setting of the developing bias voltage
When this function is turned ON, it decreases the developing bias voltage, thereby
preventing voltage leak from occurring.
Use Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric
pressure, such as in high altitudes.
If ON is set, the screen doesn't display [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjust-
ment] [Gradation Adjust] and the Gradation Adjust is not allowed.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
250
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7 CS Remote Care
10.7.1 Outlines
CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to
exchange data through telephone line in order to control the machine.
CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble
occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the neces-
sary data.
Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
a. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count, PM count.
b. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how
often errors occur.
c. Data on adjustment
d. Data on setting
10.7.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care
NOTE
For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up,
clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting.
For clearing the RAM, see page 259.
When using the telephone line for connection, use the recommended modem.
(For recommended modem, contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.)
Step Procedure
0
Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center.
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
1
Connecting the modem
Turn the power for the modem OFF. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable.
Connect the modem and the wall jack with a modular cable.
* For connecting the modular cable, see the manual for the modem.
2
Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [END].
259
3
Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care] [System Selection], and touch [Modem].
4
Inputting the ID Code
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
258
5
Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad, and touch [Set].
259
6
Setting the Center ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
259
251
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7
Setting the Device ID
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Device ID], and input Device ID (nine digits).
259
8
Setting the telephone number of the Center
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10-Keys Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-] keys.
259
9
Inputting the Device telephone number
2. Touch [Machine Setting] [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-Key Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-] keys.
259
10
Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [AT Command].
3. Input AT Command.
NOTE
Change this Command only when it is necessary. (They do not need to be changed in
normal condition.)
For details on AT Command, see the manual for the modem.
260
11
Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific
connecting condition.
12
Executing the initial transmission
2. Touch [initial transmission] on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the Center, CS Remote Care setting screen will
be displayed.
NOTE
The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only
when the Center ID, the Device ID, Telephone number of the Center and the Device tele-
phone number have been input.
258
Step Procedure
252
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care
NOTE
SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you
changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state.
A. Input procedure
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting], and touch [Software
Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.], and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment], and select SW bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or
1 using the 10-Key Pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the
10-Key Pad or A to F keys.)
4. Touch [Fix].
NOTE
About functions of each switch, see to B. List of software SW for CS Remote
Care.
B. List of software SW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
Do not change any bit not described on this table.
SW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default
SW 01 0 Dial Mode Pulse Tone 1
1 Reservation 0
2 Reservation 0
3 Reservation 0
4 Baud rate *1 *1 0
5 *1 *1 0
6 *1 *1 0
7 *1 *1 1
SW 02 0 Emergency transmission Do not call Call 1
1 Auto call on date specification Do not call Call 1
2 Reservation 0
3 Reservation 0
4 Reservation 0
5 Auto call on the IC Life Do not call Call 1
6
Auto call on CCD Clamp/Gain
Adjustment failure
Do not call Call 1
7 Reservation 0
SW 03 0 Reservation 0
1 Auto call on the toner empty Do not call Call 1
2 Reservation 0
3 Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Do not call Call 1
4 to 7 Reservation 0
SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation 0
253
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
SW 05 0 Modem redial interval *2 *2 1
1 *2 *2 1
2 *2 *2 0
3 *2 *2 0
SW 06 0 Modem redial times *3 *3 0
1 *3 *3 1
2 *3 *3 0
3 *3 *3 1
4 *3 *3 0
5 *3 *3 0
6 *3 *3 0
7 Reservation 0
SW 07 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 Reserved 0
SW 08 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail deliv-
ery error
*4 *4 0
1 *4 *4 1
2 *4 *4 1
3 *4 *4 0
SW 09 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail
delivery error
*5 *5 0
1 *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 Reservation 0
SW 11 0 Timer 1
RING reception CONNECT
reception
*6 *6 0
1 *6 *6 0
2 *6 *6 0
3 *6 *6 0
4 *6 *6 0
5 *6 *6 1
6 *6 *6 0
7 *6 *6 0
254
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
SW 12 0 Timer 2
Dial request completed CONNECT
reception
*7 *7 0
1 *7 *7 0
2 *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 0
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 1
7 *7 *7 0
SW 14 0 Timer 4
Line connection Start request
telegram delivery
*8 *8 0
1 *8 *8 0
2 *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 1
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
SW 15 0 Timer 5
Wait time for other side's response
*9 *9 0
1 *9 *9 1
2 *9 *9 1
3 *9 *9 1
4 *9 *9 1
5 *9 *9 0
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
SW 18
0
Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display
when using the modem but the power
for the modem is OFF.
Do not call Call 1
SW 19 to
SW 40
255
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
*1: Baud rate
*2: Modem redial interval
*3: Modem redial times
*4: Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4
9600 bps 0 1 1 0
19200 bps 0 1 1 1
38400 bps 1 0 0 0
Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0
1 minute 0 0 0 1
2 minutes 0 0 1 0
3 minutes 0 0 1 1
4 minutes 0 1 0 0
5 minutes 0 1 0 1
6 minutes 0 1 1 0
7 minutes 0 1 1 1
8 minutes 1 0 0 0
9 minutes 1 0 0 1
10 minutes 1 0 1 0
Mode 06-6 06-5 06-4 06-3 06-2 06-1 06-0
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
Mode 08-3 08-2 08-1 08-0
0 minute 0 0 0 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
256
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
*5: Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error
*6: Timer 1 (RING reception CONNECT reception)
*7: Timer 2 (Dial request completed CONNECT reception)
*8: Timer 4 (Line connection Start request telegram delivery)
*9: Timer 5 (Wait time for other sides response)
Mode 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
Mode 11-7 11-6 11-5 11-4 11-3 11-2 11-1 11-0
0 to 31 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
32 sec 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 sec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
Mode 12-7 12-6 12-5 12-4 12-3 12-2 12-1 12-0
0 to 63 sec 0000 0000 to 0011 1111
64 sec 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 to 255 sec 0100 0001 to 1111 1111
Mode 14-7 14-6 14-5 14-4 14-3 14-2 14-1 14-0
0 to 31 (x 100 msec) 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
32 (x 100 msec) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 (x 100 msec) 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
Mode 15-7 15-6 15-5 15-4 15-3 15-2 15-1 15-0
0 to 29 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1101
30 sec 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
31 to 255 sec 0001 1111 to 1111 1111
257
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7.4 Setup confirmation
Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set
up.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed.
10.7.5 Calling the Maintenance
When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which
CE can identify. They are controlled by the distributor.) will transmit the information to the
Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is fin-
ished, touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the Center
and tells that it is finished.
A. When starting the Maintenance
1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [ID Code], and input ID Code.
3. Touch [ID Coke].
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.
B. When finishing the Maintenance
1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [Maintenance Complete].
258
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator
When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote
Care center.
1. Select [Administrator Setting], and touch [System Connection].
2. Touch [Admin. transmission].
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the
Admin. transmission key will not be displayed, and the transmission is not available.
NOTE
For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date
and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care Center.
10.7.7 Checking the transmission log
The transmission log list will be output to be checked.
1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail setting].
2. Touch [Communication Log Print].
3. Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4R paper.
4. Press the Start key to output transmission log.
10.7.8 Detail on settings
A. System Selection
B. ID Code
Functions To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
Use Use to newly build or change the system.
Setting/
Procedure
Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax.
Fax is available only when the optional Fax kit is being installed.
E-Mail (Not Used) Modem Fax (Not Used)
Functions To register the Service ID.
Use Use when registering and changing Service ID.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
<Registration>
Touch ID Code and enter the Service ID.
Touch [ID code] to register the ID.
The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.
259
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. Detail Setting
(1) Basic Setting
(2) Date & Time Setting
(3) RAM Clear
Functions Execute the primary setting.
Use Use to change the set contents.
Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center.
Setting/
Procedure
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
Primary Setting
Set the Center ID, Device ID, and the phone No.
When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, E-mail
address of the Center is displayed.
* When entering the phone No, 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following mean-
ings.
[-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing
[*],[#] : To be used as necessary
Initial Transmission
Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care
Center to register the machine.
(Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input.)
Functions To set the data and time-of-day
Use Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
Setting/
Procedure
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
4. Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-
Key Pad.
5. Touch [SET] to start the clock.
Functions To clear the following data at the Center
ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT
Command.
Use To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
To be used for reset the every data of the Center to default.
NOTE
If RAM Clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be
implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether
it is done properly or not.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Unset.
Set Unset
260
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
(4) Communication Log Print
(5) Software Switch Setting
(6) Response Time Out
D. AT Command
E. Server set
Functions To print out the Communication Log.
Use Use to output and use the Communication Log.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Communication Log Print.
4. Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4R or 81/2 x 11 paper.
5. Press Start key to print out the Communication Log.
Functions To change the CS Remote Care settings.
Use To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary.
Setting/
Procedure
For procedures on settings, see 252.
Functions
Not Used. (To be used when connected by E-mail.)
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.
Use To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter the command and touch [SET] to register.
Functions
Not Used.
Use
Setting/
Procedure
261
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code
NOTE
Error codes in the shaded region may occur when transmitting from the machine
to the center.
Error code Error Solution
0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) Transmit again manually.
0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit-
ting (When the transmission completes with
modem initial setting failed)
Check if the power of the
modem is ON.
Check the connecting condition
between the modem and the
main unit.
0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting
(No response to ATD)
Transmit again manually
modem is ON.
main unit.
0004 Timeout of Incoming request response
(No response to incoming (starting) request
MSG)
Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving
(No response to ATA)
modem is ON.
main unit.
0006 Shut down of the data modem line (Host)
(Carrier OFF is detected)
No solution, because the line is
shut down at the host side.
0007 Shut down of the data modem line (Main unit)
(Line is shut down forcibly due to event)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0008 Timeout of start request telegram delivery
(Start request telegram is not delivered after line
connection)
Transmit again manually.
0009 Timeout of finish request telegram delivery
(Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of
shut down).)
Transmit again manually.
000A Receiving rejection
(Receiving is made when the main unit is set to
reject receiving.)
Check the setting condition of
the host side.
Check the setting condition of
the main unit side.
000B RS232C Driver Over Run
(When the modem detects Over Run.)
If the same error is detected
several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000C If the same error is detected several times, turn
the modem power OFF and ON.
power OFF and ON.
000D Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator
(When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI)
Indicator.)
power OFF and ON.
000E Receiving RING Buffer Full
(When the Receiving RING Buffer is full.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
262
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
000F Transmitting RING Buffer Full
(When the Transmitting RING Buffer is full.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0010 RX FIF0 ERROR
(when Read / Write error occurs at RX FIF0)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0011 Baud Rate ERROR
(When selected Baud Rate is out of the specifica-
tion (9600 bps to 38400 bps).)
Check the Baud rate of the
software DipSW.
0012 TX FIF0 Level Error
(When the threshold of the selected TX FIF0 is
not error value (1, 3, 9, 13).)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0013 RX FIF0 Level Error
(When the threshold of the selected RX FIF0 is
not error value (0, 4, 8, 14).)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0014 Receiving Data Over Error
(When the data whose size exceeds the transmit-
ting RING buffer is requested.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0015 Status Error
(During modem operation is being confirmed)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0016 Status Error (During receiving) Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0017 Status Error
(During line is being shut down)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0018 Machine ID has already been registered
(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the
main unit that has already registered Machine
ID.)
Set the initial registrations
again for all including the host
side.
0019 Center ID Error
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the one
of start request telegram.)
Check Center ID setting of the
main unit side.
Check Center ID setting of the
main unit side.
001A Device ID inconsistency
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the one
of start request telegram.)
Check Device ID setting of the
main unit side.
Check the setting of the host
side.
001B Device ID Unregistered
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting,
Emergency call) comes from the main unit that
has not registered Machine ID yet.)
Check Device ID setting of the
main unit side.
Check the setting of the host
side.
001C Grammar Error
(Received response telegram is unregulated for-
mat.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
001D Impossible to change (Unchangeable items)
(Host requests to change the setting of items
which are not allowed to change.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
001E Impossible to change (During printing)
(Setting cannot be changed because the setting
change is made during the machine is printing or
starts printing.)
Try again when the machine is
not printing.
001F Impossible to change (Unread items)
(The host tries to make writing on the items the
current value has not been read.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
263
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
0020 Timeout of Telegram Delivery
(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the
machine fails to receive the telegram in a given
time.)
Try communication again.
0021 Telegram Size Over
(The machine receives the telegram whose size
exceeds the specification.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0022 Transmitting Phase Response NG
(Transmitting phase response MSG is not appro-
priate.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0023 Timeout of Transmitting Phase Response MSG
(Transmitting phase response MSG is timeout.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0024 Event Data Acquisition Function Error
(Although the transmitting phase response MSG
is OK, the function for Data acquisition shows
No event,.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0025 Timeout of Driver transmitting check MSG
(Transmitting check MSG from the driver task is
timeout.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0026 Detection of Internal Contradiction
(Unknown event is detected. Condition value is
not correct or so on.)
KONICA MINOLTA.
0027 Transmission / Receiving collision
(Receiving is detecting during transmitting pro-
cessing)
Try communication again.
264
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care
If communication is not done properly during use of the modem, check the condition by fol-
lowing the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of Initial transmitting / Administrator transmitting / Mainte-
nance Start transmitting / Maintenance Finish transmitting, the communication result
will be displayed at the top of the screen.
* For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its suc-
cess or failure.
Display of
Communication result
Cause Solution
Communicating
Communication trouble
with the Center
Although the machine tries to communi-
cate with the Center, there is any trouble
and the communication completes
unsuccessfully.
See the list of error message
and confirm the corresponding
point.
261
Complete successfully
Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communi-
cate with the Center, there is any trouble
in the modem.
Check if the Power of modem
in ON.
Check if there is any problem in
connection between the
modem and the main unit.
Busy line Although the machine tries to communi-
cate with the Center, the line to the Cen-
ter is busy.
Communicate with the Center
again.
No response Although the machine tries to communi-
cate with the Center, there is no
response from the Center.
Communicate with the Center
again.
Check the communication envi-
ronment of the Center side.
265
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.8 System 1
10.8.1 Marketing Area
10.8.2 Tel/Fax Number
10.8.3 Serial Number
Functions To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according
to the applicable marketing area.
Use Upon setup.
Setting/
Procedure
<Marketing Area>
Select the applicable marketing area and touch [END] to set the marketing area.
JAPAN US Europe
Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4
These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to dif-
ferent marketing area settings:
<Fax Target>
1. Touch the [Fax Target].
2. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-] keys, and touch [END].
Japan English, Japanese
US English, French, Spanish, Japanese
Europe English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Japanese
Others1 English, French, Spanish, Japanese
Others2
English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish Others3
Others4
Functions To enter the TEL/FAX number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch
Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine.
Use Upon setup.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter the Tel/Fax Number (19 digits) from the 10-Key Pad.
Use Interrupt key to enter -.
Functions To register the serial numbers of the machine and options.
The numbers will be printed on the list output.
Use Upon setup.
Setting/
Procedure
Type the serial numbers. 9 digits (0 to 9)
Printer, Scanner, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vendor, Fax1
266
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.8.4 No Sleep
10.8.5 Original Size Detection
10.8.6 Foolscap Size Setting
Functions To display the option of OFF for the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from
Administrator Setting.
Use To display the option of OFF for the Sleep Mode Setting.
NOTE
The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF.
Setting/
Procedure
Permit Prohibit
Functions To change the document size detection table.
Use Use to change the setting for the document size detection table.
Copy Glass: To change the size detection table for the document glass.
ADF : To set whether or not to detect 18k/16k while using ADF (only when
marketing area is Europe)
Setting/
Procedure
<Copy Glass>
The default setting is Table1.
Table1 Table2
NOTE
Table 2 can be set only when Original Size Detecting Sensor/2 is being
mounted.
<ADF>
The default setting is Disable.
Enable Disable
Functions To set the size for Foolscap paper.
Use Upon setup.
To change the size for Foolscap paper.
Setting/
Procedure
Select the size from among the following five.
220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13
267
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.8.7 Initialization
A. Data Clear
B. System Error Clear
10.8.8 Install Date
10.9 System 2
10.9.1 HDD
Functions To initialize the setting data.
Use To clears the setting data.
For details on items to be cleared, see page 302 Contents to be cleared by Reset
function.
NOTE
When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below, be
sure to clear the data.
Referring data: One-Touch Registration, User Authentication/Account Track.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] [Initialization] [Data clear].
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more
than 10 seconds after.
Functions To reset the trouble data.
Use Use to clear the [Jam], [Trouble], [Error] displays, and other improper displays.
For details on items to be cleared, see page 302 Contents to be cleared by Reset
function.
Setting/Pro-
cedure
[System 1] [Initialization] [System Error Clear].
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more
than 10 seconds after.
Functions To register the date the main unit was installed.
Use Upon setup.
Setting/
Procedure
[System 1] [Install Date].
3. Enter the date (Year 4 digit Month 2 digit date 2 digit) from the 10-Key Pad.
4. Touch [Entry] to set the date of installation.
Functions
Not Used.
Use
Setting/Pro-
cedure
268
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.9.2 Image Controller Setting
10.9.3 Option Board Status
10.9.4 Consumable Life Reminder
Functions To set the type of the controller.
[Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected.
Use When setting up the controller.
Setting/
Procedure
Image Controller Setting
Select the controller to be used.
Controller 0 : The standard controller is used.
Controller 1 : An external controller is used.
Others : An external controller is used.
Peripheral Mode
Select the operating mode of the Scanner.
Mode 1: Not use
Mode 2: Not use
Mode 3: Not use
NOTE
After changing setting, make sure to turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it
on again more than 10 seconds after.
Functions To set when the Optional Fax Mount Kit, Local Interface Kit is mounted.
Use Use when setting up the Optional Fax Mount Kit, Local Interface Kit is mounted.
Setting/
Procedure
Setting modes are Fax (Main) and local I/F.
Fax (Main) :Set Unset
Fax (Sub) :Not Used
local I/F :Set Unset
JPEG :Not Used
NOTE
After changing setting, make sure to turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it
on again more than 10 seconds after.
Functions To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime
PM parts lifetime display: An entire screen warning is given when the service life
of a specific unit has been reached, prompting the
user to replace the part.
Applicable units:
Transfer Belt Unit, Fusing Unit, Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, K)
Use Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Yes.
Yes No
269
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.9.5 Unit Change
10.9.6 Software Switch Setting
10.9.7 Scan Caribration
10.9.8 LCT Paper Size Setting
Functions To select who is to replace a unit.
When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who
is going to replace the unit.
When User is selected : Copying is inhibited.
When Service is selected : Life warning.
Use Upon setup
Setting/
Procedure
The following are the default settings:
US, Japan, Others 4 Europe, Others1/2/3
Toner Cartridge : User Service User Service
Imaging Unit : User Service User Service
Waste Toner Box : User Service User Service
Punch Dust Box : User Service User Service
Functions
Not Used
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Functions To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping.
Use To be used when CCD unit has bee changed.
After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the calibration
value set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on
each scanner (CCD).
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, the function becomes available by turning the
Sub Power Switch OFF and ON again.
Functions To set the paper size for the LCT
Use Use to change the paper size for the LCT.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.
A4 81/2 x 11
270
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.9.9 Line Mag Setting
Functions To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping.
Use To be used after replacing the CCD unit.
After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the magnifica-
tion offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences
in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
NOTE
When the setting is changed, the function becomes valid by turning the Sub
Power Switch OFF and ON again.
271
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.9.10 Data Capture
Functions When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of
the error.
Use When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to
the print job data.
Setting/
Procedure
NOTE
The following conditions are necessary for this function.
When selecting [Security Setting] [Security Details] [Print Data Capture]
in Administrator Setting, [Allow] must be set.
The hard disk must be mounted to the machine.
When selecting [Administrator Setting] [Network Setting] [FTP Setting],
[FTP Server: ON] must be set.
1. Select [Service Mode] [System 2], and touch [Data Capture]. Select [ON].
(While the Data Capture setting is [ON], the print job data from the PC will be stored
in the hard disk.)
2. Check the IP address of the machine.
3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with Ethernet cable.
4. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC, and specify the IP address of the
machine to start FTP.
5. Input the user name and the password.
User name: capture
Password: sysadm
4037F3E538DA
4037F3E539DA
272
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Setting/
Procedure
6. Using the ls command, display the list of the file available for capture.
7. Using the binary command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer.
4037F3E540DA
4037F3E541DA
273
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Setting/
Procedure
8. Using the get command, transfer the data for capture to PC.
9. Finish the command prompt.
NOTE
When the data capture is set to [ON], all print job data will be stored in the hard
disk.
After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Setting] [Security Set-
ting] [Security Detail], and select [Restrict] for Print Data Capture in order to
delete the job data stored in the hard disk.
4037F3E542DA
274
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.10 Counter
The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Technical Representa-
tive to check or set as necessary.
10.10.1 Procedure
1. Touch [Counter] to show the Counter menu.
2. Select the specific counter to be displayed.
3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at
once, touch [Counter Reset], select the specific counters to be cleared, and touch
[END]. Two or more counters can be selected.
10.10.2 Life
Functions To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has
been used.
To clear the count of each counter.
Use When each of the maintenance parts is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit, Transfer Belt
Unit, and IU, which are provided with a new unit detection function.
<1>
Fusing Unit : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through
Transfer Unit : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through
1st. : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 1
2nd. : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 2
3rd. : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 3
4th. : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 4
Manual Tray : Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass
<2>
Cyan IU : Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used.
Magenta IU : Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit has been
used.
Yellow IU : Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used.
Black IU : Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used.
LCT Parts : Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT
ADF Feed : Number of sheets of paper fed through the take-up section of the
ADF
ADF Reverse : Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF
Sorter/Finisher : Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter/Finisher
275
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.10.3 Jam
10.10.4 Service Call Counter
10.10.5 Warning
10.10.6 Maintenance
Functions To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the
machine.
Use To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred
Setting/
Procedure
operation.
Functions To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the
machine
Use To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred
Setting/
Procedure
operation.
Functions To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type
Use To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected
Setting/
Procedure
operation.
When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the
Basic screen.
Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.
Functions To set a count value for maintenance of any given part.
Use When any given part is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
Maint.-Set
Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-Key Pad.
Maint.-Count
Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine.
Pressing the Clear key will clear the count.
If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing
operation.
276
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.10.7 Service Total
10.10.8 Counter of Each Mode
10.10.9 Service Call History (Data)
10.10.10 ADF Paper Pages
10.10.11 Paper Jam History
10.10.12 Fax Connection Error
Functions To display the count value for the service total counter.
Use Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Ser-
vice Mode.
Setting/
Procedure
Service Total : No. of pages printed by User mode and Service
Mode.
Service Total (Duplex) : No. of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode
in Duplex.
Functions To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Fax. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode.
Use Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes; Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Fax, as well as No. of times each mode was used, in order to know
the using condition.
Functions To display the trouble history in chronological order.
Use Use to check the trouble history in chronological order.
Functions To display the No. of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder.
Use Use to check the No. of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder.
Functions To display the jam history in chronological order.
Use Use to check the jam history in chronological order.
NOTE
[Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code.
For details of JAM code, see Trouble shooting on page 313.
Functions To display the No. of Fax transmission errors occurred.
Use Use to check the No. of Fax transmission errors occurred.
277
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.11 List Output
10.11.1 Machine Management List
10.11.2 Adjustment List
10.11.3 Parameter List
For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.
10.11.4 Service Parameter
10.11.5 Protocol Trace
10.11.6 Fax Setting List
Functions To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, Total Counter val-
ues, and others.
Use At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source.
Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
Functions To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment, process adjustment, etc. in
Service Mode.
Use At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source.
Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
The time-of-day and date will also be printed.
278
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.12 State Confirmation
10.12.1 Sensor Check
A. Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check
When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine, the Tray 2 Paper
Take-Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it.
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed.
2. From the Sensor Check List that follows, check the panel display of the Tray 2 Paper
Take-Up Sensor. For the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor, you check the data of Take-Up
of Tray 2.
3. Call the Service mode to the screen.
4. Select [State Confirmation] [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains
Take-Up under Tray 2. For Take-Up under Tray 2, select 1 on the left-hand side
of the screen.
5. Check that the data for Take-Up under Tray 2 is 0 (sensor blocked).
6. Move the actuator to unblock the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor.
7. Check that the data for Take-Up under Tray 2 changes from 0 to 1 on the screen.
8. If the input data is 0, change the sensor.
Functions To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine
remains stationary.
Use Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time
basis.
It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a door is
open.
279
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
B. Sensor Check Screens
These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi-
vidual machine.
4038F3E511DA
280
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
C. Sensor Check List
(1) Sensors 1 (Main Unit, PC-103, PC-203)
Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Operation Characteristics/
Panel Display
1 0
PC12 Tray 1 Device
Detection
Tray 1 Set Sensor In position Out of
position
PC10 Paper Empty Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC11 Near Empty Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC2-PC Tray 2 Device
Detection
position
PC6-PC Paper Empty Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC1-PC Near Empty Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC8-PC Vertical
Transport
Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-PC Take-Up Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-PC Upper Limit Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor At raised
position
Not at raised
position
Detection
position
present
Paper
present
PC117-PC Vertical
Transport
present
Paper not
present
present
Paper not
present
PC114-PC Upper Limit Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor At raised
position
Not at raised
position
Detection
position
present
Paper
present
PC126-PC Vertical
Transport
present
Paper not
present
present
Paper not
present
PC123-PC Upper Limit Tray 4 Lift-Up Sensor At raised
position
Not at raised
position
PC14 Man-
ual
Lift-Up Position
Sensor
Bypass Lift-Up Sensor At raised
position
Not at raised
position
PC13 Paper Empty Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
281
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
PC1 Paper
Pas-
sage
Registration
Roller
Registration Roller Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2 Exit Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC4 OHP Detect OHP Sensor OHP Not OHP
PC3 Fusing Loop
Detect
Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Loop present Loop not
present
PC17 PC
Drive
Detec
t
Color PC Drive
Main Sensor
Color PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC18 Color PC Drive
Sub Sensor
Color PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC15 Black PC Drive
Main Sensor
K PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC16 Black PC Drive
Sub Sensor
K PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked
Panel Display
1 0
282
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. Sensors 2 (Main Unit, PC-403)
Panel Display
1 0
PC4-LCT LCT Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Upper Sensor At raised
position
Not at raised
position
PC13-LCT Lift-Up Lower Lift-Up Lower Sensor At lower limit Not at lower
limit
PC12-LCT Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Home Sensor At home Out of home
PC11-LCT Shift Tray Stop Shift Tray Stop Sensor At stop posi-
tion
Not at stop
position
PC1-LCT Take-Up Paper Take-up Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2-LCT Vertical
Transport
Vertical Transport Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-LCT Paper Empty Paper Empty Board Paper
present
Paper not
present
PWB-E
LCT
Main Tray Empty Main Tray Empty Sensor Board Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-LCT Lower Over Run Lower Over Run Sensor Malfunction Operational
NU1-LCT Manual Button
Down
Manual Button Down Board ON OFF
PC14-LCT Division Board
Position
Division Board Motor At home Out of home
PC6-LCT Cassette Open Cassette Open Sensor In position Out of posi-
tion
PC8-LCT Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC10-LCT Elevator Motor
Pulse
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PCl DU Duplex Set Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Close Open
PI1 DU Paper Passage1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2 DU Paper Passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC1-HO Hori-
zontal
Trans.
Unit
Horizontal
Transport
Paper Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC6-HO Paper Detect
Reverse Sensor
Turnover Empty Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7 2nd
Trans-
fer
Retraction 2nd Image Transfer Pressure
Position Sensor
Not
Retracted
Retracted
PC6 Trans-
fer Belt
Retraction 1st Image Transfer Pressure/
Retraction Position Sensor
Not
Retracted
Retracted
PC8 Waste
Toner
Toner Full Waste Toner Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked
283
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
E. Sensors 3 (FS-501, JS-601)
Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteris-
tics/Panel Display
1 0
PC1-FN Multi
Staple
Finisher
Exit (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC19-FN Exit (Non-sort3) Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-FN Exit (Finisher) Storage Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC4-FN Upper Paper Pass Upper Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2-FN Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC6-FN Full (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC20-FN Full (Non-sort3) Job Tray Full Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-FN Full (Elev. Tray) Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC5-FN Empty (Finisher) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PWB-D
FN
Surface (Elev.) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC8-FN Empty (Elev.) Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC9-FN Home (CD-Align) CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC14-FN Staple Standby Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC12-FN Home (Store
roller)
Storage Roller Home Position Sen-
sor
Blocked Unblocked
PC13-FN Home (Exit roller) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
- Staple Home Staple Home 1 Unblocked Blocked
- Staple Empty Staple Empty 1 Unblocked Blocked
- Self Priming Staple Self Priming 1 Unblocked Blocked
S2-FN
S3-FN
Elevator Tray
Upper Limit
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch
ON OFF
PC10-FN Shift Home Shift Home Position Sensor Unblocked Blocked
PC11-FN Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked
284
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
F. Sensors 4 (FS-603, PK-501)
tics/Panel Display
1 0
PI1-FN Sad-
dle
Stitch
Fin-
isher
Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI2-FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP
PI3-FN Bundle Roller
Home
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP
PI4-FN Front Align Front Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor
HP
PI5-FN Back Align Rear Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor
HP
PI6-FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI7-FN Home (Exit Belt) Exit Belt Home Position Sensor HP
PI10-FN Crease Position Folding Position Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI13-FN Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI11-FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP
PI12-FN Crease Roller
Home
Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP
PI14-FN Crease Clock Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor
PI8-FN Paper Exit Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI9-FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Paper
surface
detected
PI15-FN Lift Raised
Position
Shift Upper Limit Sensor Upper limit
PI16-FN Lift Lowered
Position
Shift Lower Limit Sensor Lower limit
PI17-FN Lift Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor
Lift Middle Paper full
PI18-FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP
PI19-FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP
PI20-FN Staple Staple Detecting Sensor Staples
loaded
No staple
loaded
Stapler Connect. Stapler
connection
detected
MS3-FN
MS4-FN
Stapler Safety SW Staple Safety Switch (Rear)
Staple Safety Switch (Front)
Open
PI21-FN Self Prime Self-Priming Sensor READY
PI22-FN Front Door Front Door Open Sensor Open
PI23-FN Upper Cover Upper Cover Open Sensor Open
285
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
MS1-FN Sad-
dle
Stitch
Fin-
isher
Front Door SW Front Door Open Sensor Open
Remain in
Reverse Section
Paper
horiz. side
MS2-FN Joint SW Joint Open Sensor Open
Punch
Unit
Punch Depth1
Punch Depth2
Punch Depth3
Punch Depth4
Punch Dust Punch
trash full
Punch Timing
PI3P-PK Punch Motor
Clock
Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked
PI1P-PK Punch (Home) Punch Home Position Sensor HP
PI2P-PK Punch Depth
Home
Side Registration Home Sensor HP
PC6-HO Horizontal
Transport Door
Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked Unblocked
tics/Panel Display
1 0
286
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
G. Sensors 5 (Main Unit)
10.12.2 Table Number
Symbol
Panel Display Part/Signal Name
tics/Panel Display
1 0
PC201 Scan-
ner
Home Sensor Scanner Home Sensor At home Out of
home
S201 Org.
Detecti
ng
Sensor
Original Cover Size Reset Switch Lowered Raised
PC202 20 Degree Original Cover Angle Sensor Less than
20
20 or
more
PC203 Original Size
Detection 1
Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original
loaded, not
mounted
Original not
loaded
PC204 Original Size
Detection 2
Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original
loaded,not
mounted
Original not
loaded
Original Size
Detection 3
Not Used
Original Size
Detection 4
Not Used
Original Size
Detection 5
Not Used
Original Size
Detection 6
Not Used
Original Size
Detection 7
Not Used
Original Size
Detection 8
Not Used
Functions To display the Vg/Vdc output values calculated for the image density of the test pat-
tern (amount of toner sticking) produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detec-
tion sequence.
Reference values: C, M, Y K Vdc: around 390 V, Vg: around 550 V
Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems.
Setting/
Procedure
If the value is high, correct so that the image density becomes low.
If the value is low, correct so that the image density becomes high.
287
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.12.3 Level History1
10.12.4 Level History2
10.12.5 Temp. & Humidity
10.12.6 CCD Check
Functions To display TCR (T/C ratio), IDC/Regist Sensor output values, and fusing temperature.
Setting/
Procedure
TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K: Shows the T/C output reading taken last.
IDC1/IDC2 : Shows the latest IDC data.
Temp-Heat : Shows the latest Heating Roller temperature data.
Temp-Press. : Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data.
Reading taken last means
Density of toner of the latest image
When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being
displayed.
Functions IDC Sensor (Transfer Belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabili-
zation sequence and ATVC value.
Setting/
Procedure
IDC Sensor: Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC Sensor.
ATVC (C, M, Y, K): Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value
(-500 V to 3000 V).
ATVC (2nd) : Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value
(1000 V to 4800 V).
Functions To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (AIDC Sensor portion)
inside the machine and fusing temperature.
Use Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
Temp-Inside : 0 to 100 C in 1 C increments
Temp-Heater : 0 to 255 C in 1 C increments
Temp-press. : 0 to 255 C in 1 C increments
Humidity : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments
Absolute Humidity : 0 to 100 in 1 increments
Functions To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B.
Use Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor.
Setting/
Procedure
Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values.
CLAMP: The difference between the max. and min. output values should be
within 100.
GAIN : The difference from the CLAMP values (R, B) should be within (90 for R
and B. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within 50
for G. The difference between each pair of RO and RE, GO and GE, and
BO and BE should be within 30.
288
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.12.7 Memory/HDD Adj.
A. Memory Check
B. Compress / Decompression Check
C. Memory Bus Check
Functions To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through
write/read check.
Rough Check
A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a
very limited area.
The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage.
Detail Check
A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at
the addresses and buses in all areas.
The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage.
Use If the copy image is faulty.
Adjustment
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.]
[Memory Check].
3. Select the desired type of check, either Rough Check or Detail Check.
4. Press the Start key to start the check procedure.
5. When the check procedure is completed, the results are shown on the screen.
If the check results are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory
with a new one.
Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. (Only Rough Check)
Functions To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.
Adjustment
Procedure
[Compress / Decompression Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decom-
pression check sequence.
4. The check result will be displayed,
Functions To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory, and
from memory to printer.
Adjustment
Procedure
[Memory Bus Check].
3. Select either [Scanner Memory], [Memory PRT], or both.
4. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automati-
cally.
5. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].
289
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
D. Work Memory In/Out Check
E. HDD R/W Check
F. HDD Format
Functions To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly per-
formed.
Use If the print image is faulty.
Adjustment
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [Work
Memory In/Out Check].
3. Select either [Input Check], [Output Check], or both.
4. Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input/output operation check
sequence and be terminated automatically.
Functions To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of
the hard disk is correctly performed.
Use When the hard disk is mounted.
Adjustment
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [HDD
R/W Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be termi-
nated automatically.
Functions To format the hard disk
The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to Logical Format.
If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code C-D010 will appear.
Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure.
Use When the hard disk is mounted.
When the hard disk is to be initialized. (Physical Format to Logical Format)
Adjustment
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] [Memory / HDD Adj.] [HDD
Format].
(1) Physical Format
1. Touch [Physical Format].
2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
4. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
(2) Logical Format (Only when initial is set up)
1. Touch [Logical Format].
2. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
3. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
4. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it.
290
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.12.8 Memory/HDD State
10.12.9 Color Regist
10.12.10 IU Lot No.
10.12.11 Adjustment Data List
Functions To display the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk.
Use Use to check the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk.
Setting/
Procedure
When an add-on memory is mounted, the machine automatically recognizes it
and displays its capacity.
Functions To check each of C, M, Y, and K for color shift amount.
The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjust-
ment has been completed.
Use Use for check when color shift is evident.
Use for adjustment of PH skew.
Setting/
Procedure
For each of C, M, Y, and K, the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two loca-
tions (one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift
amount between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed.
Display unit: dots
The shift amount is displayed with reference to K for C, M, and Y, and that for K is dis-
played with reference to an ideal position.
Functions To display the 10-digit lot number for each of C, M, Y, and K IUs.
The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU.
Use Use for checking the IU Lot No.
Setting/
Procedure
The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened; however, the display
is blank, since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Main Power
Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open. Nonetheless, the lot number will be
displayed when the Front Door is closed.
(The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed.)
Functions To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit.
Use Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit.
291
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.13 Test Mode
To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of
test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in running mode, as well as the Fax trans-
mission.
The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4,
and Tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing.
10.13.1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output
1. Touch [Test Mode] to display the Test Mode menu.
2. Touch the desired test pattern key.
3. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.
10.13.2 Gradation Pattern
Functions To produce a gradation pattern.
Use Used for checking gradation reproducibility.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
# of Print (1 to 999)
Select SINGLE (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
Select FEET or HYPER.
Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.
Select the color mode.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), CMYK, 8Color, 4Color, Black (1PC)
Black (4PC): Uses four colors.
Black (1PC): Uses one color of black.
4036fs3042c0
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Cyan
292
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.13.3 Halftone Pattern
10.13.4 Lattice Pattern
Functions To produce a solid halftone pattern.
Use Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYK, 3 Color,
4 Color, Black (1PC), MIX
Type the density level (0 to 255).
4036fs3043c0
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Cyan
Density: 255
Functions To produce a lattice pattern.
Use Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density.
A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a
solid background.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
Select Gradation or Resolution. (Only select HYPER)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black (4PC), Red, Green, Blue, CMYK, 3 Color,
4 Color, Black (1PC)
Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots).
Select Normal or Reverse.
4036fs3044c0
SINGLE
FEET
Cyan
CD Width: 5
FD Width: 5
Density: 255
Normal
293
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.13.5 Solid Pattern
10.13.6 Color Sample
Functions To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns.
Use Used for checking reproducibility of image density.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
4036fs3045c0
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Density: 255
Y
C
K
M
Functions To produce a color sample.
Use Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C, M, Y, K, R, G, and B, and a patch of each of
the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected.
4036fs3046c0
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
294
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern
10.13.8 Running Mode
10.13.9 Fax Test
10.14 ADF
For details, see DF-601 Service Manual.
10.15 FAX
Functions To produce an 8-color solid pattern.
Use Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color.
Pattern
Setting/
Procedure
4036fs3047c0
SINGLE
HYPER
Gradation
Density: 255
Functions To test the printing operation in Running Mode.
Use Use to check the printing operation in Running Mode from each paper source.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] [Running Mode].
3. Select the paper size (Tray 1, Bypass only).
4. Select the paper type.
5. Press the Start key to start the Running Mode.
6. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation.
295
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10.16 Finisher
For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option FS-603.
Functions To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher.
Use Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the
copies made using the Fold & Staple function.
Upon setup of the Finisher (FS-603).
Adjustment
Specification
Center staple position:
Fold position:
11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
296
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
11. Enhanced Security
11.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure
11.1.1 Procedure
Stop 0 Clear
3. Enhanced Security menu will appear.
11.1.2 Exiting
Touch the [Exit].
11.2 Enhanced Security Function Tree
4037F3E508DA
Service Mode
Enhanced Security CE Password
297 297
Administrator Password
297
Administrator Feature
Level
298
CE Authentication
298
IU Life Stop Setting
298
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 11. Enhanced Security
297
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security
11.3.1 CE Password
11.3.2 Administrator Password
Functions To set and change the CE Password.
Use Use to change the CE Password.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter the CE Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
The initial setting is 92729272.
Current Password : Enter the currently using CE Password.
New Password : Enter the new CE Password.
Re-Input Password: Enter the new CE Password again.
NOTE
When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password
with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous
one cannot be changed.
[Administrator Setting] [Security Setting]
NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call
responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.
Functions To set and change the Administrator Password.
Use Use to change the Administrator Password.
Setting/
Procedure
Enter the Administrator Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
The initial setting is 12345678.
New Password : Enter the new Administrator Password.
Re-Input Password: Enter the new Administrator Password again.
NOTE
When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password
with the same letters, the password which is same as the previous one and the
password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.
[Administrator Setting] [Security Setting]
11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
298
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level
11.3.4 CE Authentication
11.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting
Functions To set which Modes to be allowed for the Administrator to use in Service Mode.
Use Use when allowing the Administrator to use some Modes in Service Mode.
The Modes allowed for the Administrator to use in each setting are as follows.
Setting/
Procedure
Level1 Level2 Prohibit
Administrator Setting Function Level 1 Level 2
[System Setting]
[Expert Setting]
Printer
Adjustment
Erase Leading Edge
Scanner
Adjustment
Leading Edge Adjustment
Centering
Horizontal Adjustment
Vertical Adjustment
ADF Adjust-
ment
Centering
Original Stop Position
Centering Auto Adjustment
Auto Adj. of Stop Position
[Standard Size
Setting]
Original Glass Original Size Detect
Functions To determine whether or not to authenticate CE Password as entering Service Mode.
Use Use when authenticating CE Password as entering Service Mode.
Setting/
Procedure
ON OFF
Functions To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life
Use Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life.
Setting/
Procedure
The default setting is Stop.
Stop No Stop
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 12. Billing Setting
299
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
12. Billing Setting
12.1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure
12.1.1 Procedure
Stop 9
3. Billing Setting menu will appear.
12.1.2 Exiting
Touch the [Exit].
12.2 Billing Setting Function Tree
4037F3E510DA
Service Mode
Billing Setting Counter Setting
300 300
Management Function
Choice
301
Coverage Rate Clear
301
12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
300
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
12.3 Settings in the Billing Setting
12.3.1 Counter Setting
Functions To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter.
To set the size regarded as the Large size (2 counts.)
Use Use to change the counting method for the counters.
Setting/
Procedure
Total Counter Mode
Mode 1: 1 Count per 1 copy cycle (Default: US, Others 4, Japan)
Mode 2: Large Size is double counts.
(Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3)
Large Size Counter Mode
A3/11 x 17 : When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan
direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direc-
tion (exceeds 399 mm at FAX scan), it is
regarded as the Large Size.
A3/B4/11 x 17/81/2 x 14 : When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan
regarded as the Large Size.
A3/11 x 17/B4/81/2 x 14/Foolscap : When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan
regarded as the Large Size (However the size
in the main scan direction changes according
to the Foolscap Size Setting.)
Not counted (Default: US, Others 4, Japan)
A3 and 11 x 17
A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 81/2 x 14 (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3)
A3, B4, Foolscap, 11 x 17, 11 x 14, and 81/2 x 14
Count-up Table
0: No count; 1: 1 count; 2: 2 counts; 3: 3 counts; 4: 4 counts
Copying 1-Sided 2-Sided
Size
Sizes other
than Large
sizes
Large sizes
Sizes other
than Large
sizes
Large sizes
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
Counter Type 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2
2-sided Total 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 12. Billing Setting
301
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
12.3.2 Management Function Choice
12.3.3 Coverage Rate Clear
Functions To set whether or not the Key Counter and Management Device are installed.
Use Use to change the counting method for the administrative units.
Setting/
Procedure
Key Counter
Default setting: Unset
Set Unset
Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the Key Counter is mounted.
Color Mode
When [Mode 1] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting]
[Counter setting].
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle
[Counter setting] and Large size is selected on [Large Size Counter Mode].
[Counter setting] and sizes other than Large Size are selected on [Large Size
Counter Mode].
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
Message
Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1: Message for Key Counter
Type 2: Message for Card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
Type 4: Message for Remote SW
Management Device
Default setting: Unset
Set Unset
Functions To clear the coverage rate
Use Use to clear the coverage rate
Setting/
Procedure
Set Unset
Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.
13. Procedure for Resetting Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
302
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
13. Procedure for Resetting
13.1 Trouble resetting
13.2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function
: Will be cleared (initialized)
-: Will not be cleared
Functions If the trouble occurs and the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power
Switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the front door, clear the status of
the machine.
Use To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power Switch OFF
and ON again, or opening and closing the front door in case of a trouble.
Setting/
Procedure
2. Turn Main Power Switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key.
3. Touch [Trouble Reset].
4. Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and the it has been reset.
5. After turning off the Main Power Switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after
and check if the machine starts correctly.
Items for clearing
Contents to be cleared
Front Door
Open/Close
Trouble
resetting
Initialization
Main power
switch
Off/On
System
Error Clear
Data Clear
Jam display - -
Malfunction
display
Fusing - - -
Optical
Scanner

CC151 - - - -
Others - - - -
Erratic operation / display - - - -
Utility Mode
(Except items on
Expert adjustment.)
- - - -
Service Mode
(System 1/2)
- - - *1 -
Billing Setting
Counter Setting
- - - -
Adjustment of the touch panel
position
- - - -
*1: Items to be cleared
System 1
Marketing Area (Fax Target Only)
Install Date
Tel/Fax Number
No Sleep
Original Size Detection
System 2 HDD
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 14. Mechanical adjustment
303
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
14. Mechanical adjustment
14.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section
14.1.1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed.
The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound.
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the IR Rear Cover.
57, 54
2. Remove the Harness from two Wire
Saddles [1] and the Edge Cover [2].
Saddle [4].
[1]
[2]
4038F2C128DA
[3] [4]
4038F2C129DA
14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
304
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
4. Remove 16 screws [5], and remove the Reinforcement frame [6].
5. Loosen the three screws that secure
the Scanner Motor mounting bracket
[7].
6. With the Scanner drive gear set
screw [8] located on the right-hand
side as shown on the left, slide the
Scanner Motor Assy [9] to the left
and check that it is returned to the
original position by the tension of the
spring [10]. Perform this step three
times.
7. Tighten the three screws [11] to fix
the Scanner Motor Assy into posi-
tion.
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
4038F2C130DA
[7]
4038F2C568DA
4038F3C508DA
[10]
[9]
[11] [8]
[11] [11]
305
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
14.1.2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit
The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound
1. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens
cover [2].
2. Slide the Mirrors Unit [3] to the cen-
ter until it is pressed up against the
cutouts in the rails [4].
3. If the Mirrors Unit is not pressed up
against the cutouts, loosen the
adjusting screw (to which red paint is
applied) [5] of the Mirrors Unit and
press the carriage up against the
cutouts. Then, tighten the adjusting
screw.
4. Slide the Mirrors Unit to the left and
install the Lens Cover.
5. Then conduct Scanner positioning
adjustment.
[1]
[2]
4038F2C181DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
4038F3C001DB
[5]
4038F3C002DB
306
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
14.2 Scanner Position Adjustment
The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound.
Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed.
1. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the posi-
tion shown on the left.
2. Secure the Scanner [2] in the posi-
tion shown on the left using the two
Scanner positioning screws [3].
3. Make the Feed Direction Adjustment.
241
100 mm
4038F3C509DA
[1]
200 mm
4038F3C510DA
[2] [3]
[3]
307
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
14.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section
14.3.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit
The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed.
1. Install the gear so that the protrusion
of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on
the Bypass Guide Rack Gear [2] are
aligned in a straight line.
2. Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that
part A (edge) [2] of the Rack Gear [1]
for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and
part B [3] of the Bypass Unit Cover
are aligned in a straight line.
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
4038F3C003DA
[3]
4038F3C004DB
[1]
[2]
308
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
3. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit
base is mounted, align the lever
position of the Bypass Paper Size
Unit with the tab at the center in a
straight line.
4. After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the
Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the
Bypass Guide.
5. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] [Manual Bypass Tray
Adjustment]. Then, carry out Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment.
243
4038F3C512DA
309
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
14.4 PH Unit Mechanical Adjustment
14.4.1 Skew Adjustment
When PH Unit is replaced.
1. Turn on the Main Power Switch.
2. Select [Service Mode] [Test
Mode] [Gradation Pattern] and
output the test pattern with the fol-
lowing conditions.
Conditions: SINGLE, HYPER,
Gradation, 4 Color
3. Using the output test pattern, check
if each color of CMYK is printed in
correct pattern.
If the pattern is not correct, any trou-
bles such as connecting failure in PH
Unit of the corresponding color may
occur, which should be modified.
If there isnt any problem, proceed to
step 4.
4. Touch [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Stabilizer] [Initialize +
Image Stabilization].
5. Display [Service mode] [State Confirmation] [Color Regist] and check if the Step
Value: X of Black (k) is within the specification.
Specification: within 4
4038F3E513DA
4038F3E514DA
310
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
If the value is out of the specification,
follow the procedures shown below to
adjust it to satisfy the specification.
If the value satisfies the specification,
proceed to step 9.
7. Turn the Skew adjustment dial of PH
(Black) for numeric of Step value
with flathead screwdriver
To the left: When the step value goes -
direction
To the right: When the step value goes
+ direction
<Adjustment sample>
If the step value confirmed in step 4 is
[-7], turn the skew adjustment dial of
PH (Black) to the left (- direction) for 7
clicks.
8. Close the Front door and touch [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Stabilizer] - [Initial-
ize + Image Stabilization].
9. After image stabilization is completed, display [Service Mode] [State Confirmation]
[Color Regist] again and check if the Step Value: X of Black (k) is within the specifi-
cation.
NOTE
Each colors Step value displayed on [Color Regist] changes every time the image
stabilization is conducted. Therefore the value may change even if skew adjust-
ment is not made.
If the value is out of the specification, repeat step 5 to 6 to continue the adjustment until it
satisfies the specification.
If the value satisfies the specification, proceed to step 9.
10. Check if the Step Value: X of each color C, M, Y, is within the specification.
Specification: within 4
4038F3C005DB
4038F3E515DA
311
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
If either value is out of the specifica-
tion, follow the procedures shown
below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi-
cation.
If the value of all color, C, M, Y, K, sat-
isfy the specification, proceed to step
14.
12. Turn the Skew adjustment dial of the
corresponding PH with flathead
screwdriver.
To the left: When the step value goes -
direction
To the right: When the step value goes
+ direction
<Adjustment sample>
If the yellow value, among the step
values confirmed in step 9, is [-5],
which means out of the specification,
turn the skew adjustment dial of PH
(Yellow) to the left (- direction) for 5
clicks.
13. Close the Front door and touch [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Stabilizer] [Initial-
ize + Image Stabilization].
14. After image stabilization is completed, display [Service mode] [State Confirmation]
[Color Regist] again and check if the Step Value: X of each color C, M, Y, is within
the specification.
NOTE
Each colors Step value displayed on [Color Regist] changes every time the image
stabilization is conducted. Therefore the value may change even if skew adjust-
ment is not made.
If either value is out of the specification, repeat step 10 to 13 to continue the adjustment
until all CMYK colors satisfy the specification.
15. Exit the Service Mode.
4038F3C006DB
312
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 15. Jam Display
313
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
15. Jam Display
15.1 Misfeed Display
When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca-
tion are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine.
4038F4C501DA
[6]
[7]
[11]
[11] [11]
[2]
[5]
[8]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[12]
[10]
[10]
[9]
15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
314
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
*1: JAM Code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service
Mode.
*2: See the optional FS-501 Service Manual.
*3: See the optional FS-603 Service Manual.
*4: See the optional DF-601 Service Manual.
15.1.1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure
Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
Display Code *1 Misfeed Location misfeed processing location Action
[1] 1101 Tray 1 feed section Right Door 318
[2] 3001 2nd Image Transfer section Right Door 319
[3]
1201 Tray 2 feed section Tray 2 Right Door 320
2001 Tray 2 vertical transport section Tray 2 Right Door
1001 Manual Bypass feed section Right Door
[4]
1501 LCT feed section LCT Right Door 322
2001 LCT vertical transport section LCT Right Door
[5]
9301 Duplex Unit transport section
Duplex Unit Right Door
325
9201 Duplex Unit pre-registration section
[6]
1301 Tray 3 feed section
Paper Feed Unit Right Door
323
2001 Tray 3 vertical transport section
[7]
1401 Tray 4 feed section 324
2001 Tray 4 Vertical transport section
[8] 3201 Fusing, Exit section Right Door 327
[9] 7403 Horizontal transport Horizontal transport cover *2, *3
[10]
7401
7402
7404
7405
7406
Finisher FS-501 /
Job Separator JS-601
Finisher Door *2
[11]
7401
7403
7404
7405
7407
Finisher FS-603 Finisher Door *3
[12]
6401
6402
6403
6404
Automatic Document Feeder
DF-601
Document Feeder Door *4
315
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.2 Sensor layout
System Mounted with PC-203.
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [4].
[1] Exit Sensor PC2 [6] Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC9-PC
[2] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU [7] Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PC
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU [8] Tray 3 Take-up Sensor PC116-PC
[4]*1 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 [9] Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PC
[4]*1 OHP Sensor PC4 [10] Tray 4 Take-up Sensor PC125-PC
[5] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC
4038F4C510DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
316
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
System Mounted with PC-403.
*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [4].
[1] Exit Sensor PC2 [5] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC
[2] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU [6] Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC9-PC
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU [7] Vertical Transport Sensor PC2-LCT
[4]*1 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 [8] Paper Take-up Sensor PC1-LCT
[4]*1 OHP Sensor PC4
4038F4C511DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
317
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3 Solution
15.3.1 Initial Check Items
When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items
Check Item Action
Does paper meet product specifications? Change paper.
Is paper curled, wavy, or damp.
Change paper.
Instruct user in correct paper storage.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the
paper path deformed or worn?
Clean or change the paper path.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or
worn?
Clean or change the defective Paper Separa-
tor Finger.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or change the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct
position to accommodate paper?
Set as necessary.
Are actuators found operational as checked for correct
operation?
Correct or change the defective actuator.
318
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.2 Misfeed at Tray 1 feed section
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Tray 1
feed section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor
(PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed
Clutch (CL2) has been energized.
Tray 1 Feed
section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at
front of the Registration Roller at Tray 1 feed.
Relevant Electrical Parts
Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
Registration Roller Sensor (PC1)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 Initial check items
2 PC1 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3
3 CL2 operation check PWB-M CNLP-13 (ON) C-9 to 10
4 Change PWB-M
319
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.3 Misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at 2nd
Image Transfer
section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC2) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Clutch (CL1) has been
energized.
The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper
left in 2nd Image
Transfer section
The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is
turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
The OHP Sensor (PC4) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON, a
door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Exit Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Image Transfer Belt Unit is being
cleaned.
Misfeed detected
as a result of
delayed deactiva-
tion of sensor
Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) does not transmit the paper even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC1 at Tray 1 feed.
2nd Image
Transfer section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making loop at front of
the Registration Roller when the sensor at front of the Registration Roller is
blocked at Paper feed.
Exit Sensor (PC2)
OHP Sensor (PC4)
Registration Roller Clutch (CL1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
3 PC2 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-13
5 CL1 operation check PWB-M CNSEN-18 (ON) C-4
6 Change PWB-M
320
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.4 Misfeed at Tray 2 feed, Tray 2 vertical transport section
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Tray 2
feed section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC8-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 2 Paper
Feed Motor (M1-PC) has been energized.
Detection of
misfeed at Tray 2
vertical transport
section
The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sen-
sor (PC8-PC).
Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) does not transmit the paper even after
the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC8-PC.
Tray 2 Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
Detection of paper
left in Tray 2
Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-
function is reset.
Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC) is blocked when the Main Power Switch
is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC)
Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC)
Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
2 PC9-PC I/O check, Sensor check PWB-Z-PC PJ6Z PC-8 (ON) S-25
5 M1-PC operation check PWB-Z-PC PJ5Z PC-1 to 4 M-24
6 Change PWB-Z-PC
7 Change PWB-M
321
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.5 Misfeed at Manual Bypass feed section
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Manual
Bypass feed
section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor
(PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Feed
Clutch (CL5) has been energized.
Manual Bypass
feed section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
front of the Registration Roller at Bypass feed.
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
3 CL5 operation check PWB-M CNTRY1-2 (ON) C-7 to 8
4 Change PWB-M
322
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.6 Misfeed at LCT feed and LCT vertical transport section (PC-403)
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at LCT
feed section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take-up Sensor (PC1-
LCT) or Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the Take-up Motor (M1-LCT) has been energized.
Detection of
misfeed at LCT
vertical transport
section
The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) is not blocked even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC2-LCT).
The Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of
a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
LCT Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
front of the Registration Roller at LCT feed.
Detection of paper
left in LCT
The Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch
reset.
Paper Take-up Sensor (PC1-LCT)
Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT)
Take-up Motor (M1-LCT)
Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
3 PC1-LCT I/O check, Sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT
PJ5C1 LCT-2 (ON)
PC-403 C-7
4 PC2-LCT I/O check, Sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT
PJ5C1 LCT-5 (ON)
PC-403 C-7
6 M1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 PC-403 C-8
7 Change PWB-C1 LCT
8 Change PWB-M
323
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.7 Misfeed at Tray 3 Feed and Tray 3 vertical transport section (PC-103/PC203)
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Tray 3
feed or Vertical
Transport Section
(PC117-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Take-up
Motor (M122-PC) has been energized.
of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 3 Vertical Transport
Sensor (PC117-PC).
The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is not unblocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
Tray 3 Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
Detection of paper
left in Tray 3
The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
The Tray 3 Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PC) is blocked when the Main Power Switch
reset.
Tray 3 Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PC)
Tray3 Take-up Motor (M122-PC)
Control Board (PWB-C2 PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
3 PC116-PC I/O check, Sensor check PWB-C2 PC PJ6C2 PC-8 (ON) PC-103/203 C-4
4 PC117-PC I/O check, Sensor check
PWB-C2 PC
PJ6C2 PC-11 (ON)
PC-103/203 C-4
6 M122-PC operation check PWB-C2 PC PJ5C2 PC-1 to 4 PC-103/203 C-4
7 Change PWB-C2 PC
8 Change PWB-M
324
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.8 Misfeed at Tray 4 Feed and Tray 4 vertical transport section (PC203)
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Tray 4
feed or Vertical
Transport Section
(PC126-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Take-up
Motor (M123-PC) has been energized.
The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is not blocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 4 Vertical
Transport Sensor (PC126-PC).
The Tray 4 Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PC) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.
Tray 4 Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
Detection of paper
left in Tray 4
The Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PC) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
The Tray 4 Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PC) is blocked when the Main Power Switch
reset.
Tray 4 Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
PWB-C2 PC
PJ10C2 PC-8 (ON)
PC-103/203 G-6
PWB-C2 PC
PJ11C2 PC-2 (ON)
PC-103/203 G-6
PWB-C2 PC
PJ6C2 PC-11 (ON)
PC-103/203 C-4
6 M123-PC operation check PWB-C2 PC PJ9C2 PC-1 to 4
PC-103/203
G-6 to 7
7 Change PWB-C2 PC
8 Change PWB-M
325
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.9 Misfeed at Duplex transport section (AD-503)
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Duplex
Transport section
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not blocked even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport
Sensor 1 (PC1 DU).
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) is not unblocked even after the
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not unblocked even after the
Detection of paper
left in Duplex
Transport Section
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
(PC2 DU) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU)
Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M1 DU)
Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2 DU)
Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
2 PC1 DU I/O check, Sensor check Q-21
4 M1 DU operation check PWB-A DU PJ4A DU-1 to 4 R-22
6 Change PWB-A DU
7 Change PWB-M
326
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.10 Misfeed at Duplex Unit pre-registration section (AD-503)
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Duplex
pre-registration
section
given period of time after a Duplex paper feed sequence has been started.
Duplex Unit Pre-
registration section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
detection
front of the Registration Roller at pre-registration feed.
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
5 Change PWB-A DU
6 Change PWB-M
327
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
15.3.11 Misfeed at Fusing/Exit section
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Fusing/
Exit Section
PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper
has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC2).
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) is not blocked even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor (PC2) has been unblocked by the
paper during a switchback sequence.
Detection of paper
left in Exit Section
Exit Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON, a door or
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Exit Sensor (PC2)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
4 Change PWB-A DU
5 Change PWB-M
16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
328
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16. Malfunction code
16.1 Alert code
The machines CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the
State Confirm screen.
4038F4E512DA
Maintenance call mark
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 16. Malfunction code
329
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.1.1 Alert list
If an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code
appears.
Code Item Description
S-1 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment
value is faulty.
P-5 IDC Sensor (Front) failure All outputs of Sensor photoreceiver section from the
detection point (unprinted surface on the Image Trans-
fer Belt) are 0.5 V or less or 4.3 V or more at output
checking during IDC/Registration Sensor adjustment.
All outputs of Sensor photoreceiver section from the
detection point (unprinted surface on the Image Trans-
fer Belt) are 1.9 V or less or 4.4 V or more at density
setting during IDC/Registration Sensor adjustment.
The output of Sensor photoreceiver section from the
detection point (toner pattern on the Image Transfer
Belt) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.
P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure
P-6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure All density readings taken from the density pattern pro-
duced on the Transfer Belt are 0.5 g/m
2
(IDC Sensor
photoreceiver output) or less during max. density
adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment).
All density readings taken from the density pattern pro-
duced on the Transfer Belt are 4.5 g/m
2
(IDC Sensor
Photoreceiver output) or more during max. density
adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment.)
P-7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure
P-8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure
P-9 Black Imaging Unit failure
P-21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure The number of points detected in the main scan direc-
tion is more or less than the specified value during
main scan direction registration correction.
The number of points detected in the Sub Scan Direc-
tion is more or less than the specified value during sub
scan direction registration correction.
P-22 Color Shift Adjust failure The color shift amount is greater than the specified
range during main scan direction registration correction.
The color shift amount is greater than the specified
range during sub scan direction registration correction.
The skew correction amount is greater than the speci-
fied value.
P-26 1st Image Transfer ATVC (K) failure An abnormal average value is detected during an
adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of
Black.
P-27 2nd Image Transfer ATVC failure An abnormal average value is detected during an
adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value.
P-29 1st Image Transfer ATVC (color)
failure
An abnormal average value is detected during an
adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of
color.
P-30 Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction The output from the Color PC Drive Main and Sub Sen-
sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of
1,000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning sta-
bly and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0).
P-31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction The output from the Black PC Drive Main and Sub Sen-
sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of
1,000 ms while the Main Motor is turning stably and the
Lock signal is active (LOW-0).
330
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.2 Solution
16.2.1 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
16.2.2 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure
16.2.3 P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure
Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A)
Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
Step Action
1 Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty.
2 Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.
3 Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty
4 Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty, or change Scanner.
5 Change PWB-A.
6 Change PWB-C.
IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (SE1)
IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (SE2)
High Voltage Unit (HV1)
Image Transfer Belt Unit
Step Action
1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty
2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.
3 Reinstall or reconnect SE1 or SE2 if it is installed or connected improperly.
4 Clean SE1 or SE2 if it is dirty
5 Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
6
Open and close the Left Door, run an image stabilization sequence, and select [State Confirma-
tion] [Level History 1] to check the IDC value. IDC1: SE1, IDC2: SE2
If the value is 1.0 V or less, change SE1 or SE2.
7 Change PWB-M
331
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.2.4 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure
16.2.5 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure
16.2.6 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure
16.2.7 P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure
16.2.8 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure
16.2.9 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure
Imaging Unit /C
Imaging Unit /M
Imaging Unit /Y
Imaging Unit /K
Step Action
1
Select [Imaging Process Adjustment] [D Max Density] and, if the setting value is negative,
readjust.
2 Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.
3
Clean the IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (SE1) or IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (SE2) window if
dirty.
4 Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty
5 Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
6 Change Imaging Unit.
7 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit.
Step Action
1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty
2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.
IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (SE1) IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (SE2)
Step Action
1 Slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall it in position.
2 Reinstall or reconnect SE1 or SE2 if it is installed or connected improperly.
3 Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary.
332
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.2.10 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure
16.2.11 P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure
16.2.12 P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure
16.2.13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction
*1: Faulty sensor check procedure
1. Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine.
2. Call the [Sensor Check] screen to the screen by way of Service Mode.
For details how to display, see Adjustment /Setting.
3. Close the Front Door and start [Stabilizer].
4. During the Stabilizer sequence, check to see if the values of the phase detection sen-
sors (Color PC Drive Main/Sub Sensors) change.
5. A sensor is faulty if its value does not change.
Step Action
1
Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV1 for connection and clean or correct
the contact as necessary.
2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit.
3 Change HV1.
4 Change PWB-M.
Color PC Drive Main Sensor (PC17)
Color PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC18)
Transport Drive Assy
Step Action
1 Perform the faulty sensor check procedure *1.
2
Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and
proper connector connection.
3 Wipe the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, clean of dirt if any.
4 If P-30 occurs again, change the Transport Drive Assy.
5 Change PWB-M.
333
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.2.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction
*1: Faulty sensor check procedure
1. Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine.
2. Call the [Sensor Check] screen to the screen by way of Service Mode.
For details how to display, see Adjustment /Setting.
3. Close the Front Door and start [Stabilizer].
4. During the Stabilizer sequence, check to see if the values of the phase detection sen-
sors (Black PC Drive Main/Sub Sensors) change.
5. A sensor is faulty if its value does not change.
Black PC Drive Main Sensor (PC15)
Black PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC16)
Transport Drive Assy
Step Action
1 Perform the faulty sensor check procedure *1.
2
Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and
proper connector connection.
3 Wipe the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, clean of dirt if any.
4 If P-31 persists, change the Transport Drive Assy.
5 Change PWB-M.
334
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.3 Trouble code
The machines CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
16.3.1 Trouble code list
* For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the cor-
responding option.
4038F4E513DA
Code Item Description Rank
C0001 LCT Connection failed See PC-403 Service Manual. B
C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor
malfunction
B
C0204 Tray 2 Elevator failure The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the lifting
motion has been started.
B
C0206 Tray 3 Elevator failure See PC-103/PC-203 Service Manual. B
C0208 Tray 4 Elevator failure B
C0209 LCT Elevator Motor malfunction
(Elevator malfunction)
See PC-403 Service Manual.
B
C0210 LCT ascent motion failure B
C0211 Manual Tray Rise Descent Error The Bypass Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even
when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has
turned for a given number of pulses after the
sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the
standby position to the feed position was started.
The Bypass Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even
when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has
turned for a given number of pulses after the
sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the
feed position to the standby position was started.
B
C0212 LCT ejection failure See PC-403 Service Manual. B
C0213 LCT Shift Gate malfunction B
C0214 LCT shifting failure B
C0215 LCT Shift Motor malfunction B
335
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C0301 Suction Fan Motor's failure to
turn
The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter-
mined continuous period of time while the Motor
remains stationary.
B
C1180 Finishing option transport
system malfunction
See FS-501 or FS-603 Service Manual.
B
C1181 Finishing option Paddle Motor
malfunction
B
C1182 Finishing option Shift Motor
mechanism malfunction
B
C1183 Finishing option Elevator drive
malfunction
B
C1190 Finishing option Aligning Bar
moving mechanism malfunction
B
C1192 Finishing option Front Aligning
Motor malfunction
B
C1193 Finishing option Rear Aligning
Motor malfunction
B
C11A1 Finishing option Exit Roller
pressure/retraction failure
B
C11A2 Finishing option Storage Roller
pressure/retraction failure
B
C11A4 Finishing option Exit Motor
malfunction
B
C11B0 Finishing option Stapler Unit CD
drive failure
B
C11B1 Finishing option Stapler Unit
Slide Motor malfunction
B
C11B2 Finishing option stapling
mechanism malfunction 1
B
C11B4 Finishing option Staple/Folding
Motor malfunction
B
C11C1 Finishing option Punch Cam
Motor drive failure
C
C11C2 Finishing option Punch Unit
Board malfunction
C
C11C3 Finishing option Punch Side
Registration Motor malfunction
C
C11C5 Finishing option Punch Sensor
malfunction
C
C1401 Finishing option Backup RAM
failure
B
336
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller
Separation
The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
doesnt turn ON (Retracting) even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the 2nd Image
Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started
rotating during the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is
retracting.
The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor
doesnt turn OFF (Pressuring) even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd
Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has
started rotating during the 2nd Image Transfer
Roller is pressuring.
B
C2152 Transfer Belt Separation The 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Posi-
tion Sensor doesn't turn ON (Retracting) even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Clutch
has turned ON during the Transfer Belt is retract-
ing.
The 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Posi-
tion Sensor doesn't turn OFF (Pressuring) even
has turned ON during the Transfer Belt is pressur-
ing.
B
C2253 Color PC Drum Motor's failure to
turn
The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede-
termined continuous period of time while the
Motor is turning.
B
C2254 Color PC Drum Motor's turning
at abnormal timing
The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a prede-
Motor remains stationary.
B
C2255 Color Developing Motor's failure
to turn
The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede-
Motor is turning.
B
C2256 Color Developing Motor's turning
at abnormal timing
B
C2451 Transfer Cleaner Unit New
Article Release
A new installation is not detected when a new
Transfer Cleaner Unit (Image Transfer Belt Unit) is
installed.
B
C2551 Abnormally low toner density
detected Cyan TCR Sensor
TC ratio in the developing machine, which is
determined by Toner replenishing amount control
mechanism, is 5 % or less for a given number of
times consecutively.
B
C2552 Abnormally high toner density
detected Cyan TCR Sensor
mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number
of times consecutively.
B
detected Magenta TCR Sensor
B
337
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
detected Magenta TCR Sensor
B
detected Yellow TCR Sensor
B
detected Yellow TCR Sensor
B
detected Black TCR Sensor
B
detected Black TCR Sensor
B
C2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment
failure
TCR Sensor automatic adjustment does not func-
tion properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate
value.
B
C255A Magenta TCR Sensor
adjustment failure
B
C255B Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment
failure
B
C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment
failure
B
C2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM
access error
The re-written data, which has been read out,
checked and founded as error, is read out again
and found as error.
The error was found when reading out the counter
value.
C
C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM
access error
C
C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM
access error
C
C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM
access error
C
C2A01 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM
access error
The re-written data, which has been read out,
checked and founded as error, is read out again
and found as error.
The error was found when reading out the counter
value.
C
C2A02 Magenta Toner Cartridge
EEPROM access error
C
C2A03 Yellow Toner Cartridge
EEPROM access error
C
C2A04 Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM
access error
C
C3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1s
failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2s
failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
338
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C3451 Heat. Heater Trouble The Heating Roller Thermistor/1 (TH1) and the
Heating Roller Thermistor/2 (TH3) fails to raise a
given degree of temperature even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the Heating Roller
Heater lamp/1 (H1) is turned ON.
The detected temperature of the Heating Roller
Thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower for a given level of
degree than one of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor/1 (TH2) after the Front Door is opened
or closed, the Main Power Switch is turned ON or
TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
The counter value of zero cross signal input is not
updated for a given period of time.
A
C3452 Press. Heater Trouble The Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2)
fails to raise a given degree of temperature even
Fusing Pressure Heater Lamp (H3) is turned ON.
The detected temperature of the Fusing Pressure
Roller Thermistor/1 (TH2) is lower for a given
level of degree than one of the Heating Roller
Thermistor/1 (TH1) after the Front Door is opened
or closed, the Main Power Switch is turned ON or
TROUBLE RESET is implemented.
A
C3461 New Fusing Unit New Article
Release
A new installation is not detected when a new
Fusing Unit is installed.
B
C3751 Abnormal High Temp. (Heater) The temperatures of the Heating Roller Ther-
mistor/1 (TH1) and the Heating Roller Thermistor/
2 (TH3) are higher than a given level of degree for
1 second or more uninterruptedly.
The Heater Relay is OFF.
A
C3752 Abnormal High Temp. (Press) The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of
degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly
before the Heater temperature control starts.
The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of
degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly after
the Heater temperature control starts.
A
C3851 Abnormal Low Temp. (Heater) The temperature of the Heating Roller Ther-
mistor/1 (TH1) is lower than a given level of
degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly dur-
ing Ready mode, Low Power mode or printing.
The temperature of the Heating Roller Ther-
mistor/2 (TH3) is lower than a given level of
A
C3852 Abnormal Low Temp. (Press) The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor /1 (TH2) is lower than a given level of
A
339
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C3A01 Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater
Roller
The temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor
/1 (TH1) goes down by a given level of degree
compared to the temperature of a given period of
time before when the paper passes on the Timing
Roller and blocks the Exit Sensor (PC2).
A
C3A02 Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure
Roller
The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller
Thermistor /1 (TH2) goes down by a given level of
degree compared to the temperature of a given
period of time before when the paper passes on
the Timing Roller and blocks the Exit Sensor
(PC2).
A
C4151 Polygon Motor/C failure to turn The Polygon motor fails to turn stably even after
the lapse of a given period of time after activating
the Polygon motor.
Motor Lock signal detects H for a given period
time consecutively during the Polygon motor is
rotating.
B
C4152 Polygon Motor/M failure to turn B
C4153 Polygon Motor/Y failure to turn B
C4154 Polygon Motor/K failure to turn
B
C4551 Laser malfunction (Cyan) SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of
a given period of time after staring the laser out-
put.
SOS signal is not detected for a given period of
time during printing or IDC sensor adjustment.
B
C4552 Laser malfunction (Magenta) B
C4553 Laser malfunction (Yellow) B
C4554 Laser malfunction (Black) B
C4705 Image Output Time Out No image data is output from the MFP Control
Board (PWB-MFP).
C
C4761 Compression hardware timeout The hardware involved with the compression
function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWB-
MFP) does not respond.
C
C4765 Extraction hardware timeout The hardware involved with the extraction func-
tion offered by the MFP Control Board (PWB-
MFP) does not respond.
C
C4770 JBIG0 Error The MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty. C
C4771 JBIG1 Error C
C4772 JBIG2 Error C
C4773 JBIG3 Error C
C4780 Compressor 0 command buffer
stop failure
C
stop failure
C
stop failure
C
stop failure
C
C5102 Main Motor's failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede-
Motor is turning.
B
C5103 Main Motor turning at abnormal
timing
B
340
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C5351 Power Supply Cooling Fan
Motor/1's failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
C5353 Cooling Fan Motor 2s failure to
turn
remains stationary.
B
C5354 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's
failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
C5357 Cooling Fan Motor/1s failure to
turn
remains stationary.
B
C5358 Power Supply Cooling Fan
Motor/2's failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
C6102 Drive Home Sensor
malfunction
The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the
Scanner located at its home position.
The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect a
Scanner even when the Scanner Motor has been
driven to move the Scanner over the maximum
traveling distance.
The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner
when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the
position, at which it blocks the Scanner Home
Sensor.
B
C6103 Slider Over Run The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner
at its home position during a period of time that
begins with the time when a prescan command
and a scan preparation command are executed
and ends when a home return command is exe-
cuted.
B
C6301 Scanner Cooling Fan Motors
failure to turn
remains stationary.
B
C6704 Image Input Time Out Image data is not input from the Image Process-
ing Board (PWB-C) to the MFP Control Board
(PWB-MFP).
C
C6751 CCD clamp/gain adjustment
failure
The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD
clamp adjustment.
The peak value of the output data is 64 or less
during a CCD gain adjustment.
B
C9401 Exposure Lamps failure to turn
ON
The output from the CCD Sensor is a predeter-
mined value or less during CCD Sensor gain
adjustment.
A
C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at
abnormal timing
The average output value of the CCD Sensor with
the Scanner at its standby position is a predeter-
mined value or more at the end of a scan job.
A
CA051 Standard controller configuration
failure
The controller of the MFP Control Board (PWB-
MFP) is faulty.
C
CA052 Controller hardware error A controller hardware error is detected in the net-
work I/F.
C
341
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CA053 Controller start failure A controller start failure is detected in the control-
ler interface.
C
CB001 FAX Board Error 1 See FK-502 Service Manual. C
CB002 FAX Board Error 2 C
CB003 FAX Board Error 3 C
CB051 FAX Board mount failure 1 C
CB052 FAX Board mount failure 2 C
CB110 FAX Driver Error: Instance Gen-
eration Error or Observer Regis-
tration Error
C
CB111 FAX Driver Error: Configuration
Space Initialization NG
C
CB112 FAX Driver Error: Semaphore
Acquisition, Release Error
C
CB113 FAX Driver Error: Sequence
Error among Main Body Tasks
C
CB114 FAX Driver Error: Message
Queue Control Error
C
CB115 FAX Driver Error: Main Body -
Sequence Error among FAX
Boards
C
CB116 FAX Driver Error: FAX Board
Nonresponse (Nonresponse
after Initialization)
C
CB117 FAX Driver Error: ACK Waiting
Timeout Error
C
CB118 FAX Driver Error: Receiving
Undefined Frame
C
CB119 FAX Driver Error: DMA Transfer
Error
C
CB120 JC Soft Error C
CB122 Device Error
(GA LOCAL SRAM)
C
CB123 Device Error (DRAM) C
CB125 Device Error (GA) C
CB126 Timeout Error due to Nonre-
sponse from DC during Suspen-
sion Process
C
sponse from CC during Suspen-
sion Process
C
sponse from LINE during Sus-
pension Process
C
sponse from File System/File
Driver during Suspension Pro-
cess
C
342
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CB130 MIF Driver Error: Driver Soft
Error
See FK-502 Service Manual.
C
CB131 MIF Driver Error: Reception
Frame Length Error from Main
C
CB132 MIF Driver Error: Reception
Frame Header Error from Main
C
CB133 MIF Driver Error: 232C i/f
Sequence Error
C
CB134 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM i/f
Sequence Error
C
CB135 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM CTL/
STL Register Error
C
CB136 MIF Driver Error: AKC Waiting
Timeout
C
CB137 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM
RESET Reception
C
CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC C
CB141 I/F Error with Main: I/F Error with
Driver
C
CB142 I/F Error with Main: Undefined
Command Reception
C
CB143 I/F Error with Main: Command
Frame Length Error
C
CB144 I/F Error with Main: Command
Parameter Length Error
C
CB145 I/F Error with Main: Undefined
Parameter
C
CB146 I/F Error with Main: Command/
Response Sequence Error
C
CB150 Line Control: External Class
Instance Acquisition Error
C
CB151 Line Control: Job Start Error
(Starting Job Parameter Error/
Child Job Generation Error)
C
CB152 Line Control: Doc Access Error
(Report Buf Access Error)
C
CB153 Line Control: Response Wait
Timeout from External Task
C
CB154 Line Control: Internal Que Table
Control Error (create/enque/
deque)
C
CB160 1 Destination Control: Instance
Generation Error
C
CB161 1 Destination Control: Timeout
Error
C
CB162 1 Destination Control: Interface
Error
C
343
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CB163 1 Destination Control: Message
Que Control Error
See FK-502 Service Manual.
C
CB164 1 Destination Control: Sema-
phore Acquisition Release Error
C
CB165 1 Destination Control: Observer
Registration Error
C
CB166 1 Destination Control: Reception
Resource Check Error
C
CB167 1 Destination Control: Deploy-
ment Error of Sending Image
Information
C
CB168 1 Destination Control: Serializa-
tion Error of Receiving Image
C
CB169 1 Destination Control: Access
Error to Quick Memory Data
C
CB170 Page Control: Internal Que Table
Control Error (create/enque/
deque)
C
CB171 Page Control: Instance Genera-
tion Error
C
CB172 Page Control: Timeout Error C
CB173 Page Control: Interface Error C
CB174 Page Control: Semaphore
Acquisition Release Error
C
CB175 Page Control: Observer Regis-
tration Error
C
CB176 Page Control: Unable to Check
TTI Domain
C
CB177 Page Control: Error Return from
TTI Rasterizer
C
CB178 Page Control: Receiving Job
Generation Error
C
CB185 Page Control: Receiving Data
Size Logic Error (Receiving Data
are not Multiples of DotLine)
C
CB186 Page Control: ImageBuf Acquisi-
tion (alloc) Error
C
CB187 Page Control: Error Return from
Compressor
C
CB188 Page Control: BandBuf Control
Error (newInstance/get/free)
C
CC001 Vendor connection failure It is detected that communications with the ven-
dor are interrupted for a given period of time or
more with Installed selected for the setting of
vendor installation.
C
CC151 ROM contents error upon
startup (MSC)
A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents
check of the MSC (PWB-MFP) during starting
C
startup (Scanner)
check of the PWB-C during starting.
C
344
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
startup (PRT)
check of the Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
during starting.
C
startup (PH)
check of the PH Interface Board (PWB-D) during
starting.
C
CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) The wrong model of firmware is detected in the
engine during the initial connection to the engine
is being checked.
C
CD002 JOB RAM save error The error in save of JOB data to the Memory/
Hard Disk and its read error are detected.
C
CD004 Hard disk access error Unable to communicate between the hard disk
and MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP).
C
CD005 Hard Disk Error 1 Hard disk is faulty. C
CD006 Hard Disk Error 2 C
CD00A Hard Disk Error 6 C
CD00B Hard Disk Error 7 C
CD00C Hard Disk Error 8 C
CD00D Hard Disk Error 9 C
CD00E Hard Disk Error A C
CD00F Hard disk data transfer error Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty. C
CD010 Hard disk unformat Unformatted hard disk is connected. C
CD011 Hard disk specifications error A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is
connected.
C
CD012 Encryption ASIC setting error Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is
detected during the machine is starting.
C
CD013 Encryption ASIC mounting error The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is
detected during the machine is starting.
C
CD2XX Trouble related to Security Contact the responsible people of KONIKA
MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures.
-
CDCXX Trouble related to Security Contact the responsible people of KONIKA
MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures.
-
CE001 Abnormal message queue MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty.
CE002 Message and Method parameter
failure
C
CE003 Task error C
CE004 Event error C
CE005 Memory access error C
CE006 Header access error C
CE007 DIMM initialize error C
CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction
occurring
An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of
the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP).
C
345
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
The machine displays an abort code (CFXXX) on the Touch Panel as it becomes unable
to process tasks properly through its software control.
When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and
connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
CEEE2 Scanner Section undefined
malfunction
An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner
Section.
C
CEEE3 Engine Section undefined
malfunction
An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine
Section (PWB-M, etc.).
C
Code Item Relevant Electrical Components, Units, and Options Rank
CF001 CT_SingleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF002 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF003 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF004 CT_Queue Full Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF011 ArrayLink Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF012 FAT Link Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF013 File Size Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF021 setDelayMessage Table
OverFlow
MFP Control Board
C
CF022 procSetBootParamTcpipAd-
dress() injustice
MFP Control Board
C
CF023 MsgQue OverFlow MFP Control Board C
CF031 getJobPageToIPE() page
number injustice
MFP Control Board
C
CF032 getJobHDDPageToIPE() page
number injustice
MFP Control Board
C
CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over MFP Control Board C
CF034 HDDQUEUE Over Flow MFP Control Board C
CF041 getAPPPtrFromAPPID()
abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF042 getAPPIndexFromAPPID()
abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF051 CC_InputPageEntry:operator[]
page injustice
MFP Control Board
C
CF061 IdeCommand_Set() status
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF062 IdeCommand_Set() parameter
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF091 PCI ASIC1 ERROR MFP Control Board C
CF101 SCAN TIME OUT MFP Control Board C
CF111 Compress TIME OUT MFP Control Board C
CF112 Compress Table OverFlow MFP Control Board C
CF113 Compress Table check MFP Control Board C
346
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CF121 Expand TIME OUT MFP Control Board C
CF122 Expand Table OverFlow MFP Control Board C
CF123 Expand ExpandLine Abnormal MFP Control Board C
CF131 Print TIME OUT MFP Control Board C
CF201 startIRReadAnd
Compress()Sequence
MFP Control Board
C
CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF203 convAPItoIJCParameter()page
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF204 calcCompresserUse()CmpEx-
pID Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane()
Table OverFlow
MFP Control Board
C
CF212 convAPItoIJCParameter()page
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF213 calcExpandUse() CmpExpID
Abnormal
MFP Control Board
C
CF221 startPrintOutput outputsize zero MFP Control Board C
CF222 Next request comes during
processing of startPrintOutput ()
MFP Control Board
C
CF223 Next request comes during
processing of startWorkLoad-
Output ()
MFP Control Board
C
CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout MFP Control Board C
CF411 Parity error MFP Control Board C
CF421 Overrun error MFP Control Board C
CF431 Parity error + Overrun error MFP Control Board C
CF441 Framing error MFP Control Board C
CF451 Parity error + Framing error MFP Control Board C
CF461 Overrun error + Framing error MFP Control Board C
CF471 Parity error + Overrun error +
Framing error
MFP Control Board
C
Framing error
MFP Control Board
C
347
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Framing error
MFP Control Board
C
CF580 Frame distortion of ADF MFP Control Board C
CF600 Report receiving of print start
that is out of sequence
MFP Control Board/Engine
C
CF601 Report receiving of paper feed-
ing that is out of sequence
C
CF604 Outside IF/Command Queue MFP Control Board C
CF614 Output sequence Queue MFP Control Board C
CF624 Panel LCD date Queue MFP Control Board C
CF704 Common data Delete-waiting
HDD accumulated job ID
Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF714 IRC/Command Queue MFP Control Board C
CF724 Engine/Command Queue MFP Control Board/Engine C
CF734 Panel/Command Queue MFP Control Board/Control Panel C
CF744 File Memory Transfer start-wait-
ing Command Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF754 File Memory Compression
requesting Command Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF764 Panel instruction delete job
Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF774 Warning delete job Queue MFP Control Board C
CF784 Application instruction delete job
Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF794 Output page information for
Duplex back side Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF7A4 Paper feed completion output
pate information Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF7B4 Exposure compaction output
page information Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output
page information Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data
Queue
MFP Control Board
C
CF7E4 Direct Key data Queue MFP Control Board C
CF802 SIO Sending Port...ENG MFP Control Board/Engine C
CF806 SIO Sending Port...IRC MFP Control Board C
CF812 SIO Sending Port...Fiery MFP Control Board C
CF815 SIO Sending Port...
PIC/PIC Terminal
MFP Control Board
C
CF8ED SIO Sending Port...EPNet MFP Control Board C
CF902 SIO Receiving Port...ENG MFP Control Board/Engine C
CF906 SIO Receiving Port...IRC MFP Control Board C
348
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CF912 SIO Receiving Port...Fiery MFP Control Board C
CF915 SIO Receiving Port...
PIC/PIC Terminal
MFP Control Board
C
CF9ED SIO Receiving Port...EPNet MFP Control Board C
CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh()
No applied thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA02 chkEnableAllocExec() default
error
MFP Control Board
C
CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum()
error
MFP Control Board
C
CFA04 Application ID error MFP Control Board C
CFA05 Thread selection image process-
ing mode error
MFP Control Board
C
CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh()
No applied thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA07 setBufBandFromOut()
No applied thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA08 chkStartOutput() No applied
thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA09 rptReleaseMemResultACS()
No applied thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA10 rptEndBandTrans() No applied
thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied
thread
MFP Control Board
C
CFA12 CC_ImgTransInfo:allocTransIn-
dex
MFP Control Board
C
CFA13 CC_MultiThreadProfile:rptBuf2
MemClrEnd
MFP Control Board
C
CFA21 Outside image input start MFP Control Board C
CFA22 Inside image outside output start MFP Control Board C
CFA23 Engine Input start MFP Control Board C
CFA24 Buffer memory -> File memory
transfer Start
MFP Control Board
C
CFA25 BTC compression/CMM start MFP Control Board C
CFA26 Inside image PCIBridegDMA
input/output start
MFP Control Board
C
CFA27 File memory -> Buffer memory
transfer Start
MFP Control Board
C
CFA28 BTC extension start MFP Control Board C
CFA29 JPEG compression start MFP Control Board C
CFA30 JPEG extension start MFP Control Board C
CFA31 Software resolution conversion
start
MFP Control Board
C
CFA32 Hardware resolution conversion
start
MFP Control Board
C
349
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CFA33 Software rotating processing
start
MFP Control Board
C
CFA34 Other Sequence malfunction MFP Control Board C
CFA35 Buffer Array malfunction MFP Control Board C
CFA36 Thread Service malfunction MFP Control Board C
CFA37 Input image height 0 MFP Control Board C
CFA38 Output image width 0 MFP Control Board C
CFA41 pcbuf_exinput.cpp,h MFP Control Board C
CFA42 pcbuf_inout.cpp,h MFP Control Board C
CFA43 pcbuf_exoutput.cpp,h MFP Control Board C
CFA61 DMA A MFP Control Board C
CFA62 DMA B MFP Control Board C
CFA63 DMA C MFP Control Board C
CFA64 DMA D MFP Control Board C
CFA65 DMA E MFP Control Board C
CFA66 DMA F MFP Control Board C
CFA67 DMA G MFP Control Board C
CFA68 DMA H MFP Control Board C
CFA69 DMA I MFP Control Board C
CFA70 DMA J MFP Control Board C
CFA71 Interruption MFP Control Board C
CFA72 Common register setting MFP Control Board C
CFA73 PCIBridgeDMA MFP Control Board C
CFA74 BTC compression/Extension
device
MFP Control Board
C
CFA75 CMM MFP Control Board C
CFB52 DMA_A error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB53 DMA_B error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB54 DMA_C error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB55 DMA_D 0 error interruption MFP Control Board/Engine C
CFB59 DMA_E error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB5A DMA_F error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB5B DMA_G error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB5C DMA_H error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB5D DMA_I error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB5E DMA_J error interruption MFP Control Board/Engine C
CFB5F Watch Dog Timer Error interrup-
tion
MFP Control Board
C
CFB60 PCI slave error interruption MFP Control Board/FAX Board/Local I/F Board C
CFB61 Local bus error interruption MFP Control Board C
350
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CFB6E Underrun at DMA_D 0 image
output interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB6F Underrun at DMA_D 1 image
output interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB70 Underrun at DMA_D 2 image
output interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB71 Underrun at DMA_D 3 image
output interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB72 Underrun at DMA_G image out-
put interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB73 Overflow at DMA_A/B image
output interface 1
MFP Control Board
C
CFB74 Underrun at DMA_F ASIC 1
image output interface
MFP Control Board
C
CFB75 Overflow at DMA_C ASIC 1
image input interface
MFP Control Board
C
CFB76 Target abort MFP Control Board C
CFB77 Master abort MFP Control Board C
CFB78 Forced stoppage MFP Control Board C
CFB79 Retry error detection of PCI
master
MFP Control Board
C
CFB7A Master read data parity error MFP Control Board C
CFB7B Master write data parity error MFP Control Board C
CFB7C System error MFP Control Board C
CFB7D Slave read data parity error MFP Control Board C
CFB7E Slave write data parity error MFP Control Board C
CFB7F Address parity error MFP Control Board C
CFB80 DMA-M error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFB81 DMA-N0 error interruption MFP Control Board C
CFC01 Color Number faulty MFP Control Board C
CFC02 Thread Sequence malfunction MFP Control Board C
CFC03 Thread Service Sequence
malfunction
MFP Control Board
C
CFC04 Thread Message Q malfunction MFP Control Board C
CFC12 Output of output buffer 2
surpasses clear.
MFP Control Board
C
CFC13 Image transfer control informa-
tion acquisition malfunction
MFP Control Board
C
CFD00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of
DMA under operation and trans-
fer completion line=0: DMA_A0
MFP Control Board
C
351
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
MFP Control Board
C
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA_B0
MFP Control Board
C
MFP Control Board
C
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA_C
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA_D
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA_E
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA_F
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0A ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line=0: DMA_G
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line=0: DMA_H0
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line=0: DMA-I
MFP Control Board
C
CFD0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line=0: DMA-J
C
fer completion line=0: DMA PCI
Bridge
MFP Control Board
C
352
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
fer completion line=0: DMA 19
ASIC1
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA
JPEG
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA NO
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA-N
MFP Control Board
C
CFE00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_A1
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_A2
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_B0
MFP Control Board
C
MFP Control Board
C
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_C
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_D
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_E
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA_F
MFP Control Board
C
CFE0A ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line0: DMA_G
MFP Control Board
C
CFE0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line0: DMA_H0
MFP Control Board
C
353
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
CFE0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of
MFP Control Board
C
CFE0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of
MFP Control Board
C
CFE0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line0: DMA-I
MFP Control Board
C
CFE0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of
fer completion line0: DMA-J
C
fer completion line0: DMAPCI
Bridge
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA19
ASIC1
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA
JPEG
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line0: DMA NO
MFP Control Board
C
fer completion line=0: DMA-N
MFP Control Board
C
CFF00 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
DMA band preparation register
setting:DMA_A0
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_A1
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_A2
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_B0
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_B1
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_B2
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_C
MFP Control Board
C
354
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
setting:DMA_D
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_E
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA_F
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0A ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA_G
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0B ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA_H0
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0C ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA_H1
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0D ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA_H2
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0E ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA-I
MFP Control Board
C
CFF0F ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of
setting:DMA-J
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA PCI Bridge
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA 19 ASIC1
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA JPEG
MFP Control Board
C
setting:DMA NO
MFP Control Board
C
CFF15 ASIC10 Timeout Number of
setting: DMA-N
MFP Control Board
C
355
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.4 How to reset
Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble
code.
* List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures
Trouble Code Rank Resetting Procedures
Rank A
Trouble Reset
For details of Trouble Reset, see Adjustment/
Setting.
Rank B Opening/Closing the front door or Trouble Reset
Rank C Turning sub power switch OFF/ON
356
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5 Solution
16.5.1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure
16.5.2 C0211: Manual Tray Rise Descent Error
Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC)
Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the M3-PC connector for proper
connection and correct as necessary.

2
Check the connector of M3-PC for proper
drive coupling and correct as necessary.

5 Change PWB-Z-PC
Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC14)
Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the M2-PC connector for proper

2
Check the connector of M2-PC for proper

3 PC14 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-M CNTRY1-10 (ON) C-8 to 9
5 Change PWB-Z-PC
357
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.3 C0301: Suction Fan Motors failure to turn
16.5.4 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Right Door Assy
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the connector of motor for proper

2 Change the Right Door Assy
3 Change PWB-M
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Right Door Assy
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2 Change the Right Door Assy
3 Change PWB-M
358
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.5 C2152: Transfer Belt Separation
16.5.6 C2253: Color PC Drum Motors failure to turn
16.5.7 C2254: Color PC Drum Motors turning at abnormal timing
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Position
Sensor (PC6)
(CL3)
Main Motor (M1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the M1 connector for proper connec-
tion and correct as necessary.

2 PC6 I/O check, Sensor check
3 CL3 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-11 (ON) L-2
4
M1 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM)
PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)
L-2
5 Change PWB-M
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
Check the PWB-M connector for proper

4
M2 operation check (C0018) PWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM)
C-21
5 Change PWB-M
Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 M2 operation check
PWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM)
C-21
2 Change PWB-M
359
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.8 C2255: Color Developing Motors failure to turn
16.5.9 C2256: Color Developing Motors turning at abnormal timing
16.5.10 C2451: Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article Release
Color Developing Motor (M3) DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
Check the PU1 connector for proper

4

5
C-20 to 21
6 Change PU1
7 Change PWB-M
Color Developing Motor (M3) DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
C-20 to 21
2 Change PU1
3 Change PWB-M
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 Reinstall Unit
2 Change PWB-M
360
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.11 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor
16.5.12 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor
16.5.13 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor
16.5.14 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor
16.5.15 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor
16.5.16 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor
Imaging Unit /C
Imaging Unit /M
Imaging Unit /Y
Toner Supply Motor C/K (M6)
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M7)
MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if
image density is low.

2
Clean the TCR Sensor window on the
underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty

3
M6, M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)
PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)
C-20
C-21
4 Reinstall Imaging Unit
5 Change Imaging Unit
6 Change PWB-M
7 Change PWB-MFP.
Imaging Unit /C
Imaging Unit /M
Imaging Unit /Y
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

4 Change PWB-M
5 Change PWB-MFP
361
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.17 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor
16.5.18 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor
Imaging Unit /K
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if
image density is low.

2

3 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-21
5 Change Imaging Unit /K
6 Change PWB-M
7 Change PWB-MFP.
Imaging Unit /K Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Correct the TCR connection on the
underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty.

4 Change PWB-M
5 Change PWB-MFP
362
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.19 C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure
16.5.20 C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure
16.5.21 C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure
16.5.22 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure
Imaging Unit /C
Imaging Unit /M
Imaging Unit /Y
Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2
M6, M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)
PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)
C-20
C-21
5 Change PWB-M
6 Change PWB-MFP
Imaging Unit /K
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Clean or correct each contact of the
Imaging Unit if faulty.

2 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-21
3 Reinstall Imaging Unit /K
4 Change Imaging Unit /K
5 Change PWB-M
6 Change PWB-MFP
363
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.23 C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
16.5.24 C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
16.5.25 C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
16.5.26 C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error
16.5.27 C2A01: Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error
16.5.28 C2A02: Yellow Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error
16.5.29 C2A03: Magenta Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error
16.5.30 C2A04: Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error
Imaging Unit /C
Imaging Unit /M
Imaging Unit /Y
Imaging Unit /K
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Clean the connection between the Imaging
Unit and the machine if dirty

4 Change PWB-M
Toner Cartridge /C
Toner Cartridge /M
Toner Cartridge /Y
Toner Cartridge /K
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Clean the connection between the Toner Car-
tridge and the machine if dirty

2 Reinstall Toner Cartridge
3 Change Toner Cartridge
4 Change PWB-M
364
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.31 C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1s failure to turn
16.5.32 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2s failure to turn
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M11) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2
Check the fan for possible overload and
correct as necessary.

3
M11 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-12 (ON)
L-2
4 Change PWB-M
Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M13) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
L-1
4 Change PWB-M
365
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.33 C3451: Heat. Heater Trouble
16.5.34 C3452: Press. Heater Trouble
16.5.35 C3751: Abnormal High Temp. (Heater)
16.5.36 C3752: Abnormal High Temp. (Press)
16.5.37 C3851: Abnormal Low Temp. (Heater)
16.5.38 C3852: Abnormal Low Temp. (Press)
16.5.39 C3461: Fusing Unit New Article Release
Fusing Unit DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the Fusing Unit for correct installa-
tion (whether it is secured in position).

2
Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-M and PU1
for proper connection and correct or
change as necessary.

3 Change Fusing Unit
4 Change PWB-M
5 Change PU1
Fusing Unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2
Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-M for proper
connection and correct or change as nec-
essary.

3 Reinstall Fusing Unit
5 Change PWB-M
366
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.40 C3A01: Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater Roller
16.5.41 C3A02: Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure Roller
16.5.42 C4151: Polygon Motor/C failure to turn
16.5.43 C4152: Polygon Motor/M failure to turn
16.5.44 C4153: Polygon Motor/Y failure to turn
16.5.45 C4154: Polygon Motor/K failure to turn
Fusing Unit
Exit Sensor (PC2)
DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2
Check the Fusing Unit, PWB-M for proper
connection and correct or change as nec-
essary.

5 Change PWB-M
6 Change PU1
PH Unit PH Interface Board (PWB-D)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the connector for proper connection
and correct as necessary.

2 Change PH Unit
3 Change PWB-D
4 Change PWB-M
367
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.46 C4551: Laser malfunction (Cyan)
16.5.47 C4552: Laser malfunction (Magenta)
16.5.48 C4553: Laser malfunction (Yellow)
16.5.49 C4554: Laser malfunction (Black)
16.5.50 C4705: Image Output Time Out
PH Unit PH Interface Board (PWB-D)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the connector for proper connection

2 Change PH Unit
3 Change PWB-D
4 Change PWB-M
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Select [Service Mode] [State Confirma-
tion] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [Memory
Bus Check] [MemoryPRT].

2
Check the connectors on PWB-MFP for
proper connection and correct as neces-
sary.

3 Change PWB-MFP
368
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.51 C4761: Compression hardware timeout
16.5.52 C4765: Extraction hardware timeout
16.5.53 C4770: JBIG0 Error
16.5.54 C4771: JBIG1 Error
16.5.55 C4772: JBIG2 Error
16.5.56 C4773: JBIG3 Error
16.5.57 C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure
16.5.61 C5102: Main Motor's failure to turn
MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) DIMM0 (Work0)
DIMM1 (Work1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
When the error is displayed after the mem-
ory check, remove and insert the DIMM0
and DIMM1 again to recheck (C4765).

2 Change PWB-MFP
Main Motor (M1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the M1 connector for proper connec-
tion and correct as necessary.

2
Check M1 for proper drive coupling and

3
4
L-2
5 Change PWB-M
6 Change PU1
369
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.62 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing
16.5.63 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1s failure to turn
16.5.64 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2s failure to turn
Main Motor (M1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
L-2
2 Change PWB-M
3 Change PU1
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3 M8 operation check
PWB-M CNLV3-2 (ON)
PWB-M CNLV3-3 (LOCK)
C-25
4 Change PU1
Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
M22 operation check PWB-M CNR2FAN-4 (ON)
PWB-M CNR2FAN-6 (LOCK)
L-3
4 Change PWB-M
370
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.65 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motors failure to turn
16.5.66 C5357: Cooling Fan Motor/1s failure to turn
16.5.67 C5358: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2s failure to turn
Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
M14 operation check PWB-M CNLP-9 (ON)
PWB-M CNLP-11 (LOCK)
C-10
4 Change PWB-M
Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
C-20
4 Change PWB-M
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M9) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
M9 operation check PWB-M CNLP-15 (ON)
PWB-M CNLP-16 (LOCK)
C-9
4 Change PWB-M
371
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.68 C6102: Drive Home Sensor malfunction
16.5.69 C6103: Slider Over Run
16.5.70 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motors failure to turn
Scanner Home Sensor (PC201)
Scanner Motor (M201)
Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Correct or change the Scanner drive
(cable, pulley, gear, belt) if it is faulty.

2
Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if
loose.

3
Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and
[Feed Direction Adjustment].

4
Check the PC201, M201, PWB-IC and
PWB-C connector for proper connection

5 PC201 I/O check, Sensor check PWB-C PJ11C-8 (ON) T-13
6
M201 operation check PWB-IC PJ3IC-1 (REM)
PWB-IC PJ3IC-3 (LOCK)
Y-7
7 Change PWB-IC.
8 Change PWB-C.
Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202) Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2

3
M202 operation check PWB-C PJ81C-2 (REM)
PWB-C PJ81C-3 (LOCK)
T-10 to 11
4 Change PWB-C
5 Change PWB-M
372
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.71 C6704: Image Input Time Out
16.5.72 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Image Processing Board (PWB-C)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
tion] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [Memory
Bus Check] [ScannerMemory].

2
Check the connectors between PWB-C
and PWB-MFP for proper connection and

3 Change PWB-MFP
4 Change PWB-C
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Correct the harness connection between
PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty.

2
Check for possible extraneous light and

3
Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and
shading sheet if dirty

4
Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if
faulty, or change Scanner.

5 Change PWB-A
6 Change PWB-C
373
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.73 C9401: Exposure Lamps failure to turn ON
16.5.74 C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing
16.5.75 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure
16.5.76 CA052:Controller hardware error
16.5.77 CA053: Controller start failure
Scanner Assy
Flat Cable
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the flat cable for proper connection
and correct or change as necessary.

2 Change Scanner Assy
3 Change PWB-C
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check to see if the following setting has
been correctly made: [Service Mode]
[System 2] [Image Controller Setting].
If changing the setting, turn OFF the Main
Power SW and turn it ON again after 10
seconds or more.

2
Check the connectors of the MFP Control
Board (PWB-MFP) for proper connection

3 Change PWB-MFP
374
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.78 CC001: Vendor connection failure
16.5.79 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
16.5.80 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner)
16.5.81 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)
16.5.82 CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (PH)
16.5.83 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Coin Vendor (Japan)
Coin Vendor Kit (North America, Europe)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the Vendor connector for proper

2

3 Change PWB-M
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 Check the ROM version.
2
Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash
card.

3 Replace the appropriate board.
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 Check the ROM version.
2
Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash
card.

3 Change PWB-M
375
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.84 CD002: JOB RAM save error
16.5.85 CD004: Hard disk access error
16.5.86 CD005: Hard Disk Error 1
16.5.91 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6
16.5.92 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7
16.5.93 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8
16.5.94 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9
16.5.95 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A
16.5.96 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error
MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) Hard Disk
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the Hard Disk connector for proper

2 Format Hard Disk.
3 Change Hard Disk.
4 Change PWB-MFP.
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the Hard Disk connector for proper

2 Reinstall the Hard Disk.
3 Change Hard Disk.
4 Change PWB-MFP.
376
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.97 CD010: Hard disk unformat
16.5.98 CD011: Hard disk specifications error
16.5.99 CD012: Encryption ASIC setting error
16.5.100 CD013: Encryption ASIC mounting error
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
tion] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [HDD For-
mat].

2 Change Hard Disk
3 Change PWB-MFP
Hard Disk
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1 Check the hard disk specifications.
2 Change the hard disk.
Encryption ASIC
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Check the Encryption ASIC for proper
installation.

2 Change the Encryption ASIC.
377
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.101 CE001: Abnormal message queue
16.5.102 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure
16.5.103 CE003: Task error
16.5.104 CE004: Event error
16.5.105 CE005: Memory access error
16.5.106 CE006: Header access error
16.5.107 CE007: DIMM initialize error
16.5.108 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring
16.5.109 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
sary.

2 Change PWB-MFP.
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
sary.

2 Change PWB-MFP
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1
Correct the connector connection between
PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty.

2 Change PWB-C
3 Change PWB-A
378
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16.5.110 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location (Electri-
cal Component)
1

2 Change PWB-M
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 17. Power supply trouble
379
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
17. Power supply trouble
17.1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check)
17.2 Control panel indicators do not light.
Main Power Switch (S1)
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1-1
and 3 on PU1? Q to R-2 NO
Check the WIRING from
the wall outlet to S1
PJ1PU1.
2 Are the fuses (F1 and F2) on PU1 conducting? NO Change PU1.
3
Is DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1-2 on
PU1?
P-7 NO Change PU1.
4 Is DC5 V being input to PJ7PU1-3 on PU1? P-7 NO Change PU1.
5
Is DC5 V being input to CNPOW-4 on the Con-
trol Board? (LED on PWB-M does not blink.)
I-7
NO Change PU1.
YES Change PWB-M
Control Panel (UN201)
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is the I/F cable between the Scanner and
engine connected properly?
NO
Reconnect or change
the I/F cable.
2
Is a power voltage being applied across
PJ1PU1-1 and 3 on PU1? Q to R-2 NO
Check the WIRING from
the wall outlet to S1
PJ1PU1.
3 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting? NO Change PU1.
4
PU1 and DC24 V from PJ12PU1-2?
R-7
R-8
NO Change PU1.
5 Is PJ12C on PWB-C securely connected? X-10 to 11 NO Reconnect.
6
Is CN1UN201 on UN201 securely connected?
X-21
NO Reconnect.
YES
Change UN201.
Change PWB-C.
17. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
380
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
17.3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate
17.4 Power is not Supplied to Option
17.4.1 Power is not Supplied to ADF
17.4.2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet
Primary Interlock Switch (S2)
Fusing Unit
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is the power source voltage applied across
PJ2PU1-1 to 3 on PU1?
During this time, the Right Door should be
closed.
R to Q-6 NO
Check wiring from
power outlet to S2 to
PJ2PU1.
2
Is the power source voltage applied across
CN30-1 and 3, or across 2 and 3?
S-6 to 7
YES Fusing Unit
NO Change PU1.
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is DC24 V being output from CN51-1 on DF-
601?
Y-8 YES
Malfunction in DF-601
2
PU1?
Q to R-8 NO
Check wiring from PU1
to CN4 to ADF.
3
Is the fuse on PU1 conducting?
YES Change PU1.

NO Malfunction in DF-601
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector
CN12-2?
R-26 NO
Malfunction in Paper
Feed Cabinet
2
Is DC24 V being output from CNCST-2 on
PWB-M? J-23 NO
Check wiring from
PWB-M to CN12 to
Paper Feed Cabinet.
3
YES Change PU1.

NO
Malfunction in Paper
Feed Cabinet
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 17. Power supply trouble
381
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
17.4.3 Power is not Supplied to Automatic Duplex Unit
17.4.4 Finisher
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Is DC24 V being output from CN19-2 on
Duplex?
K-22 NO
Malfunction in Duplex.
2
Is DC24 V being output from CNDUP-2 on
PWB-M?
J-22 NO
Check wiring from
PWB-M to CN19 to
Duplex.
3
YES Change PU1.

NO Malfunction in Duplex.
Step Check Item
WIRING
DIAGRAM
(Location)
Result Action
1
Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to
CN60-11 and CN60-1, respectively, of the Fin-
isher?
E-26 to 27 NO
Malfunction in Finisher.
2
Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to
PJ6PU1-1 on PU1 and CNFIN-1 on PWB-M,
respectively?
R-8
G-26
NO
Check wiring from PU1
to PWB-M to Finisher.
3
YES Change PU1.

NO Malfunction in Finisher.
18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
382
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18. Image quality problem
18.1 How to read Element date
As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for State Confirmation
available from Service Mode can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem.
18.1.1 Table Number
4038F4E514DA
Vdc-C
Vdc-M
Vdc-Y
Vdc-K
Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
Standard values: Around 400 V
A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias)
Vg-C
Vg-M
Vg-Y
Vg-K
Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced.
Standard values: Around 500 V
A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
Relevant Components: Imaging Unit, High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias)
4038F4E517DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 18. Image quality problem
383
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.1.2 Level History 1
TCR-C
TCR-M
TCR-Y
TCR-K
Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).
Standard value: 8 2 %
Relevant Components: PH Unit, TCR Sensor K
IDC1
IDC2
Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0.01 V increments).
It should normally be around 4.3 V.
The output range is 0 V to 5 V.
Reading taken last means:
Latest toner density
When the Start key is pressed, the output value is displayed while a test print is being
produced.
Relevant Components: IDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit
Temp-Belt.
Temp-Press.
Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller (Temp-Heat) and the Fusing Pressure
Roller (Temp-Press.) (in 1 C increments).
Relevant Components: Fusing Unit
4038F4E515DA
384
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.1.3 Level History 2
IDC Sensor Adjust 1
IDC Sensor Adjust 2
Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.
It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255.
The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more.
Relevant Components: IDC Sensor, Transfer Belt Unit
ATVC -C
ATVC -M
ATVC -Y
ATVC -K
ATVC -2nd
Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type).
300 V to 3000 V (ATVC-C/-M/-Y/-K)
300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd)
Relevant Components: Transfer Belt Unit,
High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer, Neutralizing)
4038F4E516DA
385
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.2 How to identify problematic part
This chapter is divided into two parts: Initial Check Items and Troubleshooting Proce-
dure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.
When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the Initial Check Items and, if
the cause is yet to be identified, go to Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image
Quality Problem.
18.2.1 Initial Check Items
A. Initial Check Items 1
Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory,
and between memory and printer.
B. Initial Check Items 2
Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attrib-
utable to the Scanner or printer system.
Evaluation Procedure
Action Result Next Step
Enter the Service Mode, select [State Confirmation] [Memory/
HDD Adj.] [Memory Bus Check], and select and carry out
[ScannerMemory] and [MemoryPRT] checks.
OK Initial Check Items 2
NG 372, 367
(action as instructed)
4038F4C508DA
CCD Sensor Board PWB-A
Image Processing Board
PWB-C
MFP Control Board
PWB-MFP
PH Interface Board
PWB-D
Scanner
system
Printer
system
Document Scan
Test Print
I/F Cable
Image
Problem
Action Result Cause Next Step
Lines,
bands
From [Service Mode], select [Test Mode]
[Halftone Pattern] [SINGLE] [HYPER]
[Gradation] [CMYK] [Density
64], and produce a test print. Is image prob-
lem evident?
YES Printer Initial Check Items 3
NO Scanner 387
386
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C. Initial Check Items 3
If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print
and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors
Evaluation Procedure
4038F4C509DA
4 Colors
Mono Color
Image
Problem
Action Result Cause Next Step
Lines, bands From [Service Mode], select [Test Mode]
[Halftone Pattern] [SINGLE] [HYPER]
[Gradation] [CMYK] [Density
64], and produce a test print. Is image prob-
lem evident in each of all four colors?
YES
Printer,
4 colors
414
NO
Printer,
single color
400
387
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3 Solution
18.3.1 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub Scan
Direction, colored lines in Sub Scan Direction, and colored bands in Sub
Scan Direction
A. Typical Faulty Images
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
White lines in Sub
Scan Direction
White bands in Sub
Scan Direction
Color bands in Sub
Scan Direction
Color lines in Sub
Scan Direction
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3
Original Glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with
a soft cloth.
4
Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with
a soft cloth.
5
Mirror, lens, Exposure
Lamp, and reflectors
Mirror is dirty YES Clean.
Lens is dirty YES Clean.
Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean.
Reflectors are dirty YES Clean.
6
Machine Scan
Area Image Posi-
tion: Side Edge
(Service Mode)
The adjustment value for [Image
Position: Side Edge] falls within
the specified range.
NO Readjust.
7
The white lines/bands or colored
lines/bands are blurry.
YES Change Scanner Assy.
Change CCD Unit.
388
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.2 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main
Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, and colored bands in
Main Scan Direction
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0
White lines in Main
Scan Direction
White bands in Main
Scan Direction
Color bands in Main
Scan Direction
Color lines in Main
Scan Direction
3
Original Glass Original Glass is dirty.
YES
Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
4
Machine Scan
Area Image
Position: Top
Edge
(Service Mode)
The adjustment value for [Image
Position: Leading Edge] falls within
the specified range. NO
Readjust.
5
The problem has been eliminated
through the checks of steps up to 4.
NO
Change Scanner Assy.
Change CCD Unit.
389
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.3 Scanner System: color spots
AA
4036fs4029c0
3
Original Glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
4
NO Change Scanner Assy.
Change CCD Unit.
390
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.4 Scanner System: fog
4036fs4030c0
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
3
Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
deformed or hinges are broken.
4
soft cloth.
5
Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
6 Mirror, lens,
Exposure Lamp,
and reflectors
Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
7 Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
8 Exposure Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
9 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
10
Basic Screen
Quality/Density
The problem is eliminated when the
image is produced in the Manual
exposure setting.
NO Try another exposure level in
Manual.
11
Change CCD Unit.
391
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.5 Scanner System: blurred image, blotchy image
4036fs4031c0
1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2
Original Cover Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
3
Original Glass Original Glass tilts. YES Position Original Glass correctly.
Check original loading position.
4
2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage
Scanner is not aligned with the
2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage.
YES Perform Focus Positioning of the
Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Car-
riage and Scanner Position
Adjustment.
5
Change CCD Unit.
392
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.6 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in
main scan direction)
AA AA
4036fs4032c0
1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2
Original Cover Original Cover does not lie flat. YES Change Original Cover if it is
3 Scanner rails Foreign matter on rails. YES Clean and apply lubricant.
4 Drive Cables Cable kinks or is damaged. YES Correct or change.
5
Scanner Assy Scanner moves smoothly. NO Adjust the Scanner Motor timing
belt.
Change bushing.
Change Scanner Motor.
6
NO Change CCD Unit.
393
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.7 Scanner System: moire
4036fs4033c0
1
Original Moire distortions recur even after
the orientation of original has been
changed.
NO Change the original mode
(select one other than that
resulted in moire).
2
Basic Screen
Quality/Density
Moire distortions recur even after
the original mode has been
changed.
YES Select Text Mode or Photo
Mode.
3
Basic Screen
Zoom
NO Change the zoom ratio.
394
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.8 Scanner System: skewed image
A
A
4036fs4034c0
1 Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original.
2
Original Glass Original Glass is in positive contact
with the flat spring without being tilt.
NO Reinstall the glass.
Check the original loading posi-
tion.
3
2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage
Scanner Assy is not properly
aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Car-
riage.
Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Car-
riage and Scanner Position
Adjustment.
4
Change CCD Unit.
395
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.9 Scanner System: distorted image
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4035c0
1
Installation Machine is installed on a level sur-
face.
NO Reinstall.
2
2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage
Scanner Assy is not properly
aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Car-
riage.
Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors
Carriage and Scanner Position
Adjustment.
3
Scanner Motor Scanner Motor turns smoothly. NO Change belt.
Change Scanner Motor.
4
Change CCD Unit.
396
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.10 Scanner System: low image density, rough image
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
1 Original Original sticks to Original Glass. YES Reposition original.
2
soft cloth.
3
Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a
soft cloth.
4 Mirror, lens,
Exposure Lamp,
and reflectors
Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
5 Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Exposure Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
7 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
8
NO Clean Exposure Lamp.
Change Scanner Assy.
Change CCD Unit.
397
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.11 Scanner System: defective ACS
ABCDE
AA
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4037c0
Colored Area of Original
Black-and-White Area of Original
1
Auto Color Level
Adjustment
[User Setting]
The problem persists even after
the ACS Determination Level
Adjust function has been
changed.
YES Change the original loading direc-
tion. Make manual settings
according to the type of original.
(If the original contains a colored
area in one of its corners, the
machine may fail to properly
detect the colored area.)
398
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.12 Scanner System: blank copy, black copy
4036fs4038c0
Blank copy Black copy
4036fs4039c0
1
Cable connecting
Scanner and
printer
Connector is connected properly
with no pins bent.
NO Reconnect.
2
Image Processing
Board (PWB-C)
Connectors on the Image Pro-
cessing Board are connected
properly.
NO Reconnect.
3
CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD Unit are
connected properly.
NO Reconnect.
4
Test Mode
[Service Mode]
The problem is eliminated as
checked with the image on a test
pattern produced.
NO Change I/F connection cable.
5
Image Processing
Board (PWB-C)
The problem is eliminated after
the I/F connection cable has been
changed.
NO Change Image Processing
Board.
399
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.13 Scanner System: abnormal image
4036fs4040c0
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4041c0
AA
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4042c0
Data on previous page
Data on current page
1
Cable connecting
Scanner and
printer
Connector is connected properly
with no pins bent.
NO Reconnect.
2
Image Processing
Board (PWB-C)
Connectors on the Image Process-
ing Board are connected properly.
NO Reconnect.
3
MFP Control
Board (PWB-
MFP)
Data on previous page is mixed
with data on current page.
NO Reinstall expanded memory.
4
Test Mode
[Service Mode]
The problem is eliminated as
checked with the image on a test
pattern produced.
NO Change interface connection
cable.
5
Image Processing
Board (PWB-C)
The problem is eliminated after the
interface connection cable has
been changed.
NO Change Image Processing
Board.
6
MFP Control
Board
(PWB-MFP)
NO Change MFP Control Board.
400
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub
Scan Direction, colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction
White lines in Sub
Scan Direction
White bands in Sub
Scan Direction
Colored lines in Sub
Scan Direction
Colored bands in Sub
Scan Direction
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
1
Image check A white line or black line in sub
scan direction is sharp.
NO Clean the Comb Electrode by moving
the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever.
2
Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is
scratched.
YES Change Imaging Unit.
3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
4
Contact terminals make good con-
nection between each IU and
machine.
NO Clean contact terminals.
5
Developing bias contact terminal
makes good connection.
NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-
minal position.
6
PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is
dirty.
YES Clean with cleaning jig.
7
NO Change Imaging Unit.
Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
Change PH Unit.
401
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.15 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main
Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, colored bands in
Main Scan Direction
White lines in Main
Scan Direction
White bands in Main
Scan Direction
Colored lines in Main
Scan Direction
Colored bands in Main
Scan Direction
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0
1
Image check A white line or black line in sub
scan direction is sharp.
NO Clean the Comb Electrode by moving
the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever.
2
scratched.
4
Contact terminals make good con-
nection between each IU and
machine.
NO Clean contact terminals.
5
Developing bias contact terminal
NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-
minal position.
6
dirty.
7
Change PH Unit.
402
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0
1
High image
density original
Uneven density in Sub Scan Direc-
tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to
50 mm when a multi-copy cycle is
run using an original with high
image density (50% or more).
YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of
paper with no originals placed, as
the IU fails to keep up with a high
demand for toner.
2
scratched.
4
dirty.
5
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Cam gear operates properly. NO
6
NO Change IU.
Change PH Unit.
Change High Voltage Unit
(Image Transfer, Neutralizing).
403
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.17 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction
4036fs4046c0
4036fs4047c0
1
scratched.
3
dirty.
4
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Image Transfer Belt Unit makes
positive contact with plates on rails.
NO Check and correct contacts.
5 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
6
Change PH Unit.
404
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.18 Printer Monocolor: low image density
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
1
State Confirm
Table Number
(Service Mode)
Check data for Vg and Vdc.
Color Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
Black Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
NO Go to next step.
2 State Confirma-
tion Level His-
tory 1
(Service Mode)
Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
3
IDC output value is around 4.3 V. NO Clean IDC Sensor.
Check Image Transfer Belt for
damage.
4 Level History data
check results
Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 8.
5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 13.
6
TCR falling within specified range
and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
7
and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 13.
8 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
9
dirty.
10
TCR Sensor win-
dow
The color TCR Sensor window on
the LED Assy is dirty.
YES Clean.
11
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Image Transfer Belt Unit makes posi-
tive contact with plates on rails.
NO Check and correct contacts.
12
Cam gear operates properly. NO Change Image Transfer Belt
Unit.
13 Hopper Unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.
14 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.
15
Image Process
Adjustment
TCR Toner Supply
(Service Mode)
Toner is properly supplied when
TCR Toner Supply is run.
NO Go to next step.
405
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
16
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation Adjust
(Service Mode)
Conv. Value falls within the speci-
fied range as checked through Gra-
dation Adjust.
Max: 0 100
Highlight = 0 60
YES Go to step 19.
17
Image Process
Adjustment
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
through the adjust of D Max.
NO Go to next step.
18
Image Process
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Reset + Stabilizer
(Service Mode)
After the Reset + Stabilizer
sequence has been completed, run
Gradation Adjust.
NO Go to next step.
19
Change MFP Control
Board
Change PH Unit.
(Image Transfer, Neutraliz-
ing).
406
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.19 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure
4036fs4048c0
4036fs4049c0
1
Photo/Density Original type and screen pattern are
selected properly.
NO Change screen pattern.
3
dirty.
4
TCR Sensor win-
dow
TCR Sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.
5
State Confirma-
tion Level His-
tory 1
(Service Mode)
Check Image Transfer Belt for
damage.
6
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation
Adjust
(Service Mode)
dation Adjust.
Max: 0 100
Highlight = 0 60
YES Go to step 9.
7
Image Process
Adjustment
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
NO Go to next step.
8
Image Process
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Reset + Stabi-
lizer
(Service Mode)
Gradation Adjust;
NO Go to next step.
9
Change MFP Control Board
Change PH Unit.
407
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.20 Printer Monocolor: foggy background
4036fs4030c0
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
1
State Confirma-
tion Table
Number
(Service Mode)
Check data for Vg and Vb.
Color Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
Black Vdc: Around 400 V
Vg : Around 500 V
NO Go to next step.
2 State Confirma-
tion Level His-
tory 1
(Service Mode)
Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.
3
Check Transfer Belt for dam-
age.
4 Level History data
check results
Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 8.
5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 11.
6
and low Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 8.
7
and high Vg and Vdc
YES Go to step 11.
9
dirty.
10
TCR Sensor win-
dow
The color TCR Sensor window is
dirty.
YES Clean.
11
Image Process
Adjustment
Background Volt-
age Margin
(Service Mode)
The problem is eliminated after
Background Voltage Margin has
been adjusted.
NO Go to next step.
12
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation
Adjust
(Service Mode)
dation Adjust.
Max: 0 100
Highlight = 0 60
YES Go to step 15.
13
Image Process
Adjustment
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
NO Go to next step.
408
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
14
Image Process
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Reset + Stabilizer
(Service Mode)
Gradation Adjust.
NO Go to next step.
15
Change PH Unit.
409
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.21 Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots
4036fs4050c0
4036fs4051c0
Void areas White spots
1
Image Check There are void areas at the front
side or high density section.
YES 404
2
There is void area at the rear side
section.
YES Perform [Transfer Adjust] of
[Image Process Adjustment]
under Service Mode.
3
scratched.
5
Toner Cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in
the Toner Cartridge.
YES Remove foreign matter.
6
Installation
enviroment
Is the atmospheric pressure at the
installation site low?
YES Make the following adjustment:
[Service Mode] [Image Pro-
cess Adjustment] [Dev. Bias
Choice].
410
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.22 Printer Monocolor: colored spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
Colored spots
1
Imaging Unit Developing bias contact terminal
NO Clean contact terminal and
check terminal position.
2
The surface of the PC Drum is
scratched.
411
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.23 Printer Monocolor: blurred image
4036fs4031c0
Blurred image
1
dirty.
3
Change PH Unit.
412
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.24 Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy
Blank copy Black copy
4036fs4038c0
4036fs4039c0
1
Image Check A blank copy occurs. YES Check PH Unit connector for
proper connection.
2
Imaging Unit Coupling of IU drive mechanism
is installed properly.
NO Check and correct drive transmit-
ting coupling.
Change IU.
3
The PC Drum Charge Corona
voltage contact or PC Drum
ground contact of the Imaging
Unit is connected properly.
NO Check, clean, or correct the con-
tact.
4
High Voltage Unit
(Image Transfer,
Neutralizing)
Connector is connected properly. NO Reconnect.
5
through the check of step 4.
NO Change High Voltage Unit
Change PH Unit.
413
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.25 Printer Monocolor: uneven image
4138fs4507c0
1
Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every
color is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
2 PH Unit The PH Unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it.
3
Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm
pitch.
YES Replace the PH Unit Holder.
4
Toner Cartridge There is any stain or breakage on
the Drive section of the Toner
Cartridge.
YES
Clean/replace the Toner Car-
tridge.
5
Imaging Unit There is any stain, damage or
abrasion on the PC drum.
YES Replace the Imaging Unit.
6
Transfer Roller There is any stain, damage,
deformation or abrasion on the
Transfer roller.
YES Replace the Transfer Roller.
7
Fusing Unit There is any stain, damage,
Roller and Drive section of the
Fusing Unit.
YES Replace the Fusing unit.
8
NO
Replace the Image Transfer Belt
unit.
414
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.26 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan
direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub
scan direction
White lines in Sub
Scan Direction
White bands in Sub
Scan Direction
Colored bands in Sub
Scan Direction
Colored lines in Sub
Scan Direction
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
1
Image Check A white line or colored line in sub
scan direction.
YES Clean the Comb Electrode by
moving the Comb Electrode
Cleaning Lever.
2
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign
matter is evident on the Image
Transfer Belt.
YES Clean with specified solvent.
(See Maintenance.)
3
Image Transfer Belt is dirty or
scratched.
YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.
Change Image Transfer Belt Unit
if belt is damaged.
4
Cleaning Blade is not effective in
removing toner completely.
YES Clean Cleaning blade.
Change Image Transfer Belt
Unit.
5
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
Image Transfer Roller is dirty or
scratched.
YES Change 2nd Image Transfer
Roller Unit.
6
Paper path There is foreign matter on paper
path.
7
Image Transfer Paper Separator Fin-
gers are damaged or dirty.
YES Clean or change.
8
Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty
or damaged.
YES Clean.
Change Fusing Unit.
9
Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are
dirty.
YES Clean.
10
NO Change MFP Control Board
415
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main
scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in
main scan direction
White lines in Main
Scan Direction
White bands in
Main Scan Direction
Colored lines in Main
Scan Direction
Colored bands in
Main Scan Direction
4036fs4025c0
4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0
1
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Transfer Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
2
scratched.
if belt is damaged.
3
Cleaning Blade is not effective in
removing toner completely.
YES Clean Cleaning Blade.
change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
4
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
scratched.
Roller Unit.
5
path.
6
Image Transfer Paper Separator
Fingers are damaged or dirty.
7
Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is
dirty or damaged.
YES Clean.
Change Fusing Unit.
8
Fusing Paper Separator Fingers
are dirty.
YES Clean.
9
Neutralizing
Brush
The resistance values between the
Neutralizing brush and the ground
terminal is not .
NO Check the contact. Modify.
Change Neutralizing brush.
10
NO Change MFP Control Board
416
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.28 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction
4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0
1
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Transfer Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
2
scratched.
if belt is damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
Image Transfer Roller is installed
properly.
NO Reinstall.
5
scratched.
Roller Unit.
6
NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.
417
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction
4036fs4046c0
4036fs4047c0
1
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Transfer Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
2
scratched.
if belt is damaged.
3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
4
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
properly.
NO Reinstall.
5
scratched.
Roller Unit.
6
NO Change Image Transfer Belt
Unit.
418
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.30 Printer 4-Color: low image density
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
1
Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just
unwrapped from its package.
Install Paper Dehumidifying
Heater.
2
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
3
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
properly.
NO Reinstall.
4
scratched.
NO Change 2nd Image Transfer
Roller Unit.
5 IDC Sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
6
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation
Adjust
(Service Mode)
dation Adjust.
Max: 0 100
Highlight: 0 60
YES Go to step 9.
7
Image Process
Adjustment
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
through the adjust of D Max Den-
sity.
NO Go to next step.
8
Image Process
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Reset + Stabi-
lizer
(Service Mode)
Gradation Adjust.
NO Go to next step.
9
Unit.
419
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.31 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction
4036fs4058c0
1
Heater.
2
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.
3
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
properly.
NO Reinstall.
4
scratched.
NO Change Image Transfer Roller
Unit.
5 IDC Sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.
6
Image Process
Adjustment
Gradation
Adjust
(Service Mode)
dation Adjust.
Max: 0 100
Highlight: 0 60
YES Go to step 9.
7
Image Process
Adjustment
D Max Density
(Service Mode)
through the adjust of D Max Den-
sity.
NO Go to next step.
8
Image Process
Adjustment
Stabilizer
Reset + Stabi-
lizer
(Service Mode)
Gradation Adjust.
NO Go to next step.
9
Unit.
420
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.32 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration
AA AA
4036fs4032c0
1
Warning display The maintenance call mark is dis-
played on the panel.
YES Take action according to the
warning code shown on the State
Confirm screen.
2
Machine
condition
Vibration is given to the machine
after main power switch has been
turned ON.
YES Turn off the Main Power Switch
and turn it on again more than 10
seconds after.
3
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Transfer Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
4
scratched.
if belt is damaged.
5
Drive coupling to the machine is
dirty.
YES Clean.
6
scratched.
7
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
properly.
NO Reinstall.
8
scratched.
Roller Unit.
9
Machine
Fusing Trans-
port Speed
(Service Mode)
Brush effect or blurred image
occurs.
YES Readjust Fusing Transport
Speed.
10
Machine
Color regis-
tration Adjust-
ment
(Service Mode)
Check the specific color in which
color shift occurs.
YES Perform Color registration
Adjustment. If color shift is not
corrected even with a correction
of 1 dot, go to next step.
11
421
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.33 Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots
Void areas White spots
4036fs4050c0
4036fs4051c0
1
Image Check There are void areas at the front
side or high density section.
YES 419
2
There are void areas in the trailing
edge.
YES Perform [Transfer Adjust] of
[Image Process Adjustment]
under Service Mode.
3
Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign
matter is evident on the Transfer
Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
4
Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.
Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt
is damaged.
5
2nd ImageTrans-
fer Roller Unit
Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. YES Change 2nd Image Transfer
Roller Unit.
6
Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not
separated and ground terminal is
connected properly.
NO Correct or change.
7
path.
8
Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate is
damaged or dirty.
9
Unit.
422
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.34 Printer 4-Color: colored spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
1
scratched.
2
Image Transfer
Belt Unit
Transfer Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
3
scratched.
if belt is damaged.
4
2nd Image
Transfer Roller
Unit
scratched.
Roller Unit.
5
path.
6 Fusing Unit Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. YES Change Fusing Unit.
7
423
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.35 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset
C F
4036fs4059c0
C F
C F
4036fs4060c0
Offset Poor fusing performance
1 Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
2
Machine Setting
Fusing Tem-
perature
(Service Mode)
Changing fusing temperature elimi-
nates the problem of poor fusing
performance and offset.
YES Readjust Fusing Temperature.
3
NO Change Fusing Unit.
424
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.36 Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image
4036fs4061c0
Blurred image Brush effect
4036fs4031c0
1
Heater.
2 Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
3
dirty.
YES Clean.
4 Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. YES Change Fusing Unit.
5
Machine
Fusing Trans-
port Speed
(Service Mode)
Changing fusing speed eliminates
the problem of brush effect and
blurred image.
YES Readjust Fusing Transport
Speed.
425
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.37 Printer 4-Color: back marking
4036fs4062c0
AA
4036fs4063c0
1
2nd Image Trans-
fer Roller Unit
Image Transfer Roller is scratched
or dirty.
Roller Unit.
2
path.
3
scratched or dirty.
4
Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or
dirty.
YES Change Fusing Unit.
5
Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign
matter is evident on the Transfer
Belt.
(See Maintenance.)
6
Unit.
426
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
18.3.38 Printer 4-Color: uneven image
4138fs4507c0
1
Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every
color is surely installed.
NO Re-install it.
2 PH Unit The PH Unit is surely installed. NO Re-install it.
3
Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm
pitch.
YES Replace the PH Unit Holder.
4
Toner Cartridge There is any stain or breakage on
the Drive section of the Toner
Cartridge.
YES
Clean/replace the Toner Car-
tridge.
5
Imaging Unit There is any stain, damage or
abrasion on the PC drum.
YES Replace the Imaging Unit.
6
Transfer Roller There is any stain, damage,
Transfer roller.
YES Replace the Transfer Roller.
7
Fusing Unit There is any stain, damage,
Roller and Drive section of the
Fusing Unit.
YES Replace the Fusing unit.
8
NO
Replace the Image Transfer Belt
unit.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 19. Parts layout drawing
427
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
Appendix
19. Parts layout drawing
19.1 Main unit
19.1.1 IR section
[1] Original Size Detecting Sensor/2 (PC204) [7] Scanner Home Sensor (PC201)
[2] Image Processing Board (PWB-C) [8] Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202)
[3] CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) [9] Original Size Detecting Sensor/1 (PC203)
[4] Size Reset Switch (S201) [10] Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202)
[5] Inverter Board (PU201) [11] Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC)
[6] Exposure Lamp (FL201) [12] Scanner Motor (M201)
4038F5E513DA
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[10]
[9]
19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
428
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.1.2 Engine section
[1] IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE2) [7] Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
[2] Control Panel (UN201) [8] Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF)
[3] IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (SE1) [9] DIMM/0 (WORK0)
[4] High Voltage Unit (HV1) [10] DIMM/1 (WORK1)
[5] PH Interface Board (PWB-D) [11] NVRAM Board (PWB-NVR)
[6] DC Power Supply (PU1) [12] MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)
4038F5C506DA
[1]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
429
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] Fusing Drive Motor (M4) [8] Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12)
[2] Main Motor (M1) [9] Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)
[3] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11) [10] Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22)
[4] Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) [11] Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
[5] Color Developing Motor (M3) [12] Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
[6] Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M14) [13] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M13)
[7] Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M9)
4038F5C507DB
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
430
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] Right Door Switch (S5) [7] Front Door Switch/2 (S4)
[2] Primary Interlock Switch (S2) [8] Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
[3] PH Unit [9] Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA4)
[4] Main Power Switch (S1) [10] Main Erase Lamp/M (LA3)
[5] Total Counter (CNT1) [11] Main Erase Lamp/C (LA2)
[6] Front Door Switch/1 (S3) [12] Main Erase Lamp/K (LA1)
4038F5C509DA
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
431
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] Developing Clutch/K (CL4) [8] Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8)
[2] Exit Sensor (PC2) [9] Color PC Drive Main Sensor (PC17)
[3] Temperature/Humidity Sensor (SE3) [10] Color PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC18)
[4] Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) [11] Black PC Drive Main Sensor (PC15)
[5] OHP Sensor (PC4) [12] Black PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC16)
[6]
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Position Sensor (PC6)
[13]
1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction
Clutch (CL3)
[7] Registration Roller Clutch (CL1)
4038F5C511DB
[5]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[12]
[13]
[11]
432
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.1.3 Tray 1
[1] Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) [4] Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I)
[2] Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC10) [5] Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC11)
[3] Tray 1 CD Paper Size Sensor (PC9) [6] Tray 1 Device Detection Sensor (PC12)
4038F5C508DA
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
433
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.1.4 Tray 2/Multiple bypass tray
[1] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) [11] Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC)
[2] Tray 2 Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC) [12] Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC)
[3] Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC14) [13] Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)
[4] Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5) [14] Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC4-PC)
[5] Bypass Pick-Up Solenoid (SL2) [15] Tray 2 Set Sensor (PC2-PC)
[6] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) [16] Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC3-PC)
[7] Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC13) [17] Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC)
[8] Bypass Paper Size VR (UN1) [18] Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC1-PC)
[9] Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC9-PC) [19] Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC)
[10] Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC)
4038F5C504DA
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[19]
[1]
[2]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
434
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.2 DF-601 (Option)
[1] Exit Motor (M3-DF) [10] Empty Sensor (PC4-DF)
[2] Exit Cover Sensor (PC7-DF) [11] Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF)
[3] Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) [12] Registration Sensor (PC1-DF)
[4] Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) [13] Take-up Motor (M1-DF)
[5] Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) [14] Take-up Cover Sensor (PC3-DF)
[6] Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) [15] Transport Motor (M2-DF)
[7] Document Size Volume (R1-DF) [16] Control Board (PWB-A DF)
[8] Tray Open/Close Sensor (PC8-DF) [17] ROM (IC7-DF)
[9] Registration Clutch (CL1-DF)
4038F5C501DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
435
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.3 PC103/PC203 (Option)
[1] Tray 3 Vertical Transport Motor (M120-PC) [14] Tray 4 Near Empty Sensor (PC122-PC)
[2] Tray 3 Door Set Sensor (PC111-PC) [15]
Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor/2
(PC128-PC)
[3] Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC114-PC) [16]
(PC127-PC)
[4]
Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC117-PC)
[17] Tray 4 Paper Size Board (PWB-I/(4) PC)
[5] Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PC) [18]
Tray 4 Device Detection Sensor
(PC121-PC)
[6] Tray 3 Empty Sensor (PC115-PC) [19] Control Board (PWB-C2 PC)
[7]
Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC126-PC)
[20] Tray 3 Paper Size Board (PWB-I/(3) PC)
[8] Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PC) [21]
(PC118-PC)
[9] Tray 4 Empty Sensor (PC124-PC) [22]
Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
(PC119-PC)
[10] Tray 4 Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC123-PC) [23]
Tray 3 Device Detection Sensor
(PC112-PC)
[11] Tray4 Vertical Transport Motor (M121-PC) [24] Tray 3 Near Empty Sensor (PC113-PC)
[12] Tray4 Take-up Motor (M123-PC) [25] Tray 3 Lift-Up Motor (M124-PC)
[13] Tray 4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PC) [26] Tray3 Take-up Motor (M122-PC)
4037F5C511DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
436
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.4 PC-403 (Option)
[1] Vertical Transport Motor (M2-LCT) [13] Manual Button Down Board (NU1-LCT)
[2] Door Set Sensor (PC5-LCT) [14] Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT)
[3] Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) [15] Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT)
[4] Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) [16] Shift Tray Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT)
[5] Paper Take-up Motor (PC1-LCT) [17] Shift Tray Home Sensor (PC12-LCT)
[6] Paper Empty Sensor (PC3-LCT) [18] Division Board Motor (M3-LCT)
[7]
Main Tray Empty Sensor Board
(PWB-E LCT)
[19]
Division Board Position Sensor
(PC14-LCT)
[8] Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) [20] Motor Connection Board (PWB-N LCT)
[9]
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
(PC10-LCT)
[21] Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
[10] Lower Over Run Sensor (PC7-LCT) [22] Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT)
[11] Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) [23] Cassette Open Sensor (PC6-LCT)
[12] Shift Tray Motor (M4-LCT) [24] Take-up Motor (M1-LCT)
4037F5C512DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
437
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.5 AD-503 (Option)
[1] Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M1 DU) [4]
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
(in PWB-A DU) (PC2 DU)
[2] Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (PCI DU) [5] Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
[3] Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2 DU) [6]
Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1
(in PWB-A DU) (PC1 DU)
4038F5C512DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
438
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.6 FS-501 (Option)
[1] Upper Cover Sensor (PC18-FN) [12]
CD Aligning Home Position Sensor
(PC9-FN)
[2] 1st Tray Full Sensor (PC6-FN) [13] Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN)
[3] 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) [14] Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN)
[4] Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) [15] Shift Motor (M8-FN)
[5] Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) [16] Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN)
[6]
1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid
(SL2-FN)
[17] Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN)
[7] Front Door Sensor (PC17-FN) [18] Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN)
[8] Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) [19] CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
[9]
(S2-FN)
[20] Lower Paddle Motor (M9-FN)
[10]
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED
(PWB-C FN)
[21]
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ
(PWB-D FN)
[11] Elevator Motor (M7-FN) [22] Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
4038F5C502DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
439
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) [9] Exit Motor (M3-FN)
[2] Entrance Motor (M1-FN) [10]
Storage Roller Home Position Sensor
(PC12-FN)
[3]
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor
(M13-FN)
[11] Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN)
[4]
Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid
(SL1-FN)
[12] Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL3-FN)
[5]
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor
(M12-FN)
[13] Elevator Tray Full Sensor (PC7-FN)
[6] Set Switch (S1-FN) [14]
Exit Roller Home Position Sensor
(PC13-FN)
[7] ROM (IC3-FN) [15]
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch
(S3-FN)
[8] Control Board (PWB-A FN) [16] Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN)
4038F5C503DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[7]
440
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.7 JS-601 (Option)
[1] Job Tray Cover Sensor (PC21-FN) [3] Job Tray Full Sensor (PC20-FN)
[2] Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) [4] 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL-4)
4037F5C513DA
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
441
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.8 FS-603 (Option)
[1] Transport Motor (M1-FN) [10] Shift Motor (M6-FN)
[2] Entrance Motor (M9-FN) [11] Slide Motor (M8-FN)
[3] Saddle Clutch (CL1-FN) [12] Exit Motor (M3-FN)
[4] Joint Open Switch (MS2-FN) [13] Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
[5] Front Door Open Switch (MS1-FN) [14] ROM (IC6-FN)
[6] Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) [15] Staple Safety Switch (Rear) (MS3-FN)
[7] Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) [16] Paddle Motor (M2-FN)
[8] Staple Safety Switch (Front) (MS4-FN) [17] Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN)
[9] Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN)
4037F5C516DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
442
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) [11] Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN)
[2]
Folding Roller Home Position Sensor
(PI12-FN)
[12] Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN)
[3] Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) [13] Stack Full Sensor (PI24-FN)
[4] Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) [14] Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16-FN)
[5] Upper Cover Open Sensor (PI23-FN) [15] Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN)
[6] Front Door Open Sensor (PI22-FN) [16]
Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI5-FN)
[7]
Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI4-FN)
[17] Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN)
[8] Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN) [18] Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN)
[9] Exit Tray Sensor (PI8-FN) [19]
Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor
(PI14-FN)
[10] Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) [20]
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor
(PI3-FN)
4037F5C521DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
443
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.9 PK-501 (Option)
[1] Punch Motor (M1P-PK) [6] Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK)
[2] Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) [7] Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK)
[3] Punch Motor Clock Board (PI3P-PK) [8]
Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board
(PWB-E PK)
[4] Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK) [9] Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK)
[5] LED Board (PWD-D PK) [10] Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK)
4037F5C517DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
444
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
19.10 Horizontal Transport Unit
[1] Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) [3] Paper Sensor (PC1-HO)
[2] Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) [4] Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-HO)
4037F5C518DA
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 20. Connector layout drawing
445
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
20. Connector layout drawing
No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location
[1] CN57 U-14 [9] CN7 E-25
[2] CN80 K-3 [10] CN101 N-24
[3] CN43 E-10 [11] CN84 Q-23
[4] CN14 K to L-2 [12] CN5 D-7
[5] CN30 S-6 [13] CN4 E-7
[6] CN31 S-6 to 7 [14] CN23 E-9
[7] CN21 E-7 [15] CN54 U-13
[8] CN1 T-2 [16] CN38 E-11
Description
Number of Pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover.
Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.
1
4038F5C515DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[14]
[13]
[15]
[16]
[12]
[11]
[10]
20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
446
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] CN41 K-1 [9] CN44 K-23 to 24
[2] CN45 K-2 [10] CN40 E-10
[3] CN3 E-19 [11] CN18 E-11
[4] CN13 K-21 to 22 [12] CN60 E-26 to 27
[5] CN56 E-16 [13] CN19 K-22
[6] CN55 E-14 [14] CN59 K-2
[7] CN102 N-25 [15] CN10 Y-8
[8] CN107 Q to R-24 to 25 [16] CN11 U-10 to 11
4038F5C516DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[16]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[12]
[11]
[10]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 20. Connector layout drawing
447
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
[1] CN39 E-20 [7] CN28 E-8
[2] CN81 K to L-3 [8] CN27 E-7 to 8
[3] CN8 D-7 [9] CN29 E-9
[4] CN6 E-3 to 4 [10] CN32 E-12
[5] CN22 E-8 [11] CN9 E-2
[6] CN58 U-16 [12] CN25 U-15
4038F5C517DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
448
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
21. Timing chart
21.1 Main unit
Print request received
4038F5E514DA
Main Motor (M1)
Polygon Motor
Color PC Drum Motor (M2)
Color Developing
Motor (M3)
2nd Image Transfer
Pressure/Retraction
Motor (M5)
1st Image Transfer
pressure/retraction
Fusing Drive Motor (M4)
LD compulsion
luminescence
Color Developing Bias AC
Black Developing Bias AC
TOD Signal
Video Data (Y)
Video Data (M)
Video Data (C)
Video Data (K)
Main Erase Lamp/C (LA2)
Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA4)
Main Erase Lamp/M (LA3)
Main Erase Lamp/K (LA1)
Drum Charge Corona Bias
(Y/M/C/K)
Developing Bias DC
(Y/M/C/K)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 21. Timing chart
449
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
21.2 Automatic Document Feeder
1-sided mode
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
8
6
m
s
5
0
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
7
6
6
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
9
5
2
m
s
3
8
4
m
s
9
0
0
m
m
/
s
e
c
=
H
i
g
h
1
5
0
m
m
/
s
e
c
=
L
o
w
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
M
i
s
t
e
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
n
g

S
i
g
n
a
l

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
t
o

S
t
a
r
t
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
D
S
E
T

S
i
g
n
a
l

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
3
8
D
A
450
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
8
6
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
3
8
4
m
s
9
5
2
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
t
o

S
t
a
r
t
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
D
S
E
T

S
i
g
n
a
l

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
3
9
D
A
451
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
3
8
4
m
s
9
5
2
m
s
1
3
9
7
m
s
1
3
9
7
m
s
8
6
m
s
8
2
m
s
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
8
2
m
s
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
8
8
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
it
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
it
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t

D
S
E
T

S
i
g
n
a
l

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
D
S
E
T

S
i
g
n
a
l

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

T
i
m
e
3
8
4
m
s
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
0
D
A
452
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
8
2
m
sO
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
1
3
9
7
m
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
1
3
9
7
m
s
4
t
h

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
8
2
m
s
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
1
D
A
453
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
Mixed original detection mode
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
5
0
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
7
6
6
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
8
6
m
s
3
8
4
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
M
i
s
t
e
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
n
g

S
i
g
n
a
l

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
D
S
E
T

S
i
g
n
a
l

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

T
i
m
e
9
5
2
m
s
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
2
D
A
454
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
0
3
m
s
4
5
6
m
s
1
5
0
m
s
9
7
m
s
5
6
3
m
s
1
3
3
m
s
1
3
3
0
m
s
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
i
d
e

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
t
o

S
t
a
r
t
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
3
D
A
455
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
1
0
4
m
s
6
1
m
s
8
6
m
s
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
7
0
5
m
s
9
3
9
m
s
7
3
0
m
s
1
3
6
5
m
s
9
5
2
m
s
2
0
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

S
t
a
r
t
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)
E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
O
n

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

L
o
o
p

6
[
m
m
]
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y

T
a
k
e
-
u
p

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
4
D
A
456
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
1
0
3
m
s
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
1
s
t

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
t
o

S
t
a
r
t
4
5
6
m
s
1
5
0
m
s
9
7
m
s
5
6
3
m
s
5
6
3
m
s
1
3
3
0
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
i
d
e

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
5
D
A
457
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
8
6
m
s
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
9
3
9
m
s
7
3
0
m
s
1
3
6
5
m
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
2
0
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
L
o
w
H
i
g
h
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
2
n
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
6
D
A
458
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
1
0
3
m
s
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

(
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

S
i
d
e
)

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
4
5
6
m
s
1
5
0
m
s
9
7
m
s
5
6
3
m
s
1
3
3
0
m
s
1
3
3
m
s
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
R
e
v
e
r
s
e

s
i
d
e

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
7
D
A
459
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
1
8
1
m
s
3
1
5
m
s
9
3
9
m
s
2
0
m
s
1
3
6
5
m
s
3
r
d

O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

t
o

S
t
a
r
t
/
S
C
E
N
D
o
n
o
f
f
/
D
S
E
T
o
n
T
a
k
e
-
u
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
1
-
D
F
)
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
M
o
t
o
r
E
x
i
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
M
3
-
D
F
)
E
m
p
t
y

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
4
-
D
F
)
W
i
t
h

P
a
p
e
r
W
i
t
h
o
u
t

P
a
p
e
r
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
1
-
D
F
)
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
o
n
o
f
f
P
i
c
k
-
u
p

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
5
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
e
n
s
o
r

(
P
C
6
-
D
F
)
R
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

C
l
u
t
c
h

(
C
L
1
-
D
F
)
E
x
i
t

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
2
-
D
F
)
T
u
r
n
o
v
e
r

S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

(
S
L
1
-
D
F
)
o
f
f
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
(
M
2
-
D
F
)
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
C
W
o
f
f
C
C
W
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

E
x
i
t

T
i
m
e
4
0
3
7
F
5
E
5
4
8
D
A
460
b
i
z
h
u
b

C
2
5
0
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
Standard Controller
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
Standard Controller
General
1. Controller specifications .......................................................................................... 1
1.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Supporting client specifications ............................................................................ 2
Maintenance
2. Checking the controller firmware version ................................................................ 3
3. Firmware upgrade................................................................................................... 3
3.1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting...................................................................... 3
3.1.1 Service environment ..................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 Application to be used................................................................................... 3
3.1.3 Installing the Cygwin..................................................................................... 3
3.1.4 Writing into the Compact flash...................................................................... 7
3.2 Firmware rewriting .............................................................................................. 10
3.2.1 Updating method......................................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails................................................................. 11
Adjustment/Setting
4. Checking the Image Controller Setting.................................................................. 13
Troubleshooting
5. Checking the system configuration ....................................................................... 15
6. Status codes ......................................................................................................... 15
7. Troubleshooting procedures.................................................................................. 15
7.1 Unable to print over the network. ........................................................................ 15
7.2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. .................................................... 17
7.3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. ........................... 18
7.4 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to
E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed. ......................................................... 19
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Controller specifications
1
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
1. Controller specifications
1.1 Type
*1: The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required.
Type Built-in type controller
Print Speed
25 ppm (Color/B&W, A4 or 8-1/2 x 11 paper, and simplex)
23 ppm (Color/B&W, A4 or 8-1/2 x 11 paper, and duplex)
Printer Language
PCL5e/c Emulation
PCL6 (XL 2.1) Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3011.xx.xx)
CPU PPC750 FX 466 MHz
Program ROM 64 MB
RAM 512 MB
Hard Disk 40 GB
Host Interface
Standard: Ethernet (10Base-T or 100Base-TX)
Optional: USB 1.1, USB 2.0, or IEEE 1284 *1
Network Protocol
IPX/SPX (Auto, Ethernet II, 802.2, 802.3, 802.3 SNAP)
NetBEUI, TCP/IP
SMTP. POP3, FTP, SNMP, HTTP 1.1
DHCP, ARP/ICMP, BOOTP
SLP, Apple Talk
Network Print Service
Pserver (NDS) ... NetWare 4.x, 5.x, 6.x
Pserver (Bindery) ... NetWare 4.x
NDPS ... NetWare 5.x, 6.x
SMB
RAW Port Printing (Port 9100: To be changed from PageScope Light)
IPP 1.1, LPD
Network Scan
Functions
Scan to FTP with URL Notification
Scan to PC with URL Notification
Scan to E-Mail
Scan to HDD with URL Notification
TWAIN
Software Accessories
(1) Driver CD
PCL6 Printer Driver, TWAIN Driver, Font Manager, BOX Utility
OS: Windows98/98SE/Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP, Server2003
Software Accessories
(2)
PageScope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware.
Compatible Paper
Size
Max. standard paper size A3 Wide
Resolution 600 600 dpi
Power Requirements Shared with Main Unit
Operating Environ-
mental Requirements
10 - 30 C
15 - 85 %
Fonts
PCL Latin 80 Fonts
PS Latin 136 Fonts
Options Not available
1. Controller specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
2
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
1.2 Supporting client specifications
*1:The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required.
NOTE
PC IBM PC and its compatible
RAM 64 MB or more (128MB or more for XP)
OS
Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Server 2003
Interface
With a network
connection
Connection
method
Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Protocols
TCP/IP, NetBEUI,
IPX/SPX (NetWare 4.x, 5.x, 6.x)
With a local connection
USB 1.1/2.0
IEEE1284 (Compatible/Nibble/ECP)*1
Browser
The following browser is required to use PageScope Web Connection:
Netscape Communicator version 4.5 or later (Java-compliant)
Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later (Java-compliant)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Checking the controller firmware version
3
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Checking the controller firmware version
The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the Control Panel of the
machine.
2. Touch [Firmware Version].
3. Check the firmware versions.
3. Firmware upgrade
3.1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting
3.1.1 Service environment
OS: Windows 2000
Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash
Compact flash (with 128MB or more)
3.1.2 Application to be used
Cygwin (Free software)
3.1.3 Installing the Cygwin
The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC.
1. Double click the [setup.exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored.
4037F2C501DA
4037F2E545DA
4
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Select Install from Local Directory, and click [Next (N)].
4. Specify the folder for installation.
Check to make sure that Root Directory is in default setting, [C:\cygwin].
NOTE
Make sure to check that Root Directory is in default setting, [C:\cygwin].
Do not change the setting value except Root Directory.
4037F2E546DA
4037F2E547DA
5
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
6. Specify the place of the data to be installed.
For installing from CD-ROM, select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive.
(Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive.)
9. Click [Complete] to start installing.
4037F2E548DA
4037F2E549DA
4037F2E550DA
6
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
10. After installing, open the Property of My Computer, and click the Environmental Vari-
able of Advanced tab.
11. Click the New in System Variable Setting.
12. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable.
4036fs2620e0
Variable name Variable value
CYGWIN ntsec
HOME /home/username
4036fs2621e0
7
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.1.4 Writing into the Compact flash
1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\C250 in the below figure)
NOTE
The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release
Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.
2. Double-click the Firmware data, and specify the directory to be uncompressed, and
then uncompress it.
NOTE
When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed,
delete it before uncompressing.
4038F2E562DA
4038F2E563DA
8
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized
in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure)
4. Click [Start] [Program] [Accessories] [Command Prompt] to open the Com-
mand Prompt.
5. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory.
6. Specify the Drive of Compact flash, which was recognized through the procedure 3,
and execute the mkcf.bat. (Input the C: \C250\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in
the below figure, and push the Enter.)
4036fs2623e0
4038F2E564DA
9
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
7. Once the mkcf.bat is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started.
8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely
matched, VERIFY OK appears.
9. Remove the Compact flash from PC.
NOTE
When removing the Compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal
and then remove it according to the precise removing method.
4038F2E565DA
10
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.2 Firmware rewriting
The F/W is updated using the Compact flash.
3.2.1 Updating method
NOTE
NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned
ON.
1. Open the Front Door, and turn OFF
2. Remove the screw [1] and the Metal
Blanking Plate [2].
3. Insert the Compact Flash card [3]
into the slot.
4038F2C528DA
[2]
[1]
4038F2C529DA
[3]
11
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Turn ON the Main Power Switch and Auxiliary Power Button.
5. Control Panel shows up to four types of F/W to be updated.
6. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)
7. Press the [START]. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
8. Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been
rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check also the Check Sum value
([Check Sum XXXX]) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.)
10. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot.
11. Turn ON the Main Power Switch, and close the Front Door.
13. Select [Firmware Version].
14. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
3.2.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails
If NG appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in
which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps.
1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.
2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the Compact flash for a new one and
try another rewriting sequence.
3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused NG
and carry out data rewriting procedure.
F/W to be updated Appropriate board
4038F2C530DA
12
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Checking the Image Controller Setting
13
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
4. Checking the Image Controller Setting
Whenever the controller is mounted, it is necessary to select Controller 0 in [Image
Controller Setting].
2. Touch [System 2].
3. Check that Controller 0 is selected in [Image Controller Setting].
NOTE
If the setting is changed, be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON
again more than 10 seconds after. The change of the setting becomes valid when
the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has
been made on the panel.
A. Note on returning the setting from Controller 1 to Controller 0.
Selecting Controller 0 will initialize the following settings made while Controller 1 was
selected. Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Con-
troller.
<Control Panel on the machine>
Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting].
(Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the follow-
ing setting. [Administrator Setting] - [Network Setting] - [Detail Setting].)
[Administrator Setting]-[User Authentication/Account Track]-[General Settings]-[External
Server]
[Administrator Setting]-[System Connection]-[IS OpenAPI Setting]
<PageScope Web Connection>
SSL/TLS
4. Checking the Image Controller Setting Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
14
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Checking the system configuration
15
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
5. Checking the system configuration
When a malfunction occurs, let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system
configuration.
2. Touch [User Setting] [Printer Setting] [Print Reports].
3. Touch [Configuration Page] and press the Start key.
6. Status codes
For details of how to replace the MFP Control Board, see the C250 Main Unit Service
Manual
7. Troubleshooting procedures
7.1 Unable to print over the network.
Code Description Action
C-A051
Standard controller
configuration failure
Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP).
C-A052 Faulty controller hardware Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP).
C-A053 Controller start failure
Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) if the prob-
lem occurs again when turning OFF the Main Power
Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds
after.
Check Possible Cause Action Remark
1
Is the print job dis-
played on the
machine control
panel?
Yes
An error on machine
side (paper running
out, toner running out,
etc.)
Correct the error.
See Users Guide
[Copy Operations] of
the machine.
Waiting its turn
Check the machine
control panel for jobs
in print queue.
Priority may be
changed as neces-
sary.
The job is locked.
Enter the password to
unlock the job.
See Users Guide
[Print Operations].
The correct division ID
has not been entered.
Enter the correct divi-
sion ID in the printer
driver and try re-trans-
mitting the job again.
(access code)
No
Data is yet to be
received.
Go to item 2.
7. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
16
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
2
Is the response of
Ping sent from the PC
to the machine?
Yes
The print destination
port setting is wrong.
Set the correct
port.
See Users Guide
[Print Operations].
PC operates errati-
cally temporarily.
Restart the PC.
Printer driver incor-
rectly installed
Uninstall the printer
driver through the
proper steps and then
reinstall it properly.
See Users Guide
[Print Operations].
No
Controller board (MFP
Control Board) oper-
ates erratically tempo-
rarily.
Restart the controller
board.
Turn OFF the Main
Power Switch and turn
it ON again more than
10 seconds after.
Network cable is dis-
connected or a relay
device is faulty.
Reconnect the cable
and restart or change
the faulty relay device.
Check with the con-
troller network LED.
IP address and/or
subnet mask incor-
rectly set.
Set the correct IP
address and subnet
mask.
See TCP/IP Setting
in Installation Guide.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Troubleshooting procedures
17
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP.
1
The message Failed to
connect to the destina-
tion appears.
The FTP server is not in
service.
Check with the network
administrator.
IP address of the FTP
server is wrong.
administrator and enter
the correct IP address.
See Users Guide
[Network Scanner
Operations].
Proxy setting is wrong.
administrator and make
the correct proxy setting.
Port number is wrong.
the correct port number.
A directory not existing
in the FTP server is
specified.
the correct directory.
Failed to log on to the
FTP server because of
the wrong user
account.
the correct user name
and password.
A timeout condition
occurs.
Set a longer value for
FTP Connection Time-
out. The timeout value
depends on the net-
works traffic conditions
and load on the FTP
server.
2
The message Server
Connect error
appears.
The network is discon-
nected during file trans-
fer.
Send Ping from PC to the
controller and FTP server
to check to see if both
parties are connected to
the network or not.
The FTP server hard
disk becomes full dur-
ing file transfer.
administrator.
The FTP server stops
during file transfer.
administrator.
18
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX.
1
The message
Server Connect
error appears.
The SMTP server is not in
service.
administrator.
IP address of the SMTP
server is wrong.
administrator and enter the
correct IP address.
See Users Guide
[Network Scanner
Operations].
Port number is wrong.
administrator and enter the
correct port number.
A timeout condition occurs.
Set a longer value for SMTP
Connection Timeout. The tim-
eout value depends on the
networks traffic conditions
and load on the FTP server.
The network is disconnected
during file transfer.
Send Ping from PC to the con-
troller and SMTP server to
check to see if both parties are
connected to the network or
not.
2
The message
E-mail Size
Over appears.
The size of the scan data
exceeds the upper limit value
set for Maximum E-Mail Size.
Decrease resolution to make
small the data size or change
the setting for Scanned File
Separation and Binary Divi-
sion as necessary so that the
scan data does not exceed the
Maximum E-Mail Size.
See Users Guide
[Network Scanner
Operations].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Troubleshooting procedures
19
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.4 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission
through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed.
1
An error message
is returned from
the mail server.
Yes
The destination mail
address is wrong.
Enter the correct mail
address.
See Users Guide
[Network Scanner
Operations].
No
The receiving end is
being unable to receive,
or is not receiving, mail
stored in the POP3
server.
20
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
DF-601
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
DF-601
General
2. Mixed original feed .................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Mixed original feed chart....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Paper feed prohibited originals ............................................................................. 4
2.3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals..................................................................... 4
Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 5
3.1.1 Transport Belt................................................................................................ 5
3.1.2 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller ........................................................... 6
3.1.3 Separation Roller .......................................................................................... 7
3.1.4 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller ............................ 8
3.1.5 Registration Roller ........................................................................................ 8
3.1.6 Exit Roller / Roll ............................................................................................ 9
3.1.7 Turnover Roller.............................................................................................. 9
3.1.8 Sensor Section.............................................................................................. 9
4. Other ..................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items.......................................................... 11
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ............................................................ 12
4.3 Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................................................... 12
4.3.1 Front Cover/Rear Cover .............................................................................. 12
Adjustment/Setting
5. How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 13
6. Service / Test Mode............................................................................................... 14
6.1 Service Mode setting procedure......................................................................... 14
6.2 Type of the Service Mode................................................................................... 14
6.3 ADF Paper Passage ........................................................................................... 15
7. Sensor Check........................................................................................................ 16
7.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 16
7.2 Sensor check list................................................................................................. 16
7.2.1 Sensor check screen................................................................................... 16
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
8. Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 18
8.1 Adjustment of the tray volume............................................................................ 18
8.2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position .............................. 19
8.3 Adjustment of the document skew...................................................................... 20
8.4 Adjustment of the document stop position ......................................................... 21
8.4.1 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided Stop Position....................... 21
8.4.2 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Sided stop position........................ 22
8.4.3 Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan start position................ 23
8.4.4 Manual adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided / 2-Sided document
stop position adjustment ............................................................................. 24
8.4.5 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan position
adjustment .................................................................................................. 25
8.5 Adjustment of the loop value .............................................................................. 26
8.6 Automatic adjustment of the sensor ................................................................... 27
Troubleshooting
9. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 29
9.1 Initial check items ............................................................................................... 29
9.2 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 29
9.2.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 29
9.3 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 30
9.4 Solution .............................................................................................................. 30
9.4.1 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed......................................................... 30
9.4.2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed .................................................................. 31
9.4.3 Transport section misfeed........................................................................... 32
9.4.4 Transport Tray section misfeed ................................................................... 33
10. Set error detection ................................................................................................ 34
1
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
*1: For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection
Enabled Size Combination Table.
Name Duplexing Document Feeder
Type
Paper Take-Up Paper Take-Up from top of stack
Transport Endless Belt Transport Mode
Turnover Loop Turnover Mode
Paper Exit
U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover
Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode)
Installation Screw cramp to the main unit
Document Alignment Center
Document Loading Face up
Modes
Standard Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
Thick Paper Mode 1-Sided Mode
Mixed Original Detection
Mode
1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
Type of Document
Standard Mode
Plain Paper
1-Sided Mode
35 to 128 g/m
2
(9-1/4 to 34 lb)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 110 g/m
2
(13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb)
Thick Paper Mode
Plain Paper
1-Sided Mode
129 to 210 g/m
2
(34-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb)
Mixed Original Detection
Mode
Plain Paper
1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode
50 to 110 g/m
2
(13-1/4 to 29-1/4 lb)
Detectable Document
Size*1
Metric area
B6R to A3
Inch area
5-1/2 8-1/2R / 5-1/2 8-1/2 to 11 17
Capacity
Standard Mode / Mixed
Original Detection Mode
Document Feed Table: 100 sheets
(80 g/m
2
, 21-1/4 lb)
Original Exit Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 21-1/4 lb)
Thick Paper Mode
Document Feed Table: 38 sheets
(210 g/m
2
, 55-3/4 lb)
Original Exit Tray: 38 sheets (210 g/m
2
, 55-3/4 lb)
2
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
Power Requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V (generated within the DF-601)
Max. Power
Consumption
60 W or less
Dimensions
586 mm (W) 519 mm (D) 135 mm (H)
23 inch (W) 20-1/2 inch (D) 5-1/4 inch (H)
Weight 14.2 kg (31.25 lb)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Mixed original feed
3
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2. Mixed original feed
2.1 Mixed original feed chart
For Metric
For Inch
Max. Original
Size
297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
Mixed Original Size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R
297 mm
A3 OK OK - - - - - -
A4 OK OK - - - - - -
257 mm
B4 OK OK OK OK - - - -
B5 OK OK OK OK - - - -
210 mm
A4R OK OK OK OK OK OK - -
A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK - -
182 mm B5R NG NG OK OK OK OK OK -
148 mm A5R NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK
Max. Original
Size
11 8-1/2 5-1/2
Mixed Original Size 11 17 8-1/2 11 8-1/2 14 8-1/2 11R 5-1/2 8-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R
11
11 17 OK OK - - - -
8-1/2 11 OK OK - - - -
8-1/2
8-1/2 14 OK OK OK OK OK -
8-1/2 11R OK OK OK OK OK -
5-1/2 8-1/2 NG NG OK OK OK -
5-1/2 5-1/2 8-1/2R NG NG NG NG NG OK
OK Mixed Original Feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less)
NG NO. Mixed Original Feed
- Can not Set Original
2. Mixed original feed Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
4
D
F
-
6
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
2.2 Paper feed prohibited originals
If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
2.3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals
If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original Possible Trouble
Sheets stapled or clipped together
Take-up failure, damaged sheet, defective drive
mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Sheets glued together Take-up failure, damaged sheet
Sheets of 211g/m
2
(56-1/4 lb) or more
Take-up failure
Sheets of 110g/m
2
(29-1/4 lb) or more in 2-Sided
Mode
Take-up failure
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkled Take-up failure, damaged sheet
Sheets severely curled
Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in
askew
OHP Film (Transparency Film) Take-up failure
Label Paper Take-up failure
Offset Master Paper Take-up failure
Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet
Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet
Type of Original Possible Trouble
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm) Dog-eared, exit failure
Heat Sensitive Paper Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Ink Jet Paper Take-up failure, transport failure
Sheets with smooth surface (Coated Paper) Take-up failure, transport failure
Intermediate paper Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited
to vertical feeding
Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded (A3 or 11 17) Transport failure, image deformation
Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Take-up failure
Sheets penciled Contamination
Sheets folded
Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up
failure
Sheets other than detectable-size sheets Image deficit
5
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
3. Periodical check
NOTE
isopropyl alcohol.
3.1.1 Transport Belt
A. Replacing procedure
1. Remove two C-clips [1].
2. Remove the Transport Belt Roller
Assy [2] from the belt [3] connected.
3. Pull out and remove the Transport
Belt Roller Assy [4].
NOTE
In reassembling, ensure that the
Transport Belt Roller Assy is set
exactly to the connection belt.
4. Remove two screws [5], and pull up
the Roller Section [6].
4582s2501c0
[1]
[1]
4582fs2502c0
[2]
[3]
4582fs2503c0
[4]
4582fs2504c0
[6]
[5]
[5]
6
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Remove the Transport Belt [7].
3.1.2 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller
1. Open the Paper Take-up Section
Cover [1], press inward and unlock
the locking claws [2] at both ends of
the Paper Take-up Section Guide
(the Inner Cover), and remove the
Paper Take-up Section Guide [3].
2. Remove the screw [4] (on the rear
side) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up
Roller Assy shaft positioning plate
and two C-clips [5] (at both ends) of
the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller
Assy shaft, and remove the Pick-up/
Paper Take-up Roller Assy [6].
3. Remove four C-clips [7] of the Pick-
up Roller and the gear-fixing C-clip
[8] (black) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-
up Roller connected Timing Belt, and
remove the Pick-up/Paper Take-up
Roller connecting section [9] from
the shaft [10].
4. Remove the Pick-up Roller [11].
4582fs2505c0
[7]
4582fs2506c0
[3]
[2]
[1]
4582fs2507c0
[4] [5]
[5]
[6]
4582fs2508c0
[11]
[9]
[10]
[8]
[7]
[7]
7
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
5. Remove C-clip (black) of the Paper
Take-up Roller, and remove the
Paper Take-up Roller [12].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the Pick-Up/
Take-Up Roller fixing pin.
3.1.3 Separation Roller
1. Unlock the Separation Roller Cover
locking claws, and remove the Sepa-
ration Roller Cover [1].
2. Remove the Separation Roller Assy
[2].
NOTE
The Separation Roller Assy is of a
set-in type. Pinch the roller shaft at
both ends and pull out the Separa-
tion Roller Assy upward.
3. Remove the Holder [3] and the shaft
[4], and remove the Separation
Roller [5].
4582fs2509c0
[12]
4582fs2510c0
[1]
4582fs2511c0
[2]
4582fs2524c0
[5]
[4]
[3]
8
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.1.4 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller
A. Cleaning procedure
Cover [1].
2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to
wipe up the Pick-up Roller [2], Paper
Take-up Roller [3] and Separation
Roller [4].
3.1.5 Registration Roller
Cover [1].
2. Remove four screws [2] from the
Registration Roller Cover.
3. Remove the Wire Harness Saddle
[4] and the screw [5] from the Regis-
tration/Timing Sensor mounting plate
[3].
wipe up the Registration Roller [6].
4582fs2523c0
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4582fs2512c0
[1]
[2]
[2]
4582fs2513c0
[3]
[4]
[5]
4582fs2514c0
[6]
9
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.1.6 Exit Roller / Roll
1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover
[1].
wipe up the Exit Roller [2]/Roll [3].
3.1.7 Turnover Roller
1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover
[1], and open the Turnover Guide
Plate [2].
wipe up the Turnover Roller [3].
3.1.8 Sensor Section
1. Remove the Registration/Timing
Sensor mounting plate.
8
2. Clean the Registration [1]/Timing
Sensor [2] with a blower brush or the
like.
4582fs2515c0 [2]
[3]
[1]
4582fs2516c0
[1]
[2]
4582fs2517c0
[3]
4582fs2522c0
[1]
[2]
10
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove the Registration Roller
Cover.
8
4. Clean the Paper Empty Sensor [3]
with a brush or the like.
5. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover.
6. Clean the Paper Exit Sensor [4] with
a brush or the like.
4582fs2519c0
[3]
4582fs2520c0
[4]
11
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Other
NOTE
NOTE
adjustment.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions,
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce-
dures.
When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
12
D
F
-
6
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts)
4.3.1 Front Cover/Rear Cover
1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1] and the Paper Exit Section Cover [2].
2. Remove the Front Cover [4] by removing two screws [3].
3. Remove the Rear Cover [6] by removing two screws [5].
No Section Part name Ref. page
1
Exterior Parts
Front Cover 12
2 Rear Cover 12
4582fs2521c0
[3]
[3] [4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
13
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
made.Check to see if:
Caution
Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job
procedures.
extremely hot.
6. Service / Test Mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
14
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6. Service / Test Mode
The Service / Test Modes are set from the Service Mode screen of the main unit.
6.1 Service Mode setting procedure
1. Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2. Touch the [Details] Check key.
3. Press the keys, [STOP] [0] [0] [STOP] [0] [1], in this order.
4. Enter the service code (8 digits).
5. Select [ADF].
NOTE
Do not teach this procedure to others unless it is absolutely necessary.
6.2 Type of the Service Mode
The [ADF] in the Service Mode has 7 items as follows.
4582F3E513DA
Original Stop Position (Adjust) Registration Loop Adj. (Adjust)
Auto Stop Position Adjustment (Adjust) Paper Passage (Test)
Sensor Check (Test) Original Tray Width (Adjust)
Sensor Auto Adjust (Adjust)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Service / Test Mode
15
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.3 ADF Paper Passage
The Paper Passage motion of the Automatic Document Feeder is checked.
<Procedure>
1. Set the mode to the Service Mode.
2. Touch the [ADF] key.
3. Touch the [Paper Passage] key.
4. Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from [1-Sided (No Detect)], [1-Sided
(Mixed Org.)] and [2-Sided].
5. Set the Original in the Take-up Tray.
The Start key color changes from orange to green.
6. Press the Start key. The operation starts.
NOTE
After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed
during the operation, the operation will be suspended. Then, if the Start key is
pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed.
If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end.
If there is no Original set in the Take-up Tray, the Start key will not work.
All Originals set in the Take-up Tray are passed through. Upon the completion of
all Originals passed through, the Paper Through Test ends.
4582F3E514DA
7. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
16
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7. Sensor Check
7.1 Check procedure
To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
2. Touch the [ADF] key.
3. Touch the [Sensor Check] key.
4. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display.
(Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)
7.2 Sensor check list
7.2.1 Sensor check screen
This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ-
ual main unit.
Note that each of the following sensors changes from 0 to 1 when the corresponding part
is opened, which is regarded as a closure failure: Original Take-Up Unit Interlock, Trans-
port Convey, Exit Cover, and Middle Tray. Of these sensors, Transport Convey changes
from 0 to 1 when PC202 mounted on the IR of the main unit detects a predetermined
condition (ADF is raised to an angle of 20 or more).
<Output display of Width>
The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing
the guide width of the Document Take-up Tray to change the output value.
4582F3E515DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Sensor Check
17
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
A. Sensor monitor
Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1 0
PC4-DF Empty Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC3-DF Original Take-Up Unit
Interrock
Take-up Cover Sensor
OPEN CLOSE
PC202 Transport Convey Original Cover Angle Sensor OPEN CLOSE
PC7-DF Exit Cover Exit Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE
PC8-DF Middle Tray Tray Open/Close Sensor OPEN CLOSE
PC1-DF Registration Registration Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC6-DF Exit Section Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC5-DF Reverse Turnover Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2-DF Timing Pick-up Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
R1-DF Width Document Size Volume
18
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.1 Adjustment of the tray volume
Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detec-
tion volume interlocked with the Document Take-up Tray Edge Guide.
<Procedure>
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Original Tray Width].
A. Adjustment procedure
1. Widen the width across the edge
guides [1] by sliding them to their
maximum width.
2. Touch [Max. Width].
3. Press the Start key. Confirm that the
Result is OK.
4. Narrow the width across the edge
guides [2] by sliding them to their
minimum width.
5. Touch [Min. Width].
6. Press the Start key. Confirm that the
Result is OK.
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode
screen.
If the Result is NG:
Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume, wrong wiring to
the volume and failure of the PWB-CONT.
4582fs3504c0
[1]
4582F3E516DA
4582fs3506c0
[2]
4582F3E517DA
19
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position
Adjustment standard: Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 1 mm to
the FD scale.
1. Place the chart furnished with the
Document Feeder in the document
feeding tray [1] (with the side having
an arrow facing up).
2. Set up the following functions:
Auto Paper
1-sided original / 1-side copy
4. Fold the copy in half.
5. With reference to the crease, check
to see if the arrow is on the side of A
or B.
Specifications: 2 mm from the cen-
ter
If the deviation falls outside the speci-
fied range, use the following proce-
dure to make an adjustment.
6. Loosen screw [2] (two on the front
side and three on the backside) on
the document feeding tray.
If the crease deviates on the side of
A, move the tray to the front.
If the crease deviates on the side of
B, move the tray to the rear.
7. Make recheck.
4582fs3508c0
[1]
A
B
4582fs3509c0
4582fs3510c0
[2]
20
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.3 Adjustment of the document skew
Adjustment standard: Skew should be 1.0 % or less with respect to the document length;
within 3.0 mm for document of A4 size.
2. Set up the following functions:
Auto Paper
1-sided original / 1-side copy
4. Check in which direction, [2] or [3],
the image tilts on the copy fed out of
the machine.
Specifications: Tilt 3.0 mm max.
If the image tilts more than the specifi-
cations, perform the following steps to
make the adjustment.
5. Loosen two front screws [4] on the
right hinge.
6. If the image tilts in direction of [2],
move the Document Feeder toward
the front.
If the image tilts in direction of [3],
move the Document Feeder toward
the rear.
7. Tighten two screws [4].
8. Make recheck.
4582fs3508c0
[1]
4582fs3511c0
[2]
[3]
4582fs3512c0
[4]
21
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.4 Adjustment of the document stop position
Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by enter-
ing numbers).
The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode.
8.4.1 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided Stop Position
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
4. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side].
4582F3E513DA
4582F3E518DA
4582fs3508c0
[1]
22
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7. Make sure that Result is OK. Then,
touch [SET].
8. Touch [END].
screen.
If the Result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the
document.
Manually correct the value of [Position
Correction].
8.4.2 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Sided stop position
2. Touch [ADF].
4. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
Document Feeder [1] in the docu-
ment feeding tray.
NOTE
Make sure that the blank surface of
the chart faces up.
7. Check that Result is OK and then
touch [SET].
8. Touch [END].
screen.
document.
Correction].
4582F3E519DA
4582F3E520DA
4582fs3508c0
[1]
4582F3E521DA
23
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.4.3 Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan start position
2. Touch [ADF].
4. Touch [Main Scanning Direction].
feeding tray (with the side having an
arrow facing up).
7. Check that Result is OK and then
touch [SET].
8. Touch [END].
screen.
document.
Correction].
4582F3E522DA
4582fs3508c0
[1]
4582F3E523DA
24
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.4.4 Manual adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided / 2-Sided document stop
position adjustment
Adjusted range: -7 mm to + 7 mm
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Original Stop Position].
4. Select [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side] or [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the +/- code.)
To shift the position in the direction of
F, set the code to +.
To shift the position in the direction of
E, set the code to -.
6. Touch [END].
4582F3E524DA
E F
4582fs3517c0
25
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.4.5 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan position adjustment
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Original Stop Position].
4. Select [Main Scanning Direction].
5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the code.)
To scan the image in the direction of
C, set the code to -.
To shift the image in the direction of D,
set the code to +.
6. Touch [END].
4582F3E525DA
C
D
4582fs3518c0
26
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.5 Adjustment of the loop value
Default value: 0 (Loop value: 5 mm)
The loop value is increased by the entered + value and decreased by the entered - value.
Too much loop value may result in dog-eared document, and too little loop value may
result in askew document.
A. Adjustment Procedure
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Registration Loop Adj.].
4. Touch [Loop Value].
5. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the ID key to change the +/- code.)
6. Touch [END].
4582F3E526DA
27
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8.6 Automatic adjustment of the sensor
The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted.
The adjustment has two modes: [Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj.] and [ADF Sensor Auto
Adj.].
Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the ADF board or in case
of the document detection error.
2. Touch [ADF].
3. Touch [Sensor Auto Adjust].
4. Select [Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj.] or [ADF Sensor Auto Adj.].
6. If the result is OK touch the [END] key on the panel.
7. If the result is NG check the influencing sensor, replace it if necessary, and then make
readjustment.
4582F3E527DA
28
D
F
-
6
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
29
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
9. Jam Display
9.1 Initial check items
When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
9.2 Misfeed display
When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light-
ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
9.2.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure
Check item Action
Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage
procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is
the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
worn?
Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator
Finger.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor-
rect position to accommodate the paper?
Set as necessary.
Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.
Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action
6401 Paper Exit / Turnover section Paper Exit section Cover 30
6402 Paper Take-Up section Paper Take-Up section Cover 31
6403 Transport section Paper Take-Up section Cover 32
6404 Transport Tray section Paper Exit section Cover 33
30
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.3 Sensor layout
9.4 Solution
9.4.1 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
[1] Exit Sensor PC6-DF [3] Pick-up Sensor PC2-DF
[2] Turnover Sensor PC5-DF [4] Registration Sensor PC1-DF
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4582fs4502c0
Type Description
Misfeed due to paper
remaining at the Turnover
Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned OFF
within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was tuned ON.
Misfeed due to paper not
reached the Exit Sensor
(in the 2-Sided Mode)
Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a
preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was turned ON in the 2-
Sided mode.
remaining at the Exit Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned OFF within
a preset time after the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) was tuned ON.
Relevant electrical parts
Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF)
Exit Sensor (PC6-DF)
Exit Motor (M3-DF)
Control Board (PWB-A DF)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC5-DF I/O, sensor check PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) DF-601 C-4
4 M3-DF operation check PWB-A DF CN3A-1 to 4 DF-601 C-7
5 PWB-A DF replacement
31
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.4.2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
reached the Registration
Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) is not turned
ON within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started normal
rotation.
reached the Pick-Up Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned ON
within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse
rotation.
Registration Sensor (PC1-DF)
Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF)
Take-up Motor (M1-DF)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC1-DF I/O, sensor check PWB-A DF CN7A-9 (ON) DF-601 G to H-5
4 M1-DF operation check PWB-A DF CN5A-1, 3, 4, 6 DF-601 C-6
32
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.4.3 Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
remaining at the Pick-Up
Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned OFF
within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse
rotation.
reached the Turnover Sensor
Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned ON
within a preset time after the Transport Motor (M2-DF) started.
Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF)
Take-up Motor (M1-DF)
Transport Motor (M2-DF)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
4 M1-DF operation check PWB-A DF CN5A-1, 3, 4, 6 DF-601 C-6
5 M2-DF operation check PWB-A DF CN4A-4 to 7 DF-601 C-6
33
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.4.4 Transport Tray section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
NOTE
Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Power Switch is turned ON as
special means for detecting a paper misfeed. If a sensor adjustment error occurs
through this procedure, a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the
corresponding sensor.
Type Description
reached the Exit Sensor
(in the 1-Sided Mode)
Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a
preset time after exit operation started in the 1-Sided Mode.
Misfeed at the Transport Tray
Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size
measured at the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) and that measured at the
Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is 20 mm or more.
Exit Sensor (PC6-DF)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
10. Set error detection Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
34
D
F
-
6
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
10. Set error detection
When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the Panel of the main unit
will have the following display.
<Panel display and detection timing for each>
4582F4E501DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
Panel
display
Description of error Detection start Detection timing
[1]
Paper Exit section Cover
set error
When the Main Power
Switch turn ON.
Paper Exit section Open/Close
Sensor (when light-blocked)
[2]
Transport Tray section
Cover set error
When the Main Power
Switch turn ON.
Transport Tray Open/Close Sensor
(when light- blocked)
[3]
Paper Take-Up section
Cover set error
When the Main Power
Switch turn ON.
Paper Take-Up Section Open/
Close Sensor (when light-blocked)
ADF set error
When the document is set
in the ADF
Size Reset Switch on the main unit
(when turned ON)
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
PC-103/PC-203
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
PC-103/PC-203
General
Maintenance
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy........................................................... 3
2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............................................................. 4
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller......................................................................... 6
3. Other ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items............................................................ 8
3.2 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................... 9
3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 9
3.2.2 Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover........... 10
3.3.2 Rear Cover.................................................................................................. 10
3.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 11
3.4.1 Separation Roller ........................................................................................ 11
3.4.2 Paper Take-up Roller................................................................................... 11
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller.............................................................................................. 12
3.4.4 Vertical Transport Roller.............................................................................. 12
Adjustment/Setting
5. Sensor check......................................................................................................... 14
5.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 14
5.2.2 Sensor check list ......................................................................................... 15
6.1 Adjusting the paper reference position ............................................................... 16
6.1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge........................................................................ 16
6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge................................................................ 18
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 19
7.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 19
7.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 20
7.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 21
7.3.1 Initial check items ....................................................................................... 21
7.3.2 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed
(PC-103/PC-203) ........................................................................................ 22
(PC-203) ..................................................................................................... 23
8. Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 24
8.1 Trouble code display........................................................................................... 24
8.2 Trouble code list.................................................................................................. 24
8.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 25
8.3.1 C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure
C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure ....................................................................... 25
1
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
NOTE
Name 2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet
Type Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device
Installation Desk type
Type
Plain paper
60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb)
Recycled paper
60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb)
Size A5R to A3, 5.5 8.5R to 11 17
Capacity
3rd Drawer
500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 21.25 lb)
4th Drawer
500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 21.25 lb)
Power Requirements
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V 5 %
Max. Power
Consumption
75 W or less
Dimensions
570 mm (W) 548 mm (D) 263 mm (H)
22.5 inch (W) 21.5 inch (D) 10.25 inch (H)
Weight
PC-103: 22.0 kg (48.5 lb)
PC-203: 26.0 kg (57.25 lb)
2
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
3
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Periodical check
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
1. Remove the Right Door.
10
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the Jam Access Cover [2].
the Paper Separation Roller Mount-
ing Bracket Assy [4].
shaft [6], and remove the Paper Sep-
aration Roller Fixing Bracket Assy
[7].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose spring at this
time.
5. Remove the C-ring [8], the Guide [9],
and remove the Separation Roller
Assy [10].
6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
4348fs2611c0
[1]
[2]
[1]
4348fs2612c0
[3]
[4]
[3]
4061F2C501DA
[5]
[5]
[6]
[7]
4061F2C502DA
[8]
[9]
[10]
4
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
NOTES
Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns
to the metal bracket of the machine.
Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when
installed.
NOTE
Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
(Remove the Right Lower Cover for
4th row.)
10
2. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the
Tray4 from 4th row.)
3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
Replacing the Separation Roller
Assy.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the harness from two wire
saddles.
5. Remove four screws [2] and remove
the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper
Separation Roller Mounting Bracket
Assy.
4348fs2623c0
4348F2C502DA
[1]
4348fs2603c0
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2604c0
[4]
[4]
[5]
5
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
8. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove
the bushing [9].
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orien-
tation as shown on the left, and
remove the C-ring [11] and the gear
[12].
10. Remove the C-ring [13], the bushing
[14], and remove the shaft Assy [15].
4348fs2605c0
[7]
[6]
4348fs2606c0
[9]
[8]
4348fs2607c0
[10]
[12]
[11]
4348fs2608c0
[13]
[15]
[14]
6
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
11. Remove two E-rings [16] and the
bushing [17], and remove the Pick-
up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18].
the Paper Take-up Roller [20].
4th Drawer.
NOTE
same time.
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
(Remove the Right Lower Cover for
4th row.)
10
Replacing the Separation Roller
Assy.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the harness from two wire
saddles.
4348fs2609c0
[16]
[16]
[17]
[18]
4348fs2610c0
[19]
[20]
4348F2C502DA
[1]
4348fs2603c0
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
7
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
ing Bracket Assy [5] together with
frame.
8. Remove two C-rings[8], two bush-
ings [9], and remove the Pick-up
Roller Assy [10].
the Pick-up Roller [12].
4th Drawer.
NOTE
same time.
4348fs2617c0
[4]
[4]
[5]
4348fs2605c0
[7]
[6]
4348fs2618c0
[8]
[9]
[9]
[10]
[8]
4348fs2619c0
[11]
[12]
8
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Other
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
dures.
9
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
1
Exterior parts
Right Door 10
3 Lower Right Cover 10
4 Front Right Cover 10
5 Rear Cover 10
1
Paper feed section
Separation Roller 11
2 Paper Take-up Roller 11
3 Pick-up Roller 12
4 Transport section Vertical Transport Roller 12
10
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
1. Open the Right Door [1].
2. Remove the Right Door [1].
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
3.3.2 Rear Cover
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
4061F2C503DA
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[7]
4348fs2622c0
[1]
[2]
[1]
11
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
NOTE
10
the Jam Access Cover [2].
alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller
[5] clean of dirt.
4th Drawer.
3.4.2 Paper Take-up Roller
Cleaning of the Separation Roller.
alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-up
4th Drawer.
4348fs2611c0
[1]
[2]
[1]
4348fs2612c0
[3]
[4]
[3]
4348fs2613c0
[5]
4348fs2601c0
[1]
12
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller
Cleaning of the Separation Roller.
alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1]
clean of dirt.
4th Drawer.
3.4.4 Vertical Transport Roller
alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport
4348fs2602c0
[1]
4348fs2620c0
[1]
[1]
13
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Caution
procedures.
extremely hot.
5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
14
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5. Sensor check
5.1 Check procedure
<Procedure>
For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the Main Unit Service Manual.
2. Touch the [State Confirmation] key.
ual main unit.
4061F3E806DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Sensor check
15
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.2.2 Sensor check list
A. Sensor monitor 1 (PC-103/PC-203)
Operation characteris-
tics/Panel display
1 0
PC112-PC Tray3 Device Detection Tray3 Device Detection Sensor
Set
Out of
position
PC115-PC Paper Empty Tray3 Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC113-PC Near Empty Tray3 Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC117-PC Vertical Transport Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC116-PC Take-Up Tray3 Take-up Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC114-PC Upper Limit Tray3 Lift-up Upper Sensor Raised
Position
Not raised
PC121-PC Tray4 Device Detection Tray4 Device Detection Sensor
Set
Out of
position
PC124-PC Paper Empty Tray4 Empty Sensor Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC122-PC Near Empty Tray4 Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC126-PC Vertical Transport Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC125-PC Take-Up Tray4 Take-up Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC123-PC Upper Limit Tray4 Lift-up Upper Sensor Raised
Position
Not raised
16
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1 Adjusting the paper reference position
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
When the PH Unit has been replaced.
When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction.
When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
6.1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge
2. Touch [Machine] [Printer Area].
3. Touch [Print Positioning: Side Edge] [3rd.].
5. Measure the width of printed refer-
ence line A.
Specification: 3.0 mm 1.0 mm
6. If the measured width A falls outside
the specified range, enter the correc-
tion value.
7. Produce another test print and check
to see if width A falls within the spec-
ified range.
4061F3E807DA
4348fs3509c0
A
17
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value, perform
adjustment according to the following procedure.
8. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload
paper from it.
9. Loosen three screws [2] at the center
of the Paper Lifting Plate.
10. Watching the graduations [3] pro-
vided in the drawer, move the Edge
Guide [4] in the rear.
If width A is greater than the specified
value, move the Edge Guide toward
the front.
If width A is smaller than the specified
value, move the Edge Guide toward
the rear.
11. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
12. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range.
13. Tighten the adjustment screw.
14. Repeat steps 1 to 13 similarly for the Tray 4.
4348fs3601c0
[1]
[2]
4348fs3602c0
[4]
[3]
18
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge
3. Touch [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge] [3rd.].
ence line A.
tion value.
ified range.
Tray 4.
4061F3E808DA
4348fs3509c0
A
19
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display
7.1 Misfeed display
No. Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action
[1]
1301 Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Section
Right Door 22
2001 Tray 3 Paper Vertical Transport Section
[2]
1401 Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Section
Right Door 23
2001 Tray 4 Paper Vertical Transport Section
4061F4C800DA
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
20
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.2 Sensor layout
[1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC [4] Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PC
[2] Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PC [5] Tray4 Take-up Sensor PC125-PC
[3] Tray3 Take-up Sensor PC116-PC
4061F4C802DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
21
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3 Solution
7.3.1 Initial check items
Check item Action
Replace paper.
procedures.
worn?
Finger.
Set as necessary.
22
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
(PC-103/PC-203)
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Tray3 Paper Take-
Up section/Vertical
transport section
misfeed detection
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC117-PC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Take-up
Motor (M122-PC) is energized.
The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC8-PC) is not blocked even after the lapse
of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC)
has been blocked by a paper.
Tray 3 Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
front of the Registration Roller at Tray 3 take-up.
Tray3 detection of
paper remaining
The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-
function is reset.
The Tray3 Take-up Sensor (PC116-PC) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is
set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Misfeed detected
as a result of
delayed deactiva-
tion of sensor
The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is not unblocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after PC117-PC has been blocked by a paper.
Tray3 Take-up Sensor (PC116-PC)
Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC1 I/O, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-8 (ON) C250 C-3
3 PC116-PC I/O, sensor check PWB-C2 PC PJ6C2 PC-8 (ON)
PC-103, PC-203
C-4
PC-103, PC-203
C-4
5 PC8-PC I/O, sensor check PWB-Z-PC PJ6Z PC-11 (ON) C250 S-25
PC-103, PC-203
C-4
7 PWB-C2 PC replacement
23
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
(PC-203)
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Tray4 Paper Take-
Up section/Vertical
transport section
misfeed detection
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC126-PC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Take-up
Motor (M123-PC) is energized.
The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) is not blocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-
PC) has been blocked by a paper.
Tray 4 Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
front of the Registration Roller at Tray 4 take-up.
Tray4 detection of
paper remaining
The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PC) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-
function is reset.
The Tray4 Take-up Sensor (PC125-PC) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is
reset.
Misfeed detected
as a result of
delayed deactiva-
tion of sensor
The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PC) is not unblocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after PC126-PC has been blocked by a paper.
Tray4 Take-up Sensor (PC125-PC)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
3 PC125-PC I/O, sensor check PWB-C2 PC PJ10C2 PC-8 (ON) PC-203 G to H-6
PC-103, PC-203
C-4
6 M123-PC operation check PWB-C2 PC PJ9C2 PC-1 to 4 PC-203 G to H-5
8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
24
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8. Trouble code
8.1 Trouble code display
The main units CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc-
tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.
8.2 Trouble code list
Open and close the Front Door, or turn OFF the Main Power Switch. Then, wait for 10
sec. or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch to reset the malfunction display.
4061F4E504DA
C0206 Tray3 Lift-Up Failure The Lift-up Upper Sensor is not blocked even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up
operation for the drawer began.
C0208 Tray4 Lift-Up Failure
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code
25
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3 Solution
8.3.1 C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure
C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure
Tray3 Lift-up Motor (M124-PC)
Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PC)
Tray3 Lift-up Upper Sensor (PC114-PC)
Tray4 Lift-up Upper Sensor (PC123-PC)
Main unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
Main unit DC Power Supply (PU1)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the motor and sensor connec-
tors for proper connection, and correct
as necessary.

2
Check the connector of each motor for
proper drive coupling, and correct as
necessary.

3
Check the PU1 connector for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.

4 PC114-PC I/O, sensor check PWB-C2 PC PJ6C2 PC-3 (ON) PC-203 C-3
PC-103, PC-203
C-5
7 M125-PC operation check PWB-C2 PC PJ8C2 PC-12 to 13 PC-203 G to H-3
9 PWB-M replacement
10 PU1 replacement
26
P
C
-
1
0
3
/
P
C
-
2
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
PC-403
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
P
C
-
4
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
PC-403
General
1. Product specification............................................................................................... 1
Maintenance
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy........................................................... 3
2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............................................................. 4
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller......................................................................... 6
3. Other ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................... 9
3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 9
3.2.2 Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover........... 10
3.3.2 Rear Cover.................................................................................................. 10
3.3.3 Drawer......................................................................................................... 11
3.3.4 Wire............................................................................................................. 11
3.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 14
3.4.1 Separation Roller ........................................................................................ 14
3.4.2 Paper Take-up Roller................................................................................... 14
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller.............................................................................................. 14
3.4.4 Vertical Transport Roller.............................................................................. 15
Adjustment/Setting
5. Sensor check......................................................................................................... 18
5.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 18
5.2.2 Sensor check list ......................................................................................... 19
6.1 Adjusting the paper reference position ............................................................... 20
P
C
-
4
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
6.1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge ....................................................................... 20
6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge................................................................ 22
6.2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment ........................................................... 22
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 25
7.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 25
7.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 26
7.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 27
7.3.2 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed................. 28
8. Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 29
8.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 32
8.3.1 C0001: LCT communication error............................................................... 32
8.3.2 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure ............................................................ 32
8.3.3 C0210: LCT Lift Failure............................................................................... 33
8.3.4 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure.............................................................. 33
8.3.5 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure................................................... 34
8.3.6 C0214: LCT Shift Failure ............................................................................ 34
8.3.7 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure .................................................................. 35
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification
1
P
C
-
4
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
1. Product specification
A. Type
B. Paper type
NOTE
Name Large Capacity Cabinet
Type Front loading type LCC
Installation Desk type
Type Plain paper
60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb)
Recycled paper
60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb)
Size A4, 8.5 11
Capacity
2500 sheets (80 g/m
2
, 21.25 lb)
Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V 5 %
Max. Power
Consumption
45 W or less
Dimensions 570 mm (W) 548 mm (D) 263 mm (H)
1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
2
P
C
-
4
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
3
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Periodical check
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
10
shaft [4], and remove the Paper Sep-
aration Roller fixing Bracket Assy [5].
NOTE
Be careful not to lose spring at this
time.
4. Remove the C-ring [6], the Guide [7],
and remove the Separation Roller
Assy [8].
NOTE
Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns
to the metal bracket of the machine.
Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when
installed.
NOTE
same time.
4348fs2509c0
[2]
[1]
[1]
4348F2C503DA
[3]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4348F2C504DA
[6]
[8]
[7]
4348fs2623c0
4
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the
Rear Right Cover.
10
2. Remove the Tray3.
Separation Roller Assy.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from
the Main Control Board.
the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper
Separation Roller Mounting Bracket
Assy.
4348F2C501DA
[1]
4348fs2502c0
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2503c0
[5]
[4]
[4]
4348fs2504c0
[6]
[6]
[7]
5
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
8. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove
the bushing [9].
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orien-
tation as shown on the left, and
remove the C-ring [11] and the gear
[12].
10. Remove the shaft Assy [10].
11. Remove two E-rings [13] and the
bushing [14], and remove the Pick-
up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [15].
4348fs2505c0
[8]
[8]
[9]
4348fs2506c0
[10]
[11]
[12]
4348fs2507c0
[15]
[14]
[13]
[13]
6
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Paper Take-up Roller [17].
NOTE
same time.
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the
Rear Right Cover.
10
2. Remove the Tray 3.
Separation Roller Assy.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from
the Main Control Board.
ing Bracket Assy [5] together with
frame.
4348fs2508c0
[16]
[17]
4348F2C501DA
[1]
4348fs2502c0
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2516c0
[4]
[5]
[4]
7
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bush-
ings [9], and the Pick-up Roller Assy
[10].
the Pick-up Roller [12].
NOTE
same time.
4348fs2515c0
[6]
[6]
[7]
4348fs2517c0
[8]
[8]
[9]
[9]
[10]
4348fs2518c0
[11]
[12]
8
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Other
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
dures.
9
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
1
Exterior Parts
Right Door 10
3 Lower Right Cover 10
4 Front Right Cover 10
5 Rear Cover 10
6
Unit
Drawer 11
7 Wire 11
1
Paper feed section
Separation Roller 14
2 Paper Take-up Roller 14
3 Pick-up Roller 14
4 Transport section Vertical Transport Roller 15
10
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
1. Open the Right Door [1].
2. Remove the Right Door [1].
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
3.3.2 Rear Cover
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
4061F2C504DA
[4]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[7]
4348fs2521c0
[1]
[2]
[1]
11
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.3.3 Drawer
1. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1]
and slide out the drawer [2].
2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove four screws [3] and slide out
the drawer [2].
4. Remove two screws [4], the connec-
tor [5], and remove the Connector
Board [6].
5. Remove the Drawer.
NOTE
When removing the Connector
Board, use care not to drop the
drawer from the guide rail.
Caution
To prevent injuries, press the guide
rail [7] inside the machine.
3.3.4 Wire
1. Remove the Drawer.
11
the Front Cover Assy [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner
Cover Assy [5].
NOTE
Do not peel off pulley protective
mylar sheet.
4348fs2522c0
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
4348fs2523c0
[4]
[4]
[6]
[5]
4348fs2524c0
[7]
[7]
4348fs2525c0
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
4348fs2526c0
[4]
[4]
[5]
12
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the Driver Cover [7].
6. Remove three screws [8] and
remove the Driver Mounting Plate
Assy [9].
NOTE
When assembling, be sure to
engage rib of gear 1 [10] with con-
vex section of gear 2 [11].
7. Remove three screws [12] and
remove the Reinforcement Bracket
Assy [13].
8. Remove two C-clips [14].
9. Remove four Pulley Covers [15].
10. Unhook four pulleys [16].
4348fs2527c0 [6]
[7]
4348fs2528c0
[9]
[8]
4348fs2529c0
[10]
[11]
4348fs2530c0
[12]
[12]
[13]
4348fs2531c0 [14]
[15]
[15]
[14]
[16]
[16]
[15]
[16]
[15]
13
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
11. Remove the Ground Plate [17].
12. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18]
and remove the Main Drawer [19].
NOTE
Use care not to bend the wires.
13. Remove four screws [20] and
remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy
[21].
14. Remove four screws [22] and
remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy
[23].
15. Remove three C-rings [24], the bush-
ing [25], and two gears [26].
16. Remove the Take-up Drum Assy
[27].
17. Remove two C-rings [28]and the
Take-up Drum [29].
NOTE
Take care not to lose fixing pins.
When reinstalling the Take-up
Drum, check that the direction of
the wire coming from both Take-up
Drums are the same.
Install so that cut parts [30] at both
ends of shaft face up.
4348fs2532c0
[19]
[18]
[18]
[17]
[18]
[18]
4348fs2533c0
[20]
[20]
[21]
4348fs2534c0
[23]
[22]
[22]
4348fs2535c0
[24]
[26]
[24]
[26]
[25]
[27]
[24]
4348fs2536c0
[28]
[29]
[28]
[29]
[30]
14
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
NOTE
10
alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller
[3] clean of dirt.
3.4.2 Paper Take-up Roller
Cleaning of Separation Roller.
alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-Up
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller
Cleaning of Separation Roller.
alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1]
clean of dirt.
4348fs2509c0
[2]
[1]
[1]
4348fs2510c0
[3]
4348F2C502DA
[1]
4348fs2513c0
[1]
15
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.4.4 Vertical Transport Roller
alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport
4348fs2519c0
[1]
16
P
C
-
4
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Blank Page
17
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Caution
procedures.
extremely hot.
18
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5. Sensor check
5.1 Check procedure
<Procedure>
ual main unit.
4061F3E809DA
19
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
A. Sensor monitor 2
Panel display
1 0
PC4-LCT Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Upper Sensor Raised
Position
Not raised
PC13-LCT Lift-Up Lower Lift-Up Lower Sensor Lowered
Position
Not lowered
PC12-LCT Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Home Sensor At home Not at home
PC11-LCT Shift Tray Stop Shift Tray Stop Sensor Return
position
Not at return
position
PC1-LCT Take-Up Paper Take-up Motor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2-LCT Vertical Transport Vertical Transport Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-LCT Paper Empty Paper Empty Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PWB-E
LCT
Main Tray Empty Main Tray Empty Sensor Board Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-LCT Lower Over Run Lower Over Run Sensor malfunction operational
UN1-LCT Manual Button Down Manual Button Down Board ON OFF
PC14-LCT Division Board Position Division Board Position Sensor At home Not at home
PC6-LCT Cassette Open Cassette Open Sensor
Set
Out of
position
PC8-LCT Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC10-LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked
20
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
When the PH Unit has been replaced.
When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction.
When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
6.1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge
3. Touch [Print Positioning: Side Edge] [3rd.].
ence line A.
tion value.
ified range.
If adjustment cannot be completed
only by inputting numeric value,
perform adjustment according to
the following procedure.
4061F3E810DA
4348fs3509c0
A
21
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8. Press the Drawer Release button [1]
and then slide out the drawer [2]
from the Paper Feed Cabinet.
10. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and
turn screw D [4] to make the adjust-
ment.
NOTE
Do not damage the passage surface
of the Right Door.
If width A is greater than the specified
value:
Turn screw D counterclockwise.
If width A is smaller than the specified
value:
Turn screw D clockwise.
11. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
12. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range.
13. Tighten the adjustment screw.
4348fs3510c0
[2]
[1]
4348fs3511c0
[4]
[3]
4348fs3512c0
4348fs3513c0
22
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge
3. Touch [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge] [3rd.].
ence line A.
tion value.
ified range.
6.2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment
1. Slide out the Drawer and remove it.
2. Lift the Main Drawer [1], and remove
two screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray.
NOTE
When reinstalling, use caution
because the wire of the Main
Drawer comes off easily.
4061F3E811DA
4348fs3509c0
A
4348fs3501c0
[1]
[2] [2]
23
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
the Shifter [4].
4. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5]
as shown on the left and release the
lock.
5. Remove the Shift Tray [5].
6. Loosen the screw [7] fixing the Ten-
sion Pulley Assy as shown to the left
and move it in the direction of the
arrow.
7. After moving the Shifter, tighten the
fixing screw [7].
4348fs3502c0
[3]
[4]
[3]
4348fs3503c0
[6]
[5]
4348fs3504c0
[7]
24
P
C
-
4
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
25
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display
7.1 Misfeed display
[1]
1501 LCT Paper Take-Up section
Right Door 28
2001 LCT Paper Vertical Transport Section
4061F4C801DA
[1]
[1]
26
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.2 Sensor layout
[1] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC [3] Paper Take-up Motor PC1-LCT
[2] Vertical Transport Sensor PC2-LCT
4061F4C803DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
27
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3 Solution
Check item Action
Replace paper.
procedures.
worn?
Finger.
Set as necessary.
28
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3.2 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
LCT Paper Take-Up
section misfeed
detection
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take-up Motor (PC1-
LCT) or the Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set period of time
has elapsed after the Take-up Motor (M1-LCT) is energized.
LCT Vertical
transport section
misfeed detection
of a given period of time after the Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) has been
blocked by a paper.
LCT Vertical
Transport section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
front of the Registration Roller at LCT take-up.
LCT detection of
paper remaining
The Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch
is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
The Paper Take-up Motor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is
reset.
Misfeed detected
as a result of
delayed deactiva-
tion of sensor
The Paper Take-up Motor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after PC1-LCT has been blocked by a paper.
The Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of
a given period of time after PC2-LCT has been blocked by a paper.
Paper Take-up Motor (PC1-LCT)
Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT)
Take-up Motor (M1-LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC1 I/O, sensor check
3 PC1-LCT I/O, sensor check PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 (ON) PC-403 C-7
4 PC2-LCT I/O, sensor check PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 (ON) PC-403 C-7
5 PC8-PC I/O, sensor check PWB-Z-PC PJ6Z PC-11 (ON) C250 S-25
6 M1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 PC-403 C-8
7 PWB-C1 LCT replacement
8 PWB-M replacement
29
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8. Trouble code
4061F4E704DA
30
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C0001 LCT communication error Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the
watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed.
C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor
malfunction
The Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined
continuous period of time while the LCT Vertical Trans-
port Motor is turning.
C0209 LCT Elevator Motor Failure The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot
detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of
time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is
turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
C0210 LCT Lift Failure The Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operation began.
The Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up
operation began.
The Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not unblocked
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up
operation began.
The Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
paper lift-up operating.
The Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked
paper lift-down operation began.
The Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-
down operation began.
The Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not unblocked
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-
down operation began.
The Lower Over Run Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked
while the paper lift-down operating.
C0212 LCT ejection failure The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the
lowering operation is finished.
C0213 LCT Shift Gate malfunction The Division Board Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) can-
not be set to L even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the operation of the Division Board Motor
(M3-LCT) began with the Division Board Position Sen-
sor (PC14-LCT) set to L.
31
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Open and close the Front Door, or turn OFF the Main Power Switch. Then, wait for 10
sec. or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch to reset the malfunction display.
C0214 LCT shifting failure The Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked
shift operation began (shift to the right).
The Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor
Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation
began (shift to the right).
The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift
operation began (shift to the right).
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the return operation began (shift to the left).
blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return opera-
tion began (shift to the left).
The Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return
operation began (shift to the left).
C0215 LCT Shift Motor malfunction The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot detect
both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has
elapsed while the Shift Tray Motor (M4-LCT) is turning
backward/forward (raise/lower).
32
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3 Solution
8.3.1 C0001: LCT communication error
8.3.2 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait
for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.

Elevator Motor (M5-LCT)
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT)
Interface Board (PWB-H LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the motor and sensor connectors
for proper connection, and correct as
necessary.

2
drive coupling, and correct as neces-
sary.

3 PC10-LCT I/O, sensor check
PWB-H LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-4
4 M5-LCT operation check PWB-H LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-6 to 7 PC-403 G to H-5
5 PWB-H LCT replacement
33
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.3 C0210: LCT Lift Failure
8.3.4 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure
Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT)
Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT)
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT)
Lower Over Run Sensor (PC7-LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the sensor connectors for proper

PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-12
(ON)
PC-403 C-6
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-3
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-4
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-5
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the SL1-LCT connector for
proper connection, and correct as nec-
essary.

2 SL1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT PJ7C1 LCT-4 (ON) PC-403 C-8
34
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.5 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure
8.3.6 C0214: LCT Shift Failure
Division Board Position Sensor (PC14-LCT)
Division Board Motor (M3-LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

PWB-H LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-1
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-6
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT)
Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT)
Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1

(ON)
PC-403 G to H-5
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-4
(ON)
PC-403 G to H-4
35
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.7 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure
Shift Tray Motor (M4-LCT)
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

(ON)
PC-403 G to H-5
36
P
C
-
4
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
AD-503
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
A
D
-
5
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
AD-503
General
Maintenance
2.1.1 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 1, 2 ............................................................. 3
2.1.2 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 3 ................................................................. 3
2.1.3 Cleaning Ventilation Section ......................................................................... 4
3. Other ....................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............................................................. 6
3.3 Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................ 6
3.3.1 Duplex Unit.................................................................................................... 6
Adjustment/Setting
4. How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 7
5. Sensor check........................................................................................................... 8
5.1 Check procedure .................................................................................................. 8
5.2 Sensor check list................................................................................................... 8
5.2.1 Sensor check screen..................................................................................... 8
5.2.2 Sensor check list ........................................................................................... 8
6. Mechanical adjustment ........................................................................................... 9
6.1 Adjusting the paper reference position ................................................................. 9
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 11
7.1 Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 11
7.2 Sensor layout ...................................................................................................... 11
7.3 Solution............................................................................................................... 12
7.3.1 Initial check items........................................................................................ 12
7.3.2 Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed (AD-503) ............................... 13
7.3.3 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed (AD-503)......................................... 14
A
D
-
5
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
Blank Page
1
A
D
-
5
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
A. Type
B. Paper type
NOTE
Name Duplex Unit
Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit
Installation Mounted on the right side door of main unit
Type Plain paper
64 to 256 g/m
2
(17 to 68 lb)
Size A5R to A3 Wide, 5.5 8.5R to 12 18
Print paper size width 139.7 to 311.1 mm (5.5 12.25 inch)
length 148.0 to 457.2 mm (5.75 18 inch)
Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V 5 % (supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions 110 mm (W) 440 mm (D) 345 mm (H)
2
A
D
-
5
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
3
A
D
-
5
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Periodical check
NOTE
isopropyl alcohol.
2.1.1 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 1, 2
1. Open the Duplex Unit Door [1].
alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller /
Roll 1 [2], 2 [3] clean of dirt.
2.1.2 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 3
1. Remove the Duplex Unit.
6
alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller /
Roll 3 [1] clean of dirt.
4066F2C503DA
[1]
[3]
[2]
4066F2C504DA
[1]
4
A
D
-
5
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.1.3 Cleaning Ventilation Section
alcohol, wipe the outside of the
Ventilation Section [1] clean of dirt.
alcohol, wipe the inside of the Venti-
lation Section [3] clean of dirt.
4066F2C505DA
[1]
4066F2C506DA
[3]
[2]
5
A
D
-
5
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Other
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
dures.
6
A
D
-
5
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3.3.1 Duplex Unit
1. Release the tab [1], and remove the
Connector Cover [2].
4. Remove two screws [5], and remove
the Duplex Unit [6].
1 Unit Duplex Unit 6
4066F2C500DA
[1]
[2]
4066F2C501DA
[3]
4066F2C502DA
[6]
[5]
[4]
7
A
D
-
5
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Caution
procedures.
extremely hot.
8
A
D
-
5
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5. Sensor check
5.1 Check procedure
<Procedure>
the main unit service manual.
ual main unit.
A. Sensor monitor 2
4066F3E502DA
Panel display
1 0
PCI DU Set Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor OPEN CLOSE
PC1 DU Paper Passage 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2 DU Paper Passage 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper
present
Paper not
present
9
A
D
-
5
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
For details of how to display the Ser-
vice Mode screen, see the Adjust-
ment/Setting of the main unit service
manual.
2. Touch [Machine] [Printer Area]
[Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge].
3. Touch [1st.] and then press the Start
key. A test print will then be pro-
duced.
ence line A.
Specifications: 3.0 mm 2.0 mm
tion value.
for width A.
4066F3E503DA
4066F3E504DA
4535fs3506c0
A
10
A
D
-
5
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
11
A
D
-
5
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display
7.1 Misfeed display
7.2 Sensor layout
Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action
9201 Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed
Duplex Unit Door
13
9301 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed 14
[1] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU [3] Registration Roller Sensor PC1
[2] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU
4066F4C500DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
12
A
D
-
5
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3 Solution
Check item Action
Replace paper.
procedures.
worn?
Finger.
Set as necessary.
13
A
D
-
5
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3.2 Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed (AD-503)
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Duplex
pre-registration
section
given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take-up sequence started.
Duplex Unit Pre-
registration section
Loop Registration
Reversing JAM
detection
front of the Registration Roller at pre-registration take-up.
Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
3 PWB-A DU replacement
4 PWB-M replacement
14
A
D
-
5
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3.3 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed (AD-503)
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Detection of
misfeed at Duplex
Transport section
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) is
blocked by the paper.
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) is not unblocked even after the set
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not unblocked even after the set
Detection of paper
remaining in the
Duplex Unit
transport section
The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2
(PC2 DU) are blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover
is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
3 PC1 DU I/O, sensor check C250 Q-21
4 PC2 DU I/O, sensor check C250 Q-21
5 M1 DU operation check PWB-A DU PJ4A-1 to 4 C250 R-22
6 M2 DU operation check PWB-A DU PJ5A-1 to 4 C250 R-22
7 PWB-A DU replacement
8 PWB-M replacement
SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
FS-501
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
FS-501
General
Maintenance
2. Other ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.1 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover.................. 6
2.3.2 Stapling Unit.................................................................................................. 7
2.3.3 Job Separator JS-601 (Option) ..................................................................... 7
Adjustment/Setting
3. How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 9
4. Sensor Check........................................................................................................ 10
4.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 10
5.1 Adjustment of the solenoids................................................................................ 12
5.1.1 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) .. 12
5.1.2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN)............. 12
5.2 Timing belt tension adjustment ........................................................................... 12
5.2.1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt .................. 12
5.2.2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt .................. 12
5.2.3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt ..................................... 13
5.3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor .......................................... 13
6. Board switch.......................................................................................................... 14
7. Test mode.............................................................................................................. 15
7.1 Test mode setting procedure .............................................................................. 15
7.2 Test mode operations ......................................................................................... 15
7.3 Operation in each test mode operation............................................................... 16
7.3.1 1st Tray Exit................................................................................................. 16
7.3.2 Elevator Tray Exit ........................................................................................ 16
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
7.3.3 Finisher Tray Exit ........................................................................................ 16
7.3.4 Shifting Operation....................................................................................... 16
7.3.5 Aligning Plate Operation............................................................................. 17
7.3.6 Stapling Unit CD Movement........................................................................ 17
7.3.7 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing ............................................................................ 17
7.3.8 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing...................................................................... 18
7.3.9 Elevator Tray Operation .............................................................................. 18
7.3.10 Sensor Test................................................................................................. 18
Troubleshooting
8. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 19
8.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 19
8.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 20
8.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 21
8.3.3 Tray1 Exit section misfeed .......................................................................... 23
8.3.4 Job Tray Exit section misfeed (JS-601)....................................................... 23
8.3.5 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed .............................................................. 24
8.3.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed................................................................ 24
8.3.7 Stapler section misfeed............................................................................... 25
8.3.8 Horizontal Transport section misfeed.......................................................... 25
9. Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 26
9.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 27
9.3.1 C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions........................................................ 27
9.3.2 C1183: Elevator Motor drive malfunctions .................................................. 27
9.3.3 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction.............................................. 28
9.3.4 C11A1: Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction......................... 28
9.3.5 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction .................. 29
9.3.6 C11B0: Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction................................ 29
9.3.7 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction ................................................... 30
1
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
*: 20 sheets if originals of high ID (Color Wise 3) is used.
*: 15 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper.
*: 20 sheets when using Hammermill Laser Print90 paper.
Type Single Staple Finisher
Installation Freestanding
Supplies Staple Cartridge
Option Job separator (JS-601)
Modes Group, Sort, Offset/Group, Offset/Sort, Sort Staple and Group Staple
Mode Size Type Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray
No. of Sheets to
be Stapled
Group, Sort
A6R to A3 Wide
5-1/2 8-1/2R/
5-1/2 8-1/2 to
12-1/4 18
Plain paper
60 to 256 g/m
2
16 to 68 lb
250 sheets
1
st
Tray
-
Thick paper
20 sheets
OHP Film
Translucent
paper
Postcard
Envelope
Label paper
Letterhead
Offset/
Group,
Offset/Sort
B5R/B5 to
A3 Wide
7-1/4 10-1/2R/
7-1/4 10-1/2 to
12-1/4 18
Plain paper
60 to 209 g/m
2
16 to 55-1/2 lb
1,000 sheets
(A4R,
8-1/2 11R
or smaller);
500 sheets
(B4, 8-1/2 14
or larger)
Elevator
Tray
-
Thick paper
Sort Staple,
Group Staple
B5R/B5 to A3
7-1/4 10-1/2R/
7-1/4 10-1/2 to
11 17
Plain paper
60 to 90 g/m
2
16 to 24 lb
Cover Mode
91 to 209 g/m
2
24-1/4 to
55-1/2 lb
1,000 sheets
(A4R,
8-1/2 11R
or smaller);
500 sheets
(B4, 8-1/2 14
or larger)
Elevator
Tray
30 sheets*
(60 to 80 g/m
2
,
16 to 21-1/4 lb)
2
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
D. Stapling
E. Sort and staple capacity
(1) Stacking with no stapling, with the same size paper (80g/m
2
)
Determined by the item whose value is reached first among number of stacked paper,
stacked height or mass of stack.
Determined by the stacked height when stacking with stapling and no stapling mixed.
Number of stacked paper
Stacked height
Mass of stack
(2) Stacking with stapling
(Reference: Actual value) Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on
number of bindings.
Number of stacked paper
Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (3000 staples)
Staple Detection Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples)
Stapling Position
Diagonal back side (45 C) 1 point
Rear Parallel 1 point
Stapled Paper Size
B5R/B5 to A3
8-1/2 11R / 8-1/2 11 to 11 17
Manual Staple None
FD No. of Sheets
A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller 1000 sheets
B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger 500 sheets
FD Height
A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller 150 mm
B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger 75 mm
FD Mass
A4R, 8-1/2 11R or smaller correspond to 1000 sheets
B4, 8-1/2 14 or larger correspond to 500 sheets
No. of Sheets to be Stapled No. of Sets No. of Sheets
2 pages 100 sets 200 Sheets
3 to 5 pages 80 sets 400 Sheets
3
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
F. Machine specifications
G. Operating environment
NOTE
Power Requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V (generated by Finisher)
Max. Power
Consumption
63 W or less
Dimensions
538 mm (W) 637 mm (D) 978 mm (H)
21-1/4 inch (W) 25 inch (D) 38-1/2 inch (H)
Weight 38.1 kg (84 lb)
4
F
S
-
5
0
1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
5
F
S
-
5
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Other
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
dures.
6
F
S
-
5
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.1 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover
1. Open the Upper Door [5]
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Upper Cover.
3. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Upper Front Cover.
4. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Lower Front Cover.
5. Remove four screws [4] and remove the Rear Cover.
1
Exterior Parts
Upper Cover 6
2 Upper Front Cover 6
3 Lower Front Cover 6
4 Rear Cover 6
5 Unit Stapling Unit 7
6 Option Job Separator JS-601 7
4684fs2508c0
[1]
[1] [5]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
7
F
S
-
5
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.2 Stapling Unit
1. Holding both sides of the cover [1],
lift the cover up and take it off.
2. Remove two screws [2], disconnect
the connector [3], and remove the
Stapling Unit [4] from the moving
cradle.
2.3.3 Job Separator JS-601 (Option)
1. Remove three claws [1], and remove
the front cover of the Job Separator
[2].
2. Remove three claws [3], and remove
the rear cover of the Job Separator
[4].
4684fs2501c0
[1]
4684fs2502c0
[2]
[4]
[3]
4683F2C504DA
[2]
[1]
[1]
4683F2C505DA
[3]
[3]
[4]
8
F
S
-
5
0
1
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove two screws [5] and the con-
nector [6], and remove the Job Sepa-
rator [7].
4683F2C506DA
[6]
[7]
[5]
9
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Caution
procedures.
extremely hot.
4. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
10
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
4. Sensor Check
4.1 Check procedure
<Procedure>
2. Touch the [State Confirmation] Check key.
ual main unit.
4684F3E500DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Sensor Check
11
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
A. Sensor monitor 3
Panel display
1 0
PC1-FN Exit (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC19-FN Exit (Non-sort3) Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-FN Exit (Finisher) Storage Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC4-FN Upper Paper Pass Upper Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2-FN Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC6-FN Full (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC20-FN Full (Non-sort3) Job Tray Full Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-FN Full (Elev. Tray) Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC5-FN Empty (Finisher) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PWB-D
FN
Surface (Elev.) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC8-FN Empty (Elev.) Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC9-FN Home (CD-Align) CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC14-FN Staple Standby Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC12-FN Home (store roller) Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC13-FN Home (Exit roller) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
- Home (Stapler) Stapler Home Sensor Unblocked Blocked
- Empty St. Needle Staple Empty Detecting Sensor Unblocked Blocked
- Self Priming Self-Priming Sensor Unblocked Blocked
S2-FN
S3-FN
Elevate Tray Raised/
Lowered
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch
ON OFF
PC10-FN Home (Shift) Shift Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PC11-FN Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked
12
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.1 Adjustment of the solenoids
5.1.1 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)
1. Loosen the screw [1] that secures
the solenoid in position.
2. Move the solenoid [2] up and down
and lower the lever [3] downward. At
this time, find a position at which the
clearance at portion A becomes 0.5
mm or less. Then, tighten the screw
[1].
5.1.2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN)
1. Loosen the screw [1] that secures
the solenoid in position.
2. Move the solenoid [2] to the right or
left and, when dimension B mea-
sures 3.6 mm, tighten the screw [1].
5.2 Timing belt tension adjustment
5.2.1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt
1. Loosen two screws [1].
2. Move the mounting bracket [2] and
tighten the screw [1] so that the cen-
ter of the screw [1] on the upper right
side is located at the marked position
[3] of the mounting bracket [2].
5.2.2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt
2. Move the mounting bracket [2] and,
when the belt deflects 2 mm at C,
tighten two screws [1].
4684fs2503c0
[1]
[3]
[2]
4684fs2504c0
[2]
[1]
4684fs2505c0
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
4684fs2506c0
[2]
[1]
[1]
13
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.2.3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt
1. Loosen three screws [1].
2. Tighten three screws [1] so that the
distance D between the upper end
face of the head of three screws [1]
and the upper end face of the slot in
the mounting bracket [2] measures
about 0.5 mm.
5.3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor
1. Set up the sensor test mode.
2. Turn VR1 on PWB-A FN fully counterclockwise.
3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN).
4. Check that LED4 on PWB-A FN turns OFF. If it stays ON, slowly turn VR1 clockwise
and stop turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF.
4684fs2507c0
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
4684fs2509c0
[1]
[2]
6. Board switch Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
14
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6. Board switch
Symbol Description
[1] S1 Used to run the Test Mode operation.
[2] S2 Used to run the Test Mode operation.
[3] S3 DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation.
[4] LED1 to 4
Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode
operations.
4684fs4503c0
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Test mode
15
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7. Test mode
7.1 Test mode setting procedure
<Setting Procedure>
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit.
2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary. (See Table
below.)
3. Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit.
4. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding Test Mode operation.
<Resetting Procedure>
Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective initial positions. Then turn OFF the Main
Power Switch of the main unit, wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the Main Power
Switch.
7.2 Test mode operations
NOTE
Whenever the Control Board (PWB-A FN) is to be replaced, take note of the initial
positions of all keys of the DIP switch. After the replacement procedure has been
completed, be sure to flip all keys of the DIP switch on the new Control Board
(PWB-A FN) to their respective initial positions.
Test mode operation
DIP Switch (S3) LED
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1st Tray exit ON
Elevator Tray exit ON
Finisher Tray exit ON ON
Shifting operation ON ON
Aligning Plate operation ON ON
Stapling Unit CD movement ON ON ON
Exit Roller/Rolls spacing ON
Storage Roller/Rolls spacing ON ON
Elevator Tray operation ON ON
Sensor test ON ON ON Indicates sensor state
: Blinking : OFF
7. Test mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
16
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7.3 Operation in each test mode operation
7.3.1 1st Tray Exit
7.3.2 Elevator Tray Exit
7.3.3 Finisher Tray Exit
7.3.4 Shifting Operation
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized
Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance
Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN), 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN)
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance
Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN), 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN)
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: OFF
Motors: Energized
Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN)
Motors: Deenergized
Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Lower Entrance Motor
(M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN)
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: OFF
Motors and solenoids: Energized
(M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid
(SL1-FN)
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
(M2-FN), Exit Motor (M3-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid
(SL1-FN)
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the front.
The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Test mode
17
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7.3.5 Aligning Plate Operation
7.3.6 Stapling Unit CD Movement
7.3.7 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing
S1-FN: ON
S1-FN: ON
S1-FN: ON
At the home position
At a position to align A4 paper
At a position to align Letter R paper
S1-FN: ON
At a position to align Letter paper
S1-FN: ON
At a position to align A4R paper
S1-FN: ON
S1-FN: ON
At home position
At a position for A4 corner stapling
S1-FN: ON
At a position for A4R corner stapling
S1-FN: ON
At home position
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: ON
Pressed
Separated
7. Test mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005
18
F
S
-
5
0
1
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
7.3.8 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing
7.3.9 Elevator Tray Operation
7.3.10 Sensor Test
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: ON
Pressed
Separated
S1-FN: ON
S2-FN: ON
Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is blocked.
Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is
unblocked.
Sensor State
LED
1 2 3 4
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Unblocked
Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) Blocked
Lower Entrance Sensor(PC2-FN) Blocked
Upper Entrance Sensor(PC4-FN) Blocked
: ON : OFF
19
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
8. Jam Display
8.1 Misfeed display
[1] 7403 Horizontal Transport section Horizontal Transport section Cover 25
[2] 7401 Transport section Front Door 22
[3] 7402 Tray1 Exit section Front Door 23
[4] 7402 Elevator Tray Exit section Front Door 24
[5] 7404 Paper Stack Exit section Front Door 24
[6]
7405
7406
Stapler section Front Door 25
[7] 7402 Job Tray Exit section (JS-601) Job Tray Upper Cover 23
4684F4C501DA
[1]
[7]
[2] [6] ~
20
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.2 Sensor layout
[1] Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19-FN [5] Turnover Empty Sensor PC6-HO
[2] 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1-FN [6] Paper Sensor PC1-HO
[3] Upper Entrance Sensor PC4-FN [7] Storage Sensor PC3-FN
[4] Lower Entrance Sensor PC2-FN [8] Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5-FN
4684fs4502c0
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[8]
21
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3 Solution
Check item Action
Replace paper.
procedures.
worn?
Finger.
Set as necessary.
22
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Transport section
misfeed detection
The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor
(PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.
The Job tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given
period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor
(PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.
The Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper
Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.
The Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper
Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.
Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN)
1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN)
Paper Sensor (PC1-HO)
Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN)
Storage Sensor (PC3-FN)
Entrance Motor (M1-FN)
Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN)
Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN)
Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC19-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN PJ14A-6 (ON) FS-501 B-4
4 PC1-HO I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN PJ15A-4 (ON) FS-501 B-5
5 PC4-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN PJ20A-9 (ON) FS-501 H-6
8 M1-FN operation check PWB-A FN PJ9A-1 to 4 FS-501 B-2
11 PWB-A FN replacement
23
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.3 Tray1 Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
8.3.4 Job Tray Exit section misfeed (JS-601)
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Tray1 Exit section
misfeed detection
The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after it has been blocked.
1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
Type Description
Job Tray Exit
section misfeed
detection (JS-601)
The Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after it has been blocked.
Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
24
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.5 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
8.3.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Elevator Tray Exit
section misfeed
detection
The Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given
period of time after it has been blocked.
Storage Sensor (PC3-FN)
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
Type Description
Paper Stack Exit
section misfeed
detection
The Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) remains activated when a copy stack,
which has been stapled together, is fed out.
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
25
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.7 Stapler section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
8.3.8 Horizontal Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Stapler section
misfeed detection
The Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after
the forward drive of the Stapler has been started.
Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN)
Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
4 Stapling Unit replacement
Type Description
Horizontal
Transport section
misfeed detection
The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has
unblocked the Paper Exit Sensor of the main unit.
The Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper
has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO).
Paper Sensor (PC1-HO)
Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 Horizontal Transport section gear check
26
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9. Trouble code
4684F4E502DA
C1182 Shift Motor drive
malfunctions
The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go HIGH
even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8-FN has
been energized (to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home
position).
The Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) does not go LOW
been energized (to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset).
C1183 Elevator Motor drive
malfunctions
The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is not
activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7-
FN has been energized (to start raising the Elevator Tray).
The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) or Elevator Tray
Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) is actuated after M7-FN has been
energized.
C1190 CD Aligning Motor drive
malfunction
The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) does not go
LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5-FN
has been energized (to return the Aligning Plate to its home
position).
C11A1 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing
Motor drive malfunction
The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) does not go
HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13-FN
has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence).
C11A2 Storage Roller/Rolls
Spacing Motor drive
malfunction
The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) does not
go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M12-
FN has been energized (to start spacing/pressure sequence).
C11B0 Stapling Unit Moving
Motor drive malfunction
The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) does not go HIGH
been energized (to return the Stapling Unit to its home position).
C11B2 Stapling Motor drive
malfunction
Stapling Motor is not deenergized even after the lapse of a given
period of time after it has been energized (to start a stapling
sequence).
27
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.3 Solution
9.3.1 C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions
9.3.2 C1183: Elevator Motor drive malfunctions
Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN)
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN)
Shift Motor (M8-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

5 M8-FN operation check PWB-A FN PJ5A-3 to 4 FS-501 H-7
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN)
Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN)
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN)
Elevator Motor (M7-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

3 PWB-D FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN PJ21A-2, 4 FS-501 G to H-6
4 S2-FN operation check PWB-A FN PJ4A-1 FS-501 H-8
5 S3-FN operation check PWB-A FN PJ4A-4 FS-501 H-8
6 M7-FN operation check PWB-A FN PJ5A-1 to 2 FS-501 H-7
28
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.3.3 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction
9.3.4 C11A1: Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction
CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN)
CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, move
the Aligning Plate out of its home posi-
tion, and turn ON the Main Power
Switch. Operation check of the CD
aligning Motor (M5-FN) at this time.
PWB-A FN PJ11A-5 to 8 FS-501 B-3
Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN)
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
M13-FN operation check when the Main
Power Switch is turned OFF and ON.
29
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.3.5 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction
9.3.6 C11B0: Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction
Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN)
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN)
Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, move
the Stapling Unit out of its home posi-
tion, and turn ON the Main Power
Switch. Operation check of the Stapling
Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) at this time.
30
F
S
-
5
0
1
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
9.3.7 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction
Stapling Motor
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the Stapling motor connectors for
proper connection, and correct as nec-
essary.

2
Check the connector of Stapling motor
for proper drive coupling, and correct as
necessary.

SERVICE MANUAL
2005.07
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE
FS-603
Revision history
Revision mark:
ing page.
NOTE
1
1
1
1
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
i
CONTENTS
FS-603
General
Maintenance
2. Other ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.1 Exit Tray ........................................................................................................ 7
2.3.2 Front Cover ................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3 Rear Cover.................................................................................................... 7
2.3.4 Upper Door ................................................................................................... 8
2.3.5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover ............................................................................ 8
2.3.6 Upper Cover.................................................................................................. 9
2.3.7 Side Guide .................................................................................................... 9
2.3.8 Middle Transport Unit .................................................................................. 10
2.3.9 Stapler......................................................................................................... 10
2.3.10 Saddle Section............................................................................................ 11
2.3.11 Finisher Tray................................................................................................ 11
2.3.12 Paddle Section............................................................................................ 13
2.3.13 Exit Roller (Upper) ...................................................................................... 14
2.3.14 Paddle......................................................................................................... 14
2.3.15 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt ....................................................... 15
2.3.16 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit ........................................................................... 17
2.3.17 Transport Roller........................................................................................... 18
2.3.18 Middle Transport Roller ............................................................................... 19
2.3.19 Punch Unit .................................................................................................. 20
2.3.20 Finisher Control Board................................................................................ 21
2.3.21 Punch Control Board................................................................................... 21
2.3.22 Transport Motor Unit ................................................................................... 22
2.3.23 Middle Transport Motor ............................................................................... 22
2.3.24 Punch Motor................................................................................................ 22
2.3.25 Side Registration Motor .............................................................................. 22
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
ii
Adjustment/Setting
3. How to use the adjustment section....................................................................... 23
4. Sensor check ........................................................................................................ 24
4.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 24
4.2 Sensor check list ................................................................................................ 24
4.2.1 Sensor check screen .................................................................................. 24
5.1 Adjustment of the stapling position..................................................................... 26
5.1.1 Adjustment procedure................................................................................. 26
5.2 Adjustment of the folding position....................................................................... 28
5.3 Adjustment of height and inclination................................................................... 30
5.4 Adjustment of the Folding Position ..................................................................... 32
5.5 Stapler Phase Adjustment .................................................................................. 36
5.6 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment ......................................................................... 39
6. Board switch ......................................................................................................... 40
6.1 PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board) .................................................................. 40
6.1.1 Adjustment of the folding positions ............................................................. 41
6.1.2 Adjustment of the center stapling position.................................................. 42
6.1.3 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position ................................................ 43
6.2 PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board) ..................................................................... 45
6.2.1 Adjustment of the sensor output ................................................................. 46
6.2.2 Registration of the number of punch holes ................................................. 46
6.2.3 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)..................................... 47
6.2.4 Punch center position adjustment............................................................... 47
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display........................................................................................................... 51
7.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 51
7.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 52
7.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 53
7.3.3 Horizontal Transport section misfeed.......................................................... 54
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
iii
7.3.4 Folding position section misfeed................................................................. 54
7.3.5 Stapler section misfeed............................................................................... 55
7.3.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed................................................................ 55
8. Trouble code.......................................................................................................... 56
8.1 Trouble code display ........................................................................................... 56
8.2 Trouble code list .................................................................................................. 56
8.3 Solution............................................................................................................... 59
8.3.1 C1180: Transport System Drive malfunctions............................................. 59
8.3.2 C1181: Paddle Motor malfunctions............................................................. 59
8.3.3 C1183: Elevate Mechanism malfunctions ................................................... 60
8.3.4 C1192: Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions......................................... 60
8.3.5 C1193: Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions ......................................... 61
8.3.6 C11A4: Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions..................................................... 61
8.3.7 C11B1: Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions............................................ 62
8.3.8 C11B4: Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions................................................ 62
8.3.9 C11C1: Punch Control Board malfunctions ................................................ 64
8.3.10 C11C2: Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions................................. 65
8.3.11 C11C3: Punch Motor malfunctions ............................................................. 65
8.3.12 C11C5: Punch Sensor malfunctions ........................................................... 66
8.3.13 C1401: Backup RAM malfunction ............................................................... 67
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
iv
Blank Page
1
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
General
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
Remove the finisher off the Copier for feeding the long paper.
The maximum loading capacity shown is for when loading the single type of paper (80g/
m
2
)
(1) Group, Sort
*1: Controlled by whichever reached earlier
(2) Sort offset, Sort group
Type Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle (Booklet)
Installation Freestanding
Supplies Staple Cartridge
Modes Normal Group, Sort, Group Offset, Sort Offset, Sort Staple,
Center Staple & Fold
Punch (Option) Group Punch, Sort Punch, Group Offset Punch,
Sort Offset Punch, Sort Staple Punch
Type Size Weight Tray Capacity *1 Exit Tray
No. of
Sheets to
be Stapled
Plain Paper B5R/B5 to
A3 wide
5.5 8.5R/
5.5 8.5 to
12.25 18
60 to 90 g/m
2
16 to 24 lb
No. of
Sheet
Height
A4R/
8.5 11R
or smaller
1000
150 mm
B4/
8.5 14
or larger
500
75 mm
1st paper
exit tray
-
Envelop
OHP Film
Label Paper
Thick Paper
60 to 256 g/m
2
16 to 68 lb
20 sheet
Type Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray
No. of
Sheets to
be Stapled
Plain Paper A5, B5R/B5
to A3
8.5 11R/
8.5 11 to
11 17
60 to 90 g/m
2
16 to 24 lb
No. of
Sheets
Height
A4R/
8.5 11R
or smaller
1000
150 mm
B4/
8.5 14
or larger
500
75 mm
1st paper
exit tray
-
Controlled by whichever
reached earlier
2
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
(3) Sort staple
*1: The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images.
(Color Wise: 20 sheets x 20 sets)
(4) Center Staple & Fold
D. Stapling
No. of Sheets to
be Stapled
Plain Paper
Thick Paper
B5R/B5 to
A3
8.5 11R/
8.5 11 to
1117
Normal Mode
60 to 90 g/m
2
16 to 24 lb
Cover Mode
60 to 209 g/m
2
16 to 55.5 lb
No. of
Sheets
Height
No. of
Sets
A4R/
8.5 11R
or smaller
1000
150 mm
30
B4/
8.5 14
or larger
500
75 mm
30
1st
paper
exit tray
Normal Mode *1
A4R/
8.5 11R
or smaller
2 to 50
B4/
8.5 14
or larger
2 to 25
Controlled by whichever
reached earlier
No. of Sheets to
be Stapled
Plain Paper A4R, B4, A3
8.5 11R/
11 17
60 to 90 g/m
2
16 to 24 lb
10 sets
(No. of Sheets to be
Stapled: 6 to 15 sheets)
20 sets
(No. of Sheets to be
Stapled: 2 to 5 sheets)
2nd paper
exit tray
Black copy
2 to 15 sheets
(Max. 60 pages)
Other copy
2 to 10 sheets
(Max. 40 pages)
Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5000 staples)
Staple Detection Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples)
Stapling Position
Rear: Parallel 1 point B5R/B5 to A3,
8.5 11R/8.5 11 to 11 17
Front: Parallel 1 point
Side: Parallel 2 points
Center: Parallel 2 points
Manual Staple None
Folding Mode Roller Pressure Folding
Folding Position Center of Paper
3
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
E. No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple)
(1) A4R, 8.5 11R or smaller
(2) B4, 8.5 14 or larger
F. Machine specifications
G. Operating environment
NOTE
No. of Sheets to be
Stapled
No. of Sets
Rear: Parallel Center: Parallel Front: Parallel
2 100 40 40
3 to 5 80 40 40
6 to 10 60 40 40
11 to 20 30 30 30
21 to 30 30 30 30
31 to 50 30 sets or 1000 sheets
No. of Sheets to be
Stapled
No. of Sets
Rear: Parallel Center: Parallel Front: Parallel
2 100 50 50
3 to 5 80 40 40
6 to 10 40 40 40
11 to 20
30 sets or 1000 sheets
21 to 25
Power Requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V (generated by Finisher)
Max. Power
Consumption
65 W or less
Dimensions
601 mm (W) 603 mm (D) 933 mm (H)
4
F
S
-
6
0
3
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
Blank Page
5
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
Maintenance
2. Other
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
dures.
6
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
1
Exterior Parts
Exit Tray 7
2 Front Cover 7
3 Rear Cover 7
4 Upper Door 8
5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover 8
6 Upper Cover 9
7
Unit
Side Guide 9
8 Middle Transport Unit 10
9 Stapler 10
10 Saddle Section 11
11 Finisher Tray 11
12 Paddle Section 13
13 Exit Roller (Upper) 14
14 Paddle 14
15 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt 15
16 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit 17
17 Transport Roller 18
18 Middle Transport Roller 19
19 Punch Unit 20
20
Electrical Parts
Finisher Control Board 21
21 Punch Control Board 21
22 Transport Motor Unit 22
23 Middle Transport Motor 22
24 Punch Motor 22
25 Side Registration Motor 22
7
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.1 Exit Tray
1. Remove four screws [1], and remove
the Exit Tray [2].
2.3.2 Front Cover
1. Remove the Middle Transport Unit.
10
3. While pinching the claws [2], remove
the Folding Jam Release Dial [3].
4. Remove two screws [4].
5. Remove the screw [5], and remove
the Front Cover [6].
2.3.3 Rear Cover
10
the Rear Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
4583fs2526c0
[1]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4583fs2527c0
[5]
[6]
4583fs2528c0
[1]
4583fs2529c0
[1]
[2]
4583fs2530c0
8
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.4 Upper Door
1. Open the Upper Door [1], and
remove the Door Band Holder [2] by
turning it clockwise.
2. Remove the Door Band [3].
the grounding wire.
4. Remove the screw [5], remove the
Finisher Tray Rear Cover [6], and
remove the Upper Door [7].
2.3.5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover
7
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
7
3. Remove the Upper Door.
8
5. Disconnect the connector [3] while
holding up the Finisher Tray Upper
Cover [2], and remove the Finisher
Tray Upper Cover [2].
[1]
[4]
4583fs2531c0
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
4583fs2532c0
[7]
[1]
4583fs2533c0
[2]
[3]
4583fs2534c0
9
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.6 Upper Cover
7
7
4. Open the Upper Door[2],and remove
the Upper Cover [3].
2.3.7 Side Guide
7
7
7
4. Derail the Exit Tray Support Plate
(Front) [1] and the Exit Tray Support
Plate (Rear) [2] to the outside off the
respective rail grooves.
5. Remove four screws [3].
6. Pull down the Side Guide [4] lightly,
disengage the Exit Tray Home Posi-
tion Detecting Lever (Rear) [5], and
then remove the Side Guide [4].
NOTE
In reassembling, ensure of exact
installation with the Exit Tray Home
Position Detecting Lever (Rear) [5]
set in the slot of the Exit Tray Home
Position Detecting Lever (Center)
[6].
After reassembly, press each of
these levers for several times to
make sure of exact installation.
[1]
4583fs2535c0
[1]
[2]
[3]
4583fs2536c0
[3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
4583fs2537c0
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
4583fs2538c0
[6]
[5]
[5]
[6]
4583fs2539c0
10
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.8 Middle Transport Unit
1. Remove four screws [1].
2. Hold up the Middle Front Cover [2]
and the Middle Rear Cover [3], and
remove them while shifting them
back and forth.
3. Disconnect two connectors [4].
4. Pinch the tie band [5], and remove it
from the sheet metal.
7. Remove the Middle Transport Unit by
sliding it upwards.
2.3.9 Stapler
2. Pull out the Stapler [3] while pressing
the Stop Lever [2].
NOTE
Do not remove the Stapler from the
shaft of the stapler frame, or dis-
placement will be caused between
the position to which the Staple
Driver [4] (the lower unit of the Sta-
pler) feeds staples and the position
from which the Staple Clincher [5]
(the upper unit of the Stapler)
receives them.
[1]
[1]
4583fs2540c0
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
4583fs2541c0
[6]
[7]
[7]
4583fs2542c0
[3]
[1]
4583fs2502c0
[2]
4583fs2503c0
[5]
[4]
11
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.10 Saddle Section
7
7
3. Remove the Punch Dust Box.
4. Open the Jam Access Cover [1],
remove two screws [2], and remove
the Right Stay [3].
the Lever [5].
6. Turn the Folding Jam Release Dial
[6] to move the Paper Pressure [7]
inside.
7. Remove the C-clip [8], and remove
the Belt [9].
8. Disconnect two connectors [10].
9. Remove the Stapler[11].
10
10. Remove three screws [12], and pull
out and remove the Saddle [13].
2.3.11 Finisher Tray
1. Remove the Finisher Tray Upper
Cover.
8
2. Remove the Side Guide.
9
3. Remove two screws [1],and discon-
nect six connectors [2].
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
4583fs2544c0
[7]
[6]
4583fs2518c0
[8]
[9]
[10]
4583fs2519c0
[11]
[12]
[12]
[13]
4583fs2520c0
[1]
[2]
[2]
4583fs2546c0
[1]
[2]
[2]
12
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base
[3], and disengage the front claw [5]
and the rear claw [6] of the Finisher
Stopper [4].
5. Remove the Motor Harness [8] from
two Harness Saddles [7].
6. Disconnect three connectors [9].
the spacer [11], and remove the Belt
[13] from the Gear [12].
8. Disconnect the connector [14], and
remove the Harness [16] from the
Wire Saddle [15].
9. Remove two screws [17], and
remove the Finisher Tray [18] by slid-
ing it to the far side and lifting it.
[6]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[3]
4583fs2522c0
[8]
[7]
[9]
4583fs2523c0
[6]
4583fs2547c0 [10]
[11]
[13]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[18]
[17]
4583fs2525c0
13
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.12 Paddle Section
1. Remove the Finisher Tray.
11
2. Place the Finisher Tray [1] as shown
in the figure.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage the Align-
ing Plate [2].
3. Remove the Belt [3], and remove two
screws [4].
4. Separate the section into the Tray
Section[5] and the Paddle Section
[6].
[1]
[2]
[2]
4583fs2548c0
[4]
[4]
[3]
4583fs2549c0
[5]
4583fs2550c0
[6]
14
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.13 Exit Roller (Upper)
1. Remove the Paddle Section.
13
2. Place the Paddle Section [1] as
shown in the figure.
3. Turn the gear [2] in the direction indi-
cated by an arrow to move up the
Exit Roller (Upper) section [3].
4. Push up the Exit Roller (Upper) [4]
from the bottom to release it from the
shaft [5].
5. Turn up the Exit Roller (Upper) [6],
and then push it down to remove it.
6. Remove the front Exit Roller (Upper)
[7] as well in the same way.
2.3.14 Paddle
1. Remove the Paddle Section.
13
2. Place the Paddle Section [1] as
shown in the figure.
[1]
4583fs2551c0
[2]
4583fs2552c0
[3]
[4]
4583fs2553c0
[5]
[6]
4583fs2554c0
[7]
[1]
4583fs2551c0
15
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Turn the gear [2] in the direction
indicted by an arrow to move up the
Exit Roller (Upper) section [3].
4. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from
the bottom to release it on one side
from the shaft [5].
5. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from
the bottom to release it from the
shaft [5] and remove it.
6. Remove the Paddle [6].
7. Remove the other Paddles as well in
the same way.
2.3.15 Exit Roller (Lower) and Paper Exit Belt
1. Remove the Tray Section.
13
2. Slide the Aligning Plate (Front) [2]
and the Aligning Plate (Rear) [3] out-
side to remove them from the Tray
[1].
[2]
4583fs2555c0
[3]
[4]
[5]
4583fs2556c0
[4]
[5]
4583fs2557c0
[6]
4583fs2558c0
[2]
[3]
[1]
4583fs2559c0
16
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove two Holders [4], and remove
the Finisher Tray Stopper [5].
the Paper Guide (Front) [8] while dis-
engaging two claws [7].
the Paper Guide (Rear) [11] while
disengaging the claw [10].
6. Remove two C-clips [12], and move
two bushings [13] inside, respec-
tively.
7. Remove four screws [14], and
remove the Exit Roller (Lower) sec-
tion [15] by lifting it.
[4]
4583fs2560c0
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
[8]
4583fs2561c0
[11]
[9]
[10]
4583fs2562c0
[12]
[13]
4583fs2563c0
[13]
[12]
[15]
[14]
4583fs2564c0
[14]
17
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
8. Remove the Exit Roller (Lower) [16]
and two Paper Exit Belts [17].
NOTE
When installing, align the edge of
claws of the Paper Exit Belt [18].
2.3.16 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit
7
2. Open the Front Door [1], and slightly
pull out the stapler section [2].
3. Remove screw [3], and remove the
interface cable presser [4].
4. Remove the Harness from seven
Harness Saddles[5].
Saddle, and disconnect two connec-
tors [6].
6. Remove the Harness from the Har-
ness Saddle, and disconnect the
connector [7].
Saddle, and disconnect two connec-
tors [8].
[16]
[17]
4583fs2565c0
[18]
4583fs2566c0
[1]
[2]
4583fs2567c0
[3]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[4]
4583fs2568c0
[6]
[7]
[8]
4583fs2569c0
18
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
the claw of Harness Guide [11] from
the square hole [10] in the base
plate.
9. Disconnect two connectors [12], and
Saddle.
10. Remove three screws [13].
the Stapler/Folding Drive Unit [15].
2.3.17 Transport Roller
1. Remove the Upper Door.
8
2. Remove the Upper Cover.
9
the Upper Cover Unit [2].
[9]
[10]
[11]
4583fs2570c0
[12]
4583fs2571c0
[12]
[13]
[13]
[13]
4583fs2572c0
[14]
4583fs2573c0 [15]
[1]
[1]
4583fs2576c0
[2]
19
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
4. Remove the Transport Motor Unit.
22
5. Remove the screw [3].
the bushing [5].
8. Remove the gear 1 [7], and remove
the gear 2 [8] while disengaging the
claw.
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the gear pin.
the bushing [10].
the Paper Guide (Lower) [12].
11. Remove the Transport Roller [13].
2.3.18 Middle Transport Roller
1. Remove the Middle Front Cover and
the Middle Rear Cover.
10
2. Remove Two screws [1], and remove
the Middle Upper Cover[2].
[4]
[5]
[3]
4583fs2575c0
[6]
4583fs2577c0
[12]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[7] [10]
4583fs2578c0
[13]
4583fs2579c0
[1]
[1]
[2]
4583fs2581c0
20
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
3. Remove the C-clip[3], and remove
the bushing [4].
4. Shift the Shaft Assy in the orientation
as shown on the left.
5. Remove the C-clip [5], the Gear [6],
the bushing [7], and remove the Mid-
dle Transport Roller [8].
2.3.19 Punch Unit
1. Remove the Punch Trash Box.
2. Disconnect the connector J1005 [1].
3. Remove the Harness from the Har-
ness Guide [2].
the Sensor Support Plate [5].
6. Remove the screw [6] and the
washer [7].
the base cover [10].
[4]
[3]
4583fs2582c0
[7]
[6]
4583fs2583c0
[8]
[5]
[2]
[1]
4583fs2586c0
[3]
[4]
[5]
4583fs2587c0
[9]
[10]
[7]
[6]
[8]
4583fs2588c0
21
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
9. Remove four screws [11], and
remove the Sensor Unit (Upper) [12]
and the Sensor Unit (Lower) [13].
10. Remove the spring[14].
11. Remove the Punch Unit [16] from the
Side Registration Motor section [15].
2.3.20 Finisher Control Board
7
2. Disconnect all connectors on the
Board, and remove the screw [1].
3. Release the PCB support [2], and
remove the Finisher Control Board
[3].
2.3.21 Punch Control Board
2. Disconnect seven connectors [2],
and remove the Punch Control
Board [3].
[11] [11]
4583fs2589c0
[13]
[12]
[11]
[11]
[16]
[15]
4583fs2590c0
[14]
[2]
[1]
[3]
4583fs2592c0
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2] 4583fs2591c0
[2]
[2]
22
F
S
-
6
0
3
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
2.3.22 Transport Motor Unit
7
3. Remove screw [2], and remove the
Harness Guide [3].
4. Remove three screws [4], and
remove the Transport Motor Unit [5].
2.3.23 Middle Transport Motor
1. Remove the Middle Rear Cover.
10
2. Remove the harness from the Wire
Saddle [1].
2.3.24 Punch Motor
1. Remove the Upper Cover.
9
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and
remove the punch motor [3].
2.3.25 Side Registration Motor
1. Disconnect the connector J1001 [1].
2. Remove the harness from the Har-
ness Guide [2].
the Side Registration Motor [4].
4583fs2574c0
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[4] [4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
4583fs2580c0
[3]
[2]
[1] 4583fs2584c0
[3]
[3]
[2]
4583fs2585c0
[1]
[4]
23
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Caution
procedures.
extremely hot.
24
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
4. Sensor check
4.1 Check procedure
<Procedure>
ual main unit.
A. Sensor monitor 4 (FS-603, PK-501)
4583F3E524DA
Panel display
1 0
PI1-FN Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI2-FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP
PI3-FN Bundle Roller Home Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP
PI4-FN Front Align Front Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor
HP
PI5-FN Back Align Rear Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor
HP
PI6-FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI7-FN Home (Exit Belt) Exit Belt Home Position Sensor HP
PI10-FN Crease Position Folding Position Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
25
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
PI13-FN Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI11-FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP
PI12-FN Crease Roller Home Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP
PI14-FN Crease Clock Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor
PI8-FN Paper Exit Tray Sensor Paper
present
Paper not
present
PI9-FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor DETECTED
PI15-FN Lift Raised Position Shift Upper Limit Sensor UPPER
LIMIT
PI16-FN Lift Lowered Position Shift Lower Limit Sensor LOWER
LIMIT
PI17-FN Lift Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor
Lift Middle FULL
PI18-FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP
PI19-FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP
PI20-FN Staple Staple Detecting Sensor SUPPLIED EMPTY
Stapler Connect. DETECTED
MS3-FN
MS4-FN
Stapler Safety SW Staple Safety Switch (Rear)
Staple Safety Switch (Front)
OPEN CLOSE
PI21-FN Self Prime Self-Priming Sensor READY
PI22-FN Front Door Front Door Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN
PI23-FN Upper Cover Upper Cover Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN
MS1-FN Front Door SW Front Door Open Switch CLOSE OPEN
Remain in Reverse
Section
HORIZON-
TAL
MS2-FN Joint SW Joint Open Switch CLOSE OPEN
Punch Depth 1
Punch Depth 2
Punch Depth 3
Punch Depth 4
Punch Dust FULL
Punch Timing
PI3P-PK Punch Motor Clock Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked Unblocked
PI1P-PK Punch (Home) Punch Home Position Sensor HP
PI2P-PK Punch Depth (Home) Side Registration Home Sensor HP
PC4-HO Horizontal Transport
Door
Horizontal Unit Door Sensor
Blocked Unblocked
Panel display
1 0
26
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.1 Adjustment of the stapling position
The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position.
This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is
made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of
1mm or more.
For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm, refer to
6. Board switch.
40
Adjustable range: - 7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm)
5.1.1 Adjustment procedure
1. Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Fold & Staple] [OK].
3. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray.
These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation.
4. Press the Start Key.
6. Touch [Finisher].
7. Touch [Center-Staple Position Adj.].
8. Renew the center folding of the finished copies.
Take the top surface of the finished copies as A, and the under surface as B.
9. Check the deviation of the stapling position from the newly folded position.
NOTE
In checking the deviation, refer not to the folded position by the Finisher but to the
newly folded position.
4583F3E506DA
27
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10. Press the Clear Key.
11. Adjust with the [+]/[-] Keys.
When the stapling position is shifted
to the direction A: Adjust the value to
the - side.
to the direction B: Adjust the value to
the + side.
12. Touch [END].
13. Make the copy and check again.
4583fs3501c0
A
B
A
B
A
B
<To + side> <Standard>
Standard:0 2 mm
<To - side>
4583F3E508DA
28
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.2 Adjustment of the folding position
The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position.
This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is
made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of
1 mm or more.
For the effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm, refer to
6. Board switch.
40
Adjustment range: - 7 to + 7 mm (Increment: 1 mm)
1. Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Fold & Staple] [OK].
3. Set five sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original (blank paper acceptable) in the Original Tray.
These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation.
4. Press the Start Key.
6. Touch [Finisher].
7. Touch [Half-Fold Position Adj.].
8. Check the finished copies for deviation of the stapling position of from the newly folded
position.
Take the top surface of the finished copies as A, and the under surface as B.
4583F3E510DA
4583fs3502c0
A
B
A
B
A
B
Standard: 0 2 mm
<To + side> <To - side> <Standard>
29
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
9. Press the Clear Key.
10. Adjust with the [+]/[-] Keys.
to the direction A: Adjust the value to
the + side.When the stapling position
is shifted to the direction B: Adjust
the value to the - side.
11. Touch [END].
12. Make the copy and check again.
4583F3E512DA
30
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.3 Adjustment of height and inclination
1. Gently move the finisher toward the
machine and check for following.
Is the positioning pin aligned with the
hole in the finisher?
Does the horizontal transport unit run
excessively slantwise?
Does the clearance at A equal that at
B?
If the finisher is not at the same height
as the machine, adjust the machine as
follows.
2. Remove the Finisher [1] from the
main unit, and remove two caster
covers [2].
3. Remove four adjusting screw covers
[3].
4583fs3503c0
A
B
4583fs3504c0
4583fs3505c0
[1]
[2]
4583fs3506c0
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
31
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
4. Loosen two caster fixing screws [4].
(4 points)
5. Turn the adjustment screw [5] to
make adjustment.
To heighten: Turn the screw counter-
clockwise.
To bring down: Turn the screw clock-
wise.
6. Fasten the caster fixing screws.
7. Install the caster covers and the
adjustment screw covers.
4583fs3507c0
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[5]
4583fs3508c0
32
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.4 Adjustment of the Folding Position
Folding position is adjusted by adjusting the Tray Section and the Saddle Section.
Adjust the folding position by aligning the Tray Section. Adjust the position of the Saddle
Section if the position is still not proper.
<Deviation amount which will be adjusted>
A. Checking the deviation amount
1. Load the Paper Take-up Tray with A3
paper.
2. Select [Fold & Staple] and touch
[OK].
3. Place the A3 Original (Blank paper
acceptable) to the original tray, and
press the Start key.
4. Check the fed out copy to see if there
is any deviation.
B. Adjusting the folding deviation
1. Turn main power switch OFF, and
remove the Finisher from the
machine.
2. Remove the cable, and remove the
Horizontal Unit [1].
Paper Size
Amount of deviation which will
be adjusted by aligning the Tray
Section
Amount of deviation which will
be adjusted by aligning the
Saddle Section position
Total amount which
will be adjusted
A3 0.55 mm 0.55 mm 1.1 mm
A4 0.4 mm 0.4 mm 0.8 mm
B4 0.5 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm
Ledger 0.55 mm 0.55 mm 1.1 mm
Letter 0.35 mm 0.35 mm 0.7 mm
4583F3E525DA
Exit
direction
Exit
direction
Deviated upward Deviated downward
4583F3C518DA
[1]
33
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10
4. Remove the front cover.
7
5. Loosen two screws [2] on the Tray
Section.
6. Move the Tray Section [3] back and
forth, and move the positioning dow-
els [4] right and left to adjust.
4583F3C519DA
[2]
4583F3C520DA
[3]
[4]
34
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
If it is deviated downward <A>, move
the positioning dowels to the left.
If it is deviated upward <B>, move the
positioning dowels to the right.
NOTE
The folding line will move along
with the staples.
7. Carry out the test copy to see if there
is any folding deviation.
If the deviation is not adjusted,
repeat the procedure from Step 8 to
adjust the Saddle Section position.
8. Loosen three set screws [5] on the
Saddle Section.
4583F3C523DA
<A>
<B>
4583F3C521DA
[5]
[5]
[5]
35
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
9. Move the two positioning dowels [6]
to adjust.
If it is deviated downward <C>, move
the positioning dowel to the left.
If it is deviated upward <D>, move the
positioning dowel to the right.
NOTE
Only the folding line will move.
10. Feed out the test copy and check if
there is any folding deviation.
4583F3C522DA
[6]
[6]
4583F3C524DA
<C>
<D>
36
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.5 Stapler Phase Adjustment
Make phase adjustment of the Stapler
following the procedures given below
whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in
front of the Stapler has been replaced
or removed for some reason, since
such replacement or removal will
cause mistiming between the staple
driving by the Staple Driver (the lower
unit of the Stapler) and the staple
clinching by the Staple Clincher (the
upper unit of the Stapler).
1. Remove the Stapler.
10
2. Remove the E-Ring [1], and remove
the Jam Release Dial 1[2].
3. Remove the Jam Release Dial 2 [3].
4. Remove the three screws [4], and
remove the Stapler Front Cover [5].
5. Remove the Gear Cover [7] from the
Staple Driver [6].
the Side Cover [10] from the Staple
Clincher [9].
7. Remove two E-Rings [11], and
remove the Staple Jam Release
Gear [12], the Timing Belt [13] and
the Middle Gear 1 [14].
8. Remove the spacer and the spring
located behind the Staple Jam
Release Gear.
9. Remove the screw [15] and the
spring [16], and remove the Belt Ten-
sion Roller [17].
4583fs2504c0
4583fs2543c0
[1]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
4583fs2505c0
[7]
[10]
[8]
[9]
[6]
4583fs2506c0
[13]
[15]
[17]
[11]
[12]
[16]
[14]
37
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
10. Remove the Timing Belt [18].
the Staple Position Confirm Gear
[20].
12. Turn the Gear [21] to position the
hole [22] in the Gear of the Staple
Driver to the hole behind.
13. Insert a pin of approx. 2 [23] (alter-
natively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or
the like can be preferably used) into
the hole, and fix the Gear.
14. Turn the Gear [24] to position the
hole [25] in the Cam of the Staple
Clincher to the hole behind.
15. Insert a pin of approx.2 [26] (alter-
natively, 2 mm hexagonal wrench or
the like can be preferably used) into
the hole, and fix the Cam.
4583fs2507c0
[19]
[20]
[18]
4583fs2508c0
[21]
[22]
4583fs2509c0
[23]
4583fs2510c0
[24]
[25]
[26]
4583fs2511c0
38
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
16. Set the Timing Belt [27] to the Gear
[28] and Gear [29] with the Gear and
the Cam in the fixed condition.
17. Install the Staple Position Confirm
Gear [32] in such a way that the blue
mark [30] of the Gear comes face to
face with the hole [31] in the frame.
NOTE
The position in which the blue mark
meets face to face with the hole is
the home position for stapling. If
the Staple Jam Release Gear is
turned for some reason, this home
position will shift and the Staple
Cartridge will not come off. In this
case, the Staple Position Confirm
Gear plays a role of resuming the
stapling home position by referring
to the blue mark. Therefore, the
Gear should be set in place cor-
rectly.
18. Remove the pin fixing the Gear and
the Cam to release them.
19. Set the spring [33], the spacer [34],
the Staple Jam Release Gear [35],
the Timing Belt [36] and the Middle
Gear 1 [37], and fix them with two E-
Rings [38].
4583fs2512c0
[28]
[29]
[27]
4583fs2513c0
[30]
[31]
[32]
4583fs2514c0
[35]
[38]
[37]
[33]
[34]
[36]
39
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
5.6 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment
Whenever the Gear in front of the Saddle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or
removed for some reason, make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given
below.
1. Remove the Saddle.
11
2. Remove five screws [1], and
remove the Saddle Gear Cover [2].
3. Set the Folding Roller [3] and Saddle
Cam [4] within the Saddle as shown
in the figure.
4. With the Folding Roller and the Sad-
dle Cam positioned as shown in the
Left figure, set the gears as shown in
the figure in the following way.
NOTE
The mark on the Saddle Cam Drive
Gear [5] (either of the two marks)
comes face to face with the mark on
the Middle Gear [6] (the mark on the
semi spherical part with narrow
gear face width).
5. With the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [5]
and the Middle Gear [6] positioned
as above, the mark on the Middle
Gear [6] (the mark on the other semi
spherical part) meets face to face
with the rib of the Folding Roller
Drive Gear [7].
4583fs2545c0
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
4583fs2515c0
4583fs2516c0
[5]
[6]
[7]
40
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6. Board switch
6.1 PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board)
Symbol Description
[1] SW1
Used to adjust the folding position, adjust the center 2-point stapling position and
adjust the alignment plate position.
[2] PSW1
[3] PSW2
6
3
5
1
1
4
1
5
1
1
2
1
1 4 1
5 1 1 1 1 12 1 6
1
7
3
1
9
1
1
1
1
2
1
5
10 2
CN10 CN18 CN22
1 1 9 7 1 11 1 4
CN2 CN21 CN9 CN11
CN6 CN8
CN13 CN3
C
N
7
C
N
2
0
C
N
5
C
N
1
9
C
N
1
5
C
N
1
6
C
N
1
2
C
N
1
7
C
N
1
4
C
N
1
C
N
4
LED2
PSW2
LED1
SW1
PSW1
4583fs3509c0
[1]
[2] [3]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Board switch
41
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1.1 Adjustment of the folding positions
When a folding position is adjusted, adjust the folding position to the stapling position.
Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding posi-
tion must be changed for some reason.
NOTE
Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position
may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher.
In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of
[Center Stapling Position] and [Folding Position] in the service mode to 0 mm on
the main unit.
1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control
Board as shown on the Left figure.
2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin-
isher Control Board for the required
times to adjust the folding position.
One pressing of the switch moves
the folding position by approx. 0.16
mm.
Press PSW1 to move the folding posi-
tion in the - direction.
Press PSW2 to move the folding posi-
tion in the + direction.
Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta-
neously to clear the present set adjust-
ment value.
3. After setting the adjustment value of the folding position, set all bits of SW1 on the Fin-
isher Control Board to OFF.
4. Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit, and confirm that the folding position has
been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3510c0
4583fs3523e0
+ direction
- direction
42
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1.2 Adjustment of the center stapling position
When a stapling position is adjusted, adjust the stapling position to the folding position.
Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the stapling
position must be changed for some reason.
NOTE
Depending on the type of paper, both the folding position and the stapling position
may be inaccurate. In this case, make adjustment independently from the Finisher.
In this independent adjustment from the Finisher, set the adjustment value of
[Center Stapling Position] and [Folding Position] in the service mode to 0mm on
the main unit.
1. Set SW1 on the Finisher Control
2. Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin-
isher Control Board for the required
times to adjust the stapling position.
One pressing of the switch moves
the stapling position by approx. 0.14
mm.
Press PSW1 to move the stapling
position in the - direction.
Press PSW2 to move the stapling
position in the + direction.
Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta-
neously to clear the present set adjust-
ment value.
3. After setting the adjustment value of the stapling position, set all bits of SW1 on the Fin-
isher Control Board to OFF.
4. Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit, and confirm that the stapling position
has been correctly adjusted. If not, redo the adjustment.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3512c0
4583fs3523e0
+ direction
- direction
43
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.1.3 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position
Alignment plate should be adjusted when there is a faulty alignment, the staple position
deviates.
A. Alignment procedure
NOTE
If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure, stop the procedure
immediately. Then turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit, wait for 10
sec. or more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch. After performing these steps,
start the procedure over.
1. Turn main power switch OFF, and
remove the Finisher from the
machine.
2. Remove the rear cover form the Fin-
isher.
7
3. Check to make sure that all SW1 on
the Finisher Controller Board are set
to OFF.
NOTE
When not all of them are OFF, write
down the switch status and turn
them OFF.
4. With the rear cover of the Finisher
removed, install the Finisher to the
machine, and turn main power
switch ON.
5. When the initial operation of the Fin-
isher is complete, turn on the follow-
ing switches of SW1.
When adjusting with A4: 3, 5
When adjusting with Letter: 3, 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583F3C514DA
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
<A4>
<Letter>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583F3C515DA
44
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6. After the initial operation of the Fin-
isher, press the PSW1 [1] on the Fin-
isher Control Board and make sure
that the alignment plate moves to the
selected paper size area.
7. Adjust the Alignment plate position
with PSW1 [1] or PSW2 [2].
When adjusting inward: Press
PSW1.
When adjusting outward: Press
PSW2.
The alignment plate will move
0.367mm every time the push switch
is pressed.
Alignment range is 2.936 mm.
8. When the adjustment is complete,
turn switch 8 of SW1 ON to set the
adjustment value.
9. Turn all adjustment switches OFF.
10. Turn main power switch OFF.
NOTE
When not all SW1 are OFF in step 3,
return to the original condition
according to the written note.
11. Return the Finisher to the original
status.
4583F3C516DA
4
1
5
1
1
2
1 11 1 4
CN2 CN21
C
N
1
6
C
N
1
2
C
N
1
7
LED2
PSW2
LED1
SW1
PSW1
[1] [2]
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583F3C517DA
45
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.2 PWB-B PK (Punch Control Board)
Symbol Description
1 SW1001 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output.
SW1001
LED1001
LED1002
LED1003 2
1
1
4
9
1
J1003 J1004
J
1
0
0
2
J
1
0
0
1
J
1
0
0
6
J
1
0
0
5
J1007
1
4
SW1002
SW1003
5 1 1 5
13 1
4583fs3514c0
[1]
[3]
[2]
46
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.2.1 Adjustment of the sensor output
Be sure to make this adjustment after replacing the Punch Control Board, the Side Reg-
istration Sensor (Photosensor Board or LED Board) or the Punch Dust Full Sensor
(Punch Dust Full Sensor Board or Punch Dust Full LED Board).
1. Set the bits 1 through 4 of
DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control
2. Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the
Punch Control Board. The sensor
output will be automatically adjusted.
When all LED1001, LED1002 and
LED1003 light up, the adjustment has
been completed.
3. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
6.2.2 Registration of the number of punch holes
In order for the Finisher to recognize the number of punch holes that can be achieved by
the installed Punch Unit, such number of punch holes is registered in the IC on the
Punch Control Board. Make this registration whenever the Punch Control Board has
been replaced.
However, this registration is not necessary if the EEP-ROM used on an old board has
been reinstalled to a new board.
2. Press SW1002 on the Punch Control Board to select the number of punch holes.
Each time SW1002 is pressed, the following display changes in the descending order
shown below:
3. Press SW1003 on the Punch Control Board twice. The number of punch holes will be
registered in the Punch Control Board.
The pressing of SW1003 changes the steady lighting of the LED to flickering, and the
pressing of SW1003 again changes the flickering of the LED to steady lighting. This com-
pletes the registration.
4. Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
ON
1 2 3 4
4583fs3515c0
ON
1 2 3 4
4583fs3516c0
Number of punch holes
LED
1001
LED
1002
LED
1003
2 (Punch Unit J1) ON OFF OFF
2/3 (Punch Unit K1) ON ON OFF
4 (Punch Unit G1) OFF ON OFF
4 (Punch Unit H1) OFF OFF ON
47
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
6.2.3 Procedure after replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of
the main unit.
3. Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the
Punch Control Board simultaneously.
This will initialize the EEP-ROM. After
the initialization, all LED1001,
LED1002 and LED1003 light up.
4. Adjust the sensor output, and regis-
ter the number of punch holes.
5. Set all bits of DIP SW 1001 to OFF.
6.2.4 Punch center position adjustment
This adjustment is made when the Punch lateral movement is changed from the lateral
registration motion (automatic through end face detection) to fixed system based on the
paper size.
the main unit.
7
3. Check that all keys of SW1 of the
Finisher Control Board are OFF.
4. Turn ON the Main Power Switch of
the main unit and wait until the Fin-
isher completes its initial operation.
Use the following procedure to clear
the adjustment of the Punch lateral
movement.
5. Turn ON keys 4, 5, 6, and 7 of SW1
of the Finisher Control Board.
6. Turn ON key 1 of SW1 of the Fin-
isher Control Board.
7. Press PSW1 and PSW2 of the
Finisher Control Board at the same
time.
ON
1 2 3 4
4583fs3517c0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3523c0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3524c0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3525c0
48
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
8. Turn OFF key 4 of SW1 of the Fin-
9. Wait until the machine becomes
capable of paper feed.
10. Feed one sheet of paper through the
machine. Fold the copy fed out of the
machine in half and check that the
punch holes are aligned with each
other.
Specifications:0 2 mm
If the specified range is not met, use
the following procedure to adjust the
Punch center position.
11. Press PSW1 or PSW2 of the Fin-
isher Control Board once according
to the direction of deviation.
Pressing PSW1 moves the punch
position to the front.
Pressing PSW2 moves the punch
position to the rear.
Each press of PSW1 or PSW2 moves
the position 1 mm. The adjustment
range should be within 5 mm.
12. Feed another sheet of paper. If the
punch hole position is not properly
adjusted, make the adjustment once
again.
When the adjustment procedure has
been completed, use the following pro-
cedure to finish the adjustment mode.
13. Turn OFF key 1 of SW1 of the Fin-
14. Turn OFF keys 5, 6, and 7 of SW1 of
the Finisher Control Board.
the main unit.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3526c0
4583fs3529c0
4583fs3528e0
FRONT SIDE REAR SIDE
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3527c0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3523c0
49
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
16. Turn ON key 7 of SW1 of the Fin-
NOTE
Flipping ON key 7 of SW1 validates
the setting made to the fixed sys-
tem based on the paper size as
changed from the lateral registra-
tion motion (automatic through end
face detection).
To return the setting back to the lat-
eral registration motion, flip OFF
key 7 of SW1.
17. Turn ON the Main Power Switch of
the main unit.
18. Reinstall the rear cover.
7
NOTE
The procedure must be carried out as specified. In particular, switching ON or OFF
must be performed properly.
If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure, stop the procedure
immediately. Then turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit, wait for 10
sec. or more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch. After performing these steps,
start the procedure over.
This adjustment is applicable only to the punch position center adjustment. The
adjustment range is 5 mm. It does not adjust for variations in the punch hole
positions.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4583fs3530c0
50
F
S
-
6
0
3
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

/

S
e
t
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
51
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Troubleshooting
7. Jam Display
7.1 Misfeed display
[1] 7401 Transport section Front Door 53
[2] 7403 Horizontal Transport section Horizontal Transport Cover 54
[3] 7407 Folding Position section Front Door 54
[4] 7405 Stapler section Front Door 55
[5] 7404 Paper Stack Exit section Front Door 55
4583F4C505DA
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
52
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.2 Sensor layout
[1] Turnover Empty Sensor PC6-HO [3] Folding Position Sensor PI10-FN
[2] Entrance Sensor PI1-FN [4] Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19-FN
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
4583fs4521c0
53
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3 Solution
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Check item Action
Replace paper.
procedures.
worn?
Finger.
Set as necessary.
Type Description
Transport section
misfeed detection
The Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) does not detect paper even after the lapse of
approx. 1.5 sec. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has received the paper exit
signal from the main unit.
Paper is not removed from the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) even after the lapse of
approx. 2 sec. after the Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) has detected paper edge.
Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PI1-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN CN16A FN-11 (ON) FS-603 B-8
54
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3.3 Horizontal Transport section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
7.3.4 Folding position section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
horizontal
transport section
misfeed detection
The Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a
given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Turnover
Empty Sensor (PC6-HO).
Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PC6-HO I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN CN21A FN-5 (ON) FS-603 G-7
Type Description
Folding position
section misfeed
detection
The Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) does not detect paper even after the set
period of time after the paper has been fed from the Transport Booklet Tray to the
stapling position during stapling operation.
Paper is not removed from the Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) even after the
lapse of approx. 10.5 sec. after the Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) has been driven
during stapling operation.
Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
55
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
7.3.5 Stapler section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
7.3.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Type Description
Stapler section
misfeed detection
The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not turned OFF or does not
return to its home position even after the set period of time after the stapler has
been driven.
Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PI19-FN I/O, sensor check
Type Description
Paper stack exit
section misfeed
detection
The Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN) remains activated when a copy stack, which
has been stapled together, is fed out.
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
2 PI6-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN CN5A FN-3 (ON) FS-603 G-5
3 M3-FN operation check PWB-A FN CN13A FN-3 to 6 FS-603 B-4
56
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8. Trouble code
NOTE
Before starting the troubleshooting in relation to the Punch Mechanism C11CX, be
sure to turn OFF the main power switch of the machine.
4583F4E504DA
C1180 Transport System Drive
malfunctions
The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not
unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
Folding Roller has started moving from its home position.
The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) is not
blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home
position.
C1181 Paddle Motor
malfunctions
The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle
has started moving from its home position.
The Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has
started moving from a position not the home position.
The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not
Booklet Roller has started moving from its home position.
The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet
Roller has started moving from a position not the home position.
C1183 Elevate Mechanism
malfunctions
The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has
started moving up.
An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of
time during operation of the tray.
57
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
C1192 Front Aligning Plate
Motor malfunctions
The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) is not
Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to
a position out of the home position.
The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) is not
Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the
home position to the home position.
C1193 Rear Aligning Plate
Motor malfunctions
The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) is not
Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to
a position out of the home position.
The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) is not
Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the
home position to the home position.
C11A4 Booklet Exit Motor
malfunctions
The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked
Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ini-
tial operation.
The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not unblocked
Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an
ordinary operation.
The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt
has started moving from a position not the home position during
an initial operation.
The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt
has started moving from a position not the home position during
an ordinary operation.
C11B1 Stapler Unit Slide Motor
malfunctions
The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler
Unit has started moving from its home position.
The Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has
started moving from a position not the home position.
58
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
NOTE
The Punch Unit detects punch-related malfunctions and notifies the Finisher of
any malfunction detected.
C11B4 Stapler/Folding Motor
malfunctions
The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch
operation has started.
time during a clinch operation.
The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding
Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position
during an initial operation.
The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding oper-
ation has been started during an ordinary operation.
The Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding oper-
ation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked dur-
ing an ordinary operation.
time during a folding operation.
C11C1 Punch Control Board
malfunctions
No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within
a given period of time during initial communications.
No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within
a given period of time during ordinary communications.
There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as
checked twice.
The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an oper-
ation request is made from the Finisher.
C11C2 Punch Side Registration
Motor malfunctions
The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch
Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home posi-
tion.
The Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) is not blocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch
Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the
home position.
C11C3 Punch Motor
malfunctions
The home position is not detected within a given period of time
after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn.
An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a
given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor.
The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls out-
side the threshold value range.
C11C5 Punch Sensor
malfunctions
The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or less when the illuminating
voltage is set to 4.4 V.
The light receiving voltage is 2.5 V or more when the illuminating
voltage is set to 0 V.
The illuminating voltage setting is 4.4 V or more after the adjust-
ment has been made.
C1401 Backup RAM malfunction Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded
in it and writing operation is not correctly performed even with
two retry sequences (a total of three writing sequences).
59
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3 Solution
8.3.1 C1180: Transport System Drive malfunctions
8.3.2 C1181: Paddle Motor malfunctions
Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN)
Transport Motor (M1-FN)
Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the motor connectors for proper

2
sary.

4
PWB-A FN CN10A FN-3 to 6 FS-603 B-6
Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN)
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN)
Paddle Motor (M2-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

5
60
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.3 C1183: Elevate Mechanism malfunctions
(1) Upper Limit Sensor
8.3.4 C1192: Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions
Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1

Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI4-FN)
Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
61
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.5 C1193: Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions
8.3.6 C11A4: Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions
Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor
(PI5-FN)
Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN)
Exit Motor (M3-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
62
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.7 C11B1: Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions
8.3.8 C11B4: Stapler/Folding Motor malfunctions
(1) Wiring
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN)
Slide Motor (M8-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

3 PI18-FN I/O, sensor check PWB-A FN CN11A FN-3 (ON) FS-603 B to C-5
4
Staple Drive Home Position Sensor (PI19-FN)
Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Check the motor connectors for proper

2
sary.

3 PI19-FN I/O, sensor check
4
63
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
(2) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Stapler Section)
(3) Home Position Sensor
Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
64
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
(4) Stapler/Crease Clock Sensor (Saddle Section)
8.3.9 C11C1: Punch Control Board malfunctions
Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

4
Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait
for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.

2
Check the connection condition
between the Punch Unit and PWB-A
FN.

3
Measure the voltage between CN14-5
(+) and CN14-3 (-) of the PWB-A FN. Is
the voltage 24VDC?

4 Initialize Punch Unit EEP-ROM.
5 PWB-B PK replacement
65
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.10 C11C2: Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions
8.3.11 C11C3: Punch Motor malfunctions
Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1

2 PI2P-PK I/O, sensor check PWB-B PK J1006B PK-3 (ON) FS-603 H-2
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK)
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P-PK)
Punch Motor (M1P-PK)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

5
M1P-PK operation check when the Main
PWB-B PK J1002B PK-1 to 2 FS-603 H-1 to 2
66
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
8.3.12 C11C5: Punch Sensor malfunctions
(1) Side Registration Sensor
(2) Wastes Full Sensor
Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1

Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board
(PWB-E PK)
Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
between PWB-B PK and PWB-E PK.

2
between PWB-B PK and PWB-F PK.

3 PWB-E PK replacement
4 PWB-F PK replacement
67
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
(3) Finisher Control Board
8.3.13 C1401: Backup RAM malfunction
Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN)
Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN)
Shift Motor (M6-FN)
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
necessary.

2
sary.

3 PI9-FN I/O sensor check PWB-A FN CN5A FN-12 (ON) FS-603 G-6
4 PI17-FN I/O sensor check PWB-A FN CN15A FN-6 (ON) FS-603 G-4
5
Step Action
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Disconnect and then connect the power
cord. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch,
wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON

2
Check the connectors for proper con-
nection on the PWB-A FN.

68
F
S
-
6
0
3
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g
Blank Page
2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan Printed in Japan
DD4038PE1-0800 DD4038PE1-0800
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Bizhub C250 Field Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub C250 Field Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub C250 Field Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

(20 sheets or less)

(10 sheets or less)

YES Change PU1.

YES Change PU1.

YES Change PU1.

YES Change PU1.

You might also like